2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

324
Office furniture distributors office furniture solutions 2015 2015 E V E R Y D A Y O F F I C E F U R N I T U R E B U Y E R S G U I D E

Transcript of 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Page 1: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Off ice furni ture distr ibutors

o f f i c e f u r n i t u r e s o l u t i o n s

20152015

2015 COVERS FOR FLICKY.indd 2 08/12/2014 12:21

E V E R Y D A Y O F F I C E F U R N I T U R E

B U Y E R S G U I D E

Page 2: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Welcome to our 2015 furniture catalogue!

A poor working environment is the second most quoted reason for leaving a company (after money!)

Within our all new 2015 furniture catalogue, which is even bigger and better than ever before, you will find a myriad of high quality products to suit your every need from reception to boardroom and every environment in between.

Even more importantly you need not break the bank, we have beautiful and functional furniture at a wide range of price points to suit your budget.

Decades of experience

Clear concise catalogues and web site

Great sales support and consultation from enquiry to installation

Design service

Huge product range

Massive stocks of best selling lines

Packaging removed and recycled

Furniture removal and recycle service available

Specials Service

Competitive and all inclusive pricing

2015 COVERS FOR FLICKY.indd 3 08/12/2014 12:21

What We Offer

Delivery and Installation service.

Prices shown can be considered as nett Euro guidelines after discounts .

and we offer alternatives and may do better - just ask.

We have partnered with Woodstock Leabank to produce this Buyers GuideIt is intended to assist you the client in quickly creating a specification and budget costings.

Page 3: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Real wood veneer tops combine style with practicality.

Chiltern Page 189

A broad range of chairs with a full range of options.

Fully upholstered visitor and lounge chair.

Quietly stylish or eye-catching schemes can be easily created for this executive furniture.

Stylish, flexible modular range of seating and accessories that offers superb spatial fit and functionality.

Newly extended and improved range of entry level furniture available in two standard finishes and three special finishes.

An elegant and stylish post legged modular system for individual desks or an entire office space.

A classic selection of tables and chairs to compliment a broad range of dining areas.

Highlights for 2015

1

Kind Pages 22, 35 & 67-69

Cascara Pages 226-227

Aston Pages 170-173

Hive Pages 230-231

Fraction Plus Pages 82-89

Eclipse Pages 114-119

Dining Pages 234-235

1 Highlights Information (15).indd 1 03/12/2014 10:04

Page 4: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

You have placed your order on time and accurately

Our vehicle can access the site

Parking for a large vehicle is available

Any special security or access arrangements are notified in advance

If available and necessary lifts are made available to our fitters

Other works likely to interfere with the installation eg. carpet fitting, decorating or electrical works are complete.

Delivery and Installation

2

SafesShown on pages 268 - 269; as these products can be very heavy to deliver and install – they may require special delivery and be subject to an installation survey, with any subsequent charging agreed prior to delivery.

Storage Interior FittingsStorage units will be sited at point of use with interior fittings left for customer self installation. Full instructions will be supplied with each fitting.

The vast majority of products in this catalogue are priced for a complete order to installation service. We will take your goods to the point of use, unpack the goods and professionally assemble any products that require this service. An estimate of delivery time is shown at the bottom of each page.

In order to achieve the best results for you please ensure that:

Most importantly please provide a mobile telephone number and/or e-mail address of the person receiving the order as we send a text message to notify you of planned delivery date and will also call prior to arrival on site to ensure that you are kept as informed as possible.

CAD - Meeting Room Plan

Small Orders May be subjected to a small order charge. This will be notified at the time of order.

From Concept to CompletionFrom the start of a project we can take the initial drawings and concept through to completion.

Additional Charges

2-3 Delivery Info Buyers Guide (15).indd 1 03/12/2014 16:36

Page 5: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Buyers Guide

3

Ordering ProcedureTo process your order accurately, please ensure your order contains the following information:

1. Full product code

2. The wood/metal finish or fabric choice of the product eg:

3. Product quantity

4. Quoted price (excluding VAT)

5. Full delivery address, including postcode

6. Contact name and mobile telephone number and/or e-mail address at point of delivery

7. Purchase order number/reference

8. Any special arrangements e.g. parking restrictions etc

Pricing, Corrections and ContinuityEvery effort has been made to ensure that prices and product details are correct at the time of going to press (December 2014). Prices can only be guaranteed for 6 months from this date.

All prices are exclusive of VAT, which will be charged at the rate prevailing at the time of invoice. We reserve the right to make product changes, price changes and product improvements during the life of this catalogue. E & OE.

Notice of Damage, Loss, Non-ReceiptAll goods must be checked and signed for on receipt ofdelivery. We shall not accept claims for missing, faulty or damaged goods, if the delivery note is signed “un-checked”.

Failure to adhere to this may result in charges for replacements. If upon receipt, your goods are damaged, incomplete, or incorrect, notification must be made within 24 hours of delivery.

Wood Veneer FinishWhile manufacturers strive to achieve excellent colour matching, shading of real wood veneer cannot be guaranteed. Exposure to natural light will alter a veneers colour over a period of time. Finishes illustrated within this catalogue may be altered slightly by the printing process and should only be used as a guide.

FabricsWhere a fabric covered product is available from stock the relevant fabric colour is shown on the page. Further details of fabric swatches are shown on page 320 of this catalogue. Fabric colours illustrated within this catalogue may be altered slightly by the printing process and should only be used as a guide, natural fibres such as wool may experience a shade variance.

There is a vast selection of materials and colours available, with the fabric manufacturers providing an excellent swatch service. This is accessed through their web sites noted on page 320.

Cancellation of Orders/DeliveriesThe cancellation of Stock orders must be received andacknowledged in writing. The Company reserves the right to charge an administration fee for the cancellation of a Stock order.

Orders for Specials cannot be cancelled once the order has been accepted. A storage charge may be levied against any deliveries that are not accepted on the confirmed delivery/installation date.

Warranty GuaranteesSeatingThe warranty offered indicated by the following symbolindicates the number of years that the product is guaranteed to be free from defects and refers to metal and plastic parts. Fabric guarantees vary depending on which fabric cover is used and the number of hours daily use that the chair is subjected to. The warranty becomes invalid if in the reasonable opinion of the company the product has been misused or used outside of its advertised weight tolerances or time periods. Any chair that requires repair will be collected and repaired at our site within a period of time deemed reasonable by the company. Loan chairs will not be provided whilst this operation is carried out.

FurnitureThe warranty offered indicated by the following symbolindicates the number of years that the product is guaranteed to be free from defects subject to normal wear and tear. If a product becomes faulty during this period the company will undertake to repair or if this is not possible, replace the item within an agreed and reasonable timeframe. If the product can be repaired, loan furniture will not be supplied whilst this operation is carried out.

Beech Silver

BCH

1year

guarantee

5year

guarantee

2-3 Delivery Info Buyers Guide (15).indd 2 03/12/2014 16:36

Page 6: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Services

4

Space Planning

Formed in 2009, our specialist furniture and electrical equipment removal service has supported many companies to strengthen their environmental credentials and corporate identity through our recycling scheme.

Call us now for a survey and quotation.

The correct planning of a workspace, utilises its maximum capacity and produces a work friendly and safe environment.

Allow us to hear and understand your requirements. Once your objectives have been analysed, your space will be designed to be efficient and effective based upon operational and aesthetic requirements, and financial considerations.

Following industry and legislative guidelines the 2D, or 3D CAD will allow you to visualize the space and achieve an effective working environment.

REMOVAL & RECYCLE SERVICE

R&RREMOVAL & RECYCLE SERVICE

R&RREMOVAL & RECYCLE SERVICE

R&RREMOVAL & RECYCLE SERVICE

REMOVAL & RECYCLE SERVICER&R REMOVAL & RECYCLE SERVICE

R&R

REMOVR&R

4-5 Contents (15).indd 1 03/12/2014 10:08

Page 7: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Contents

5

Seating Pages 10-77

Executive Furniture Pages 156-173

Reception & Breakout Pages 196-231

Storage and Filing Pages 248-269

Desking, Storage and Screens Pages 82-153

Tables Pages 176-193

Cafe & Dining Pages 234-245

Education Pages 272-319

4-5 Contents (15).indd 2 03/12/2014 10:08

Page 8: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Seating

6

Our standard fabric choice comes from two of the UK’s premier fabric manufacturers, Camira and Bradbury. The majority of chairs featured in this section can be upholstered in any fabric, see page 320 for further information.

When placing your order please refer to the swatches shown on the pages, and suffix the correct fabric code for example BLK for Black = PSM1BLK (see example below).

Kind MeshA unique product featuring a dual mesh back with 9 mesh colours available as standard.

Code Description

PSM1BLK High Back Operator Chair Permanent Contact Back

Standard Tilt Backrest fully adjustable for height and angle. Gas seat height adjustment.

Permanent Contact Back

Backrest fully adjustable for height and angle. Gas seat height adjustment.

Independent Seat and Back

Independent seat and back tilt adjustment. Lockable in any position. Tilt can be adjusted to suit users weight. Gas seat height adjustment.

Asynchro Tilt Backrest fully adjustable for height and angle. Seat angle adjustable. Gas seat height adjustment. 2 lever mechanism.

Synchronised Tilt Synchronised seat and back tilt can be locked in any position for firm support. Tilt can be adjusted to suit the users weight.

Knee Tilt Under knee combined seat and back tilt. Torsion controlled and adjustable for weight with gas seat height adjustment.

Lock Tilt Adjustable torsion control and locking tilt mechanism. Gas seat height adjustment.

150kg max.weight tolerance

8recommendedhours usage

Amongst icons for delivery and guarantees, you’ll notice these two icons. The first denotes how many hours usage per day that particular chair is recommended for. This tends to come into question with the Operator and 24 hour chairs. The second dictates the tested weight tolerance of a chair, and it’s components.

Tilt Mechanism Lockable back angle adjustment. Anti-shock for seat back.

Mechanisms

Product Information

Fabric Information

Ordering Information

2015 Range Highlights

Whether your in need of an entry level office chair, something with a breathable mesh back or fully adjustable for day long comfort, or both! You will find a solution from the following section. New for 2015 are the Evolve and Evolve Heavy Duty, Kind, i-Sit Mesh, Is Mesh, Moore, Atlas, Classic, Xenon, Opula, Traditional, Ocean, Venice, Barcelona, Academy, Step, One. This section concludes with seating ideal for meeting and general purpose with the Soft Seating now shown included in the Reception & Breakout section beginning on page 196.

BarcelonaA comfortable and stylish chair Ideal for training, conference or lectures.

FinsburyWith an iconic design this chair offers superb comfort.

Evolve & Evolve DeluxeOffering comfort & practicality for a very affordable price, with a deluxe version available.

6-7 Seating Intro - Full Page (15).indd 1 03/12/2014 17:43

Page 9: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

7

6-7 Seating Intro - Full Page (15).indd 2 03/12/2014 17:43

Page 10: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

8

Ope

rato

r, ta

sk

and

post

ure

Mes

h

TopazPage 15

Evolve Page 10

MyPage 21

WhyPage 26

Air - UnitePage 32

My MeshPage 37

PrismPage 12

PoisePage 18

MoodPage 23

IsPage 28-29

Team Plus MeshPage 34

Sense MeshPage 39

TwoPage 13

Lynx - CougarPage 19

Re-act DeluxePage 24

i-SitPage 30

Kind MeshPage 35

i-Sit MeshPage 40

May’BPage 20

PyramidPage 14

SensePage 25

QuattroPage 31

BassPage 36

Is MeshPage 41

SolarPage 17

KindPage 22

CaptivePage 27

EtnaPage 33

LoretoPage 38

Evolve Deluxe Page 11

seating contents

8-9 Seating Contents (15).indd 1 04/12/2014 10:52

Page 11: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

9

Exec

utiv

eM

eetin

g &

G

ener

al P

urpo

se

Sapphire & Atlas Page 44

2000 & 2600Page 55

OceanPage 49

IkonPage 60-61

Kind SwivelPage 67

IsPage 74-75

Obsidian & Tanzanite Page 43

WorkchairPage 54

i-SitPage 48

StepPage 59

La KendoPage 66

Alina MeshPage 73

OpulaPage 46

VenicePage 51

AcademyPage 57

HostPage 64

LeolaPage 70-71

OnePage 77

Classic & XenonPage 45

EnnaPage 50

BarcelonaPage 56

Xpresso 1Page 62-63

Kind Page 68-69

Colletta Page 76

Amber & MoorePage 42

TraditionalPage 47

StakkaPage 52-53

Client 4 TurnerPage 58

ArenaPage 65

AlinaPage 72

seating contents

8-9 Seating Contents (15).indd 2 04/12/2014 10:52

Page 12: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

A B C D

EvolveOur entry level operator chair Evolve offers a comfortable and practical chair for a very affordable price. Available from stock in our two most popular colours and with a choice of arms and mechanisms. The range in complimented by a high draughting or cashier chair and a heavy duty chair for heavy use.

10

High Back Draughting Chair

Evolve Heavy Duty

Code £

EVO2 - 2 Lever Mechanism 99

EVO3 - 3 Lever Mechanism 106

Black base as standard. With castors.

Back Height:

Back Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

Dimensions (mm)

Back Height:

Back Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

500

420

450

440-560

500

420

450

615-730

Code £

EV02DC - 2 Lever Mechanism 140

Black base as standard.

Permanent contact back. With glides.

Code £

EVOHDR - 3 Lever Mechanism 240

With ratchet back height adjustment.

680 Black base as standard.

Fixed Arms

2 Lever Mechanism A B C. 3 Lever Mechanism A B C D

Height Adjustable Arms

Evolve High Back

Pair of Fixed Arms FBLA 20

Pair of Height Adjustable Arms ABL/H/S 33

New for 2015

£Options

operator, task & posture

EVO2 shown

8recommendedhours usage

8recommendedhours usage

110kg max.weight tolerance

150kg max.weight tolerance

1year

guarantee

3year

guarantee

Dimensions (mm)

Back Height:

Back Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

580

480

480

440-560

Budget operator chair

from £99

Stock Fabric Colours Special Order Fabric Colours

Charcoal Blue Black GreenGrey Claret

Specials delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled, stock within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

EVOHDR shown Evolve Heavy

Duty Details

Evolve High Back Details

CHA BLUE

10-11 Evolve - Evolve Deluxe (15).indd 1 04/12/2014 12:12

Page 13: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Evolve DeluxeAs an extension of the Evolve range the Evolve Deluxe offers a more generous seat and back size as well as a more robust mechanism and gas lift to accept 150kg weight tolerance. The Deluxe version also offers a complete fully loaded chair from stock with seat slide, ratchet back height adjustment, pump up lumbar support and a modern black metal base as standard.

11

operator, task & posture

Evolve Deluxe

Dimensions (mm)

Back Height:

Back Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

580

480

480

540-660

Code £

EVODHDR 290

• Height adjustable arms

• Pump up lumbar support

• Modern black metal base

• Seat slide

• Back with ratchet height adjustment

• 3 lever mechanism

Heavy duty and cost effective

Stock Fabric ColoursSpecial Order Fabric Colours

8recommendedhours usage

150kg max.weight tolerance

3year

guarantee

Charcoal BlueBlack GreenGrey Claret

Specials delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled, stock within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

EVOHDR shown with height adjustable arms as standard

A B C D E

CHA BLUE

10-11 Evolve - Evolve Deluxe (15).indd 2 04/12/2014 12:12

Page 14: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Prism

Standard Colours

Black Blue Red Charcoal

The Prism operator chair comes with a waterfall-front seat and is available with or without arms. This chair also features a contoured back rest and is offered from stock with a choice of fabric colours; black, blue, red and charcoal and three arm styles.

12

High Back - Asynchro Mechanism High Back - Synchro Mechanism

Code £

PSM1 122

Code £

ZPSM1/FC1D 182

Dimensions (mm)

Back Height:

Back Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

Back Height:

Back Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

Back Height:

Back Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

480

450

440

460-570

480

450

440

460-570

480

450

440

460-570

Code £

PSM2 140

Code £

PSM3 149

Shown with Fixed Arms

PSMLA

PSMFA

PSMHA

PSMCB

Shown with Height Adjustable Arms

High Back - Permanent Contact Back

Pair of Fixed Arms PSMLA 18

Pair of Height Adjustable Arms PSMHA 46

Pair of Folding Arms PSMFA 54

Chrome Base PSMCB 49

RED CHABLUEBLK

Dimensions (mm)

Back Height:

Back Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

480

450

440

625-740

8recommendedhours usage

110kg max.weight tolerance

1year

guarantee

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Options

High Back - Draughting Chair

£

operator, task and posture

12-13 Prism - Two (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 09:46

Page 15: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Options

Two

13

Medium Back - With fixed armsMedium Back - With height adjustable arms

Code £

TW01 144

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

480

450-570

430

480

450-570

430

480

450-570

430

Code £

TW02 176

Code £

TW03 204

SSC

Medium Back - With no arms

Polished Base: C 41

Seat Slide SS 37

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

A chair to meet every office need, the traditionally designed Two stands for flexibility, quality & comfort, whilst not compromising the importance of good ergonomics. The Two chair has a height adjustable back, a back rake mechanism and 5cm twin wheel hooded castors.

High Back - with fixed arms

High Back - with height adjustable arms

Code £

TW04 157

High Back Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

480

450-570

430

Code £

TW05 188

Code £

TW06 214TW06

High Back - with no arms

150kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee TTestingA fantastic value fully tested contract chair. BS 5459-2 SATRA Strength & Stability. BS EN 1335-1 FIRA Ergonomics Requirement.

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

operator, task and posture

£

12-13 Prism - Two (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 09:46

Page 16: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

PyramidA proven, affordable, entry level option with enduring popularity, the Pyramid has performed perfectly in thousands of environments. It is provided with gas height adjustment, hand wheel back height adjustment and durable moulded plastic back cover. The range is stocked in two attractive colours and is normally available in any fabric choice within 15 days.

14

High Back Mid Back Draughting ChairCode £

PYR15 - Permanent Contact Back 197

PYR16 - Tilt Mechanism 204

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width

Seat Depth:

Seat Height (Min):

Seat Height (Max):

Back Height:

Seat Width

Seat Depth:

Seat Height (Min):

Seat Height (Max):

Back Height:

Seat Width

Seat Depth:

Seat Height (Min):

Seat Height (Max):

480

450

450

580

490

480

450

450

580

590

480

450

580

830

Code £

PYR25 - Permanent Contact Back 209

PYR26 - Tilt Mechanism 215

Code £

ZPYR15PYRD - Permanent Contact Back 347

Shown with Fixed Arms

PYRLA PYRHA PYRB3

Upholstered in Omega Plus Swizzle

Mid Back

Prices shown are for Pyra fabrics, for other Band 1 fabrics including Advantage add 12%. Additionally,

see our fabric information on page 320.

Standard Colours

Black Blue

BLUEBLK150kg max.weight tolerance

3year

guarantee

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Fixed Loop Arms

Code PYRLA Per Pair 38

Chrome Base & Gas Lift

Code PYRB3 Base 82

Height Adjustable Arms

Code PYRHA Per Pair 60

£ £

Options

operator, task and posture

8recommendedhours usage

14-15 Pyramid - Topaz (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 09:48

Page 17: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Full Back - with 3D adjustable arms

Options

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

480

420-530

480

Code £

TP13B 312

Black base. Double curvature & height

adjustable back. Back rake mechanism.

5cm twin wheel hooded castors.

TopazFor comfort and style, Topaz is offered with a fully contoured seat pad and back rest. The Topaz’s superior foam and contoured back ensure it met the test standard and comfort levels for a 24 hour operation.

15

High Back - with 3D adjustable arms Full Back - with no arms

Code £

TP5B 213

Black base. Double curvature & height

adjustable back. Back rake mechanism.

5cm twin wheel hooded castors.

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

490

420-530

450

480

450-570

430

480

420-530

480

Code £

TP7B 290

Black base. Double curvature & height

adjustable back. Back rake mechanism.

5cm twin wheel hooded castors.

Code £

TP11B 234

Black base. Double curvature & height

adjustable back. Back rake mechanism.

5cm twin wheel hooded castors.

SS C

High Back - with no arms

£

Seat Slide: SS 37

Polished Base: C 41

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

150kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

TTestingA fully functional 24 hour tested chair. BS 5459-2 SATRA Strength & Stability. BS EN 1335-1 FIRA Ergonomics Requirement.

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

operator, task and posture

24recommendedhours usage

14-15 Pyramid - Topaz (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 09:48

Page 18: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

816

Information75% of the working population of the UK is chair bound for more than six hours a day.

Lower back pain is the second largest cause of absence from work in Europe.

This type of absence costs the nation £5 billion a year and 50 million working days are lost each year globally.

Technology ExplainedAs you change body position during the course of the day, the Air Flo design enhance support and follow the natural body movements with the continual distribution of air between the dual air capsules contained within the seat upholstery.

This feature is available on the Poise, Mood, Captive and Quattro chairs.

The below icon identifies posture chairs within this section.

Seating that promotes positive posture for superior comfort by allowing full user adjustability.

Posture

16-17 Posture Page - Solar (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 09:58

Page 19: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

917

High Back Solar - Synchro Mechanism with Black Base

Code Seat Inflatable Arms £

Slide Lumbar

SOL5MB No No No 208

SOL5MINFB No Yes No 237

SOL6MB No No Adjustable 270

SOL6MINFB No Yes Adjustable 298

SOL7MB Yes No Adjustable 289

SOL7MINFB Yes Yes Adjustable 318

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Height (Min):

Seat Height (Max):

Back Height:

Seat Depth: (Min):

Seat Depth (Max):

Seat Height (Min):

Seat Height (Max):

Back Height:

Seat Depth: (Min):

Seat Depth (Max):

440

560

510

420

480

440

560

510

420

480

Code Seat Inflatable Arms £

Slide Lumbar

SOL5SB No No No 208

SOL5SINFB No Yes No 237

SOL6SB No No Adjustable 270

SOL6SINFB No Yes Adjustable 298

SOL7SB Yes No Adjustable 289

SOL7SINFB Yes Yes Adjustable 318

High Back Solar - Independent Mechanism with Black Base

150kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

T

Included Functions

SOL7MINFBSculptured Back Detail

TestingA fantastic value fully tested contract chair. BS 5459-2 SATRA Strength & Stability. BS EN 1335-1 FIRA Ergonomics Requirement.

Height Adjustable Arms

Full Seat & Back Adjustments

Seat Height Adjustment

Seat Slide Adjustment

Inflatable Lumbar

SolarDesigned and developed to provide a multitude of functions maintaining style and quality, Solar is the ideal solution for all of your task chair requirements.Simple controls ensure the user can obtain a personalised sitting position, creating a comfortable experience. Standard features include adjustable arms, seat slide, inflatable lumbar and full seat & back movements.

Posture

operator, task and posture

Priced in Camira Advantage/Phoenix fabric, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

16-17 Posture Page - Solar (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 09:58

Page 20: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Poise

18

operator, task and posture

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Providing a practical and extensive solution to the solving of preventative and corrective posture issues where performance, design and value go hand-in-hand. The Poise encourages correct posture in a series of simple adjustments to maximise the comfort and support of the user. A heavy-duty under seat tension control maximises the chairs adjustability and allows the chair to move in harmony with natural body movements.

150kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

Poise Square Back PosturePoise Radial Back PostureCode £

PS1 260

Black base, no arms. Independent back and seat angle adjustment.

Large waterfall seat. High radial back rest. Ratchet back height

adjustment. Body weight tension control. Gas lift height adjustment.

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Height (Min):

Seat Height (Max):

Seat Width:

Back Height:

Seat Depth:

Back Width:

Seat Height (Min):

Seat Height (Max):

Seat Width:

Back Height:

Seat Depth:

Back Width:

460

570

520

545-635

490-540

450

460

570

520

545-635

490-540

460

Code £

PS2 260

Black base, no arms. Independent back and seat angle adjustment.

Large waterfall seat. High square back rest. Ratchet back height

adjustment. Body weight tension control. Gas lift height adjustment.

Options

Shown with ADJ1 arms

Shown with ADJ1 arms

Suffix/SL Suffix/IL Suffix/ADJ1 Suffix/ADJ3 Suffix/AF Suffix/PF Suffix/ASC Suffix/AB

Priced in Camira Advantage/Phoenix fabric, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Seat Slide Suffix/SL 28

Inflatable Lumbar Suffix/IL 33

Height Adjustable Arms Suffix/ADJ1 44

Height & Depth Adjustable Arms Suffix/ADJ3 60

Foldaway Adjustable Arms Suffix/AF 60

Performance Foam Suffix/PF 17

Air Flo Suffix/ASC 44

Polished Base Suffix/AB 44

Coccyx Cutout Suffix/CC 14

£ £

Posture

18-19 Poise - Lynx-Cougar (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 10:09

Page 21: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Lynx - CougarThe Lynx has a generously padded seat and back cushion for day-long comfort, plus an attractive stitch detail. It also comes with height adjustable arms as standard. The asynchronised mechanism plus tension control allows full user adjustability.The Cougar’s large back rest and seat pad provide superior levels of comfort for any working environment. Height adjustable arms are included along with an asynchronised mechanism for full user adjustability.

19

operator, task and posture

150kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

Dimensions (mm)

Back Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Seat Width:

Back Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Seat Width:

450

450-525

460

525

510

490-565

490

515

Cougar Chrome Base Option

Chrome base and arms included

Code CO/PAB 85

£

E Space

See our tables section from page 176.

Cougar High Back ChairCode £

LYN1/HIDE/BLK 248

Black leather facings.

Height adjustable arms.

Chrome base and gas lift.

Code £

COU1/HIDE/BLK 403

Black leather facings.

Height adjustable arms.

Black base and gas lift.

Lynx Medium Back Armchair

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled.Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

HeavyDuty!

8recommendedhours usage

CO/PAB

18-19 Poise - Lynx-Cougar (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 10:09

Page 22: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

OptionsFixed Arm Chair MYB05 270

Seat Slide SS 37

Inflatable Lumbar IL 37

May’B

20 Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

May’b offers generous sizing for managerial applications. Combined with ratchet back height adjustment and an optional seat slide, the May’b provides an outstanding ergonomic fit. Additionally, contoured interior foam provides improved support.

SS IL

150kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guaranteeTTesting

An excellent ergonomic fit.BS 5459-2 SATRA Strength &

Stability.

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320.

operator, task and posture

High Back - with no arms

May’B High Back Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

470

460-570

440

Code £

MYB04 233

Double curvature & height adjustable

back. Seat height adjustment. Black moulded

base. 5cm twin wheel hooded castors.

High Back - with height adjustable arms

Code £

MYB06 293

Double curvature & height adjustable back.

Seat height adjustment. Black moulded base.

5cm twin wheel hooded castors.

MYB05

£

20-21 Mayb- My (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 10:25

Page 23: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

MyPractical, ergonomic task chair range with a far higher specification than it’s price point would suggest. Manufactured using the latest materials and technologies My is also an environmentally conscious option, up to 98% recyclable with appropriate fabric options.

21Delivered to a room of choice within 35 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

150kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guaranteeT

TestingA fantastic value fully tested chair.BS 5459 PART 2 : 2000 EN/BS 1335 PART1, 2 & 3.

24recomended

hours usage

Upholstered Back Task Chair Upholstered Back Task Chair

Permanent Contact Back. Fixed Seat. Black

nylon base. Black height adjustable

arms. Ratchet back height/lumbar adjustment.

My Chair Dimensions (mm)

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Seat Height:

1000-1200

630

530

470-600

Code £

02MYBA1 326

Synchro mechanism. Fixed Seat. Black nylon

base. Black height adjustable arms. Ratchet

back height/lumbar adjustment.

Synchro mechanism. Detachable seat pad. Seat

Slide. Black nylon base. Black height adjustable

arms. Ratchet back height/lumbar adjustment.

PB PA

Upholstered Back Task Chair

Polished Base Code PB 57

Polished Aluminium Multi Adjustable Arms

Code PA (seat slide version only) 68

Options

Dynamic Mechanism

Weight tension controlled constant back support rest, side tension adjustment, anti-shock 4 position locking.

Synchro Mechanism

This provides automatic adjustable back and seat action at a ratio of 2:5:1. Also torsion control which enables full dynamic sitting allowing the chair to be adjusted to the weight of the user.

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

High SpecLow Price

operator, task and posture

Code £

02MYBD1 217

£

Code £

02MYAA1 355

02MYAA1

20-21 Mayb- My (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 10:25

Page 24: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

KDT43B

Kind

22

Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled.

Certain exceptions see page 2.

New for 2015

operator, task and posture

OptionsSynchro Mechanism SY 25

Seat Slide SS 27

Silver Base P 44

Polished Base C 44

Adjustable Head Rest HR 65

Polished Aluminium Arms (3D Only) AC 37

£

KDT33B KDT21B

KDT12B

Black frame as standard. Shown with optional polished base (C) option.

Polished Base

Synchro Mechanism & Seat Slide not available with full back task chair.

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320.

Full Back Task Chair High Back Task ChairCode £

KDT41B - With No Arms 500

KDT43B - 3D Adjustable Arms 561

Upholstered seat and back. Adjustable lumbar support.

Synchronised mechanism. Seat Slide. Black nylon base.

Dimensions (mm)

Back Height: 780-840 Seat Height: 460-580

Seat Depth: 440 Overall Depth: 670

Overall Width: 670 Back Width: 450

Back Height: 620-680 Seat Height: 460-580

Seat Depth: 440 Overall Depth: 670

Overall Width: 670 Back Width: 450

Back Height: 620-680 Seat Height: 440-560

Seat Depth: 440 Overall Depth: 670

Overall Width: 670 Back Width: 450

Code £

KDT31B - With No Arms 408

KDT33B - 3D Adjustable Arms 467

Upholstered seat and back. Adjustable lumbar support.

Synchronised mechanism. Seat Slide. Black nylon base.

Code £

KDT21B - With No Arms 293

KDT22B - Fixed Arms 339

KDT23B - 3D Adjustable Arms 353

Upholstered seat and back. Adjustable lumbar support.

Body weight responsive mechanism. Black nylon base.

Full Back & Head Rest Task Chair

Kind task is available as a high back. An adjustable head rest can also be specified to provide the user with additional support. Kind medium back task chair offers a height adjustable back and features a body weight responsive mechanism as standard with the option of fixed or 3D adjustable arms.

Code £

KDT11B - With No Arms 284

KDT12B - Fixed Arms 330

KDT13B - 3D Adjustable Arms 344

Upholstered seat and back. Adjustable lumbar support.

Body weight responsive mechanism. Black nylon base.

Dimensions (mm)

Back Height: 520-580 Seat Height: 440-560

Seat Depth: 440 Overall Depth: 670

Overall Width: 670 Back Width: 450

Medium Back Task Chair

150kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

8-10recommended

hour usage

See pages35 & 67-69

for more Kind chairs

22-23 Kind - Mood (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 10:31

Page 25: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Mood

23Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

The Mood provides a preventative, corrective and affordable solution to back care. Distinctive support curvature and multi-adjustment encourages correct posture. Heavy-duty tensionable under seat control, maximising adjustability and allowing the chair to move in harmony with natural body movements. Generous Tri-Curved, fully upholstered backrest and double curved seats with enhanced moulded CMHR foam cushions.

150kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

Mood Deluxe Square Back PostureCode £

MD2 333

Black base, no arms. Independent back and seat angle adjustment. Large

waterfall seat. High fully upholstered tri-curved square back rest. Ratchet back

height adjustment. Body weight tension control. Gas lift height adjustment.

Seat Height (Min):

Seat Height (Max):

Seat Width:

Back Height:

Seat Depth:

Back Width:

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Height (Min):

Seat Height (Max):

Seat Width:

Back Height:

Seat Depth:

Back Width:

460

570

520

600-675

520

500

460

570

520

600-675

520

500

Mood Deluxe Radial Back Posture

Shown with ADJ1 arms & fully upholstered tri-curved back

Shown with ADJ1 arms

Priced in Camira Advantage/Phoenix fabric, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

operator, task and posture

Posture

Suffix/SL Suffix/IL Suffix/ADJ1 Suffix/ADJ3 Suffix/AF Suffix/PF Suffix/ASC Suffix/AB Suffix/HRI

Options

Seat Slide Suffix/SL 28

Inflatable Lumbar Suffix/IL 33

Height Adjustable Arms Suffix/ADJ1 44

Height & Depth Adjustable Arms Suffix/ADJ3 60

Foldaway Adjustable Arms Suffix/AF 60

Performance Foam Suffix/PF 17

Air Flo Suffix/ASC 44

Polished Base Suffix/AB 44

Coccyx Cutout Suffix/CC 14

Adjustable Headrest Suffix/HR1 72

£ £

Code £

MD1 333

Black base, no arms. Independent back and seat angle adjustment. Large

waterfall seat. High fully upholstered tri-curved radial back rest. Ratchet back

height adjustment. Body weight tension control. Gas lift height adjustment.

22-23 Kind - Mood (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 10:31

Page 26: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Re-act DeluxeThe Re-act Deluxe is endorsed by a leading Chartered Physiotherapist and offers a larger fully upholstered cut foam back and moulded foam, height adjustable seat. The ratchet back and tension control provide full adjustability.A range of optional extras including a head rest, seat and back lumbar support can also be supplied for enhanced comfort.

24 Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

High Back Chair with Headrest - No Arms

Code £

RED/M1 Permanent Contact Back Mechanism 259

RED/M2 Tilt Mechanism 288

RED/M3 Synchro Mechanism 288

Black base as standard.

Dimensions (mm)

Back Height:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Seat Width:

Dimensions (mm)

Back Height:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Seat Width:

630

545-660

480

520

630

545-660

480

520

Code £

REDHR/M1 Permanent Contact Back Mechanism 334

REDHR/M2 Tilt Mechanism 362

REDHR/M3 Synchro Mechanism 362

Black base as standard. Note: Headrest cannot be retro fitted.

High Back Chair - No Arms

Options

Shown with Aluminium Spider Base (Code B5) and headrest

Shown with black base

Chrome Height Adjustable Arm Soft Feel AP 91

Seat Slide SS 33

Inflatable Lumbar L 38

Aluminium Spider Base B5 87

Chrome Base/Gas B3 50

Black Height Adjustable Arms AA 73

Chrome Fixed Arm AH 44

££

B3 AA AH AP SS L

150kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guaranteeTTesting

SATRA tested to BS EN 5459 level S severe use.Compliant with HSE seating at work directives.

operator, task and posture

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

24-25 Re-act Deluxe - Sence (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 11:09

Page 27: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Sense

25Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Healthy sitting is crucial for satisfied, efficient and active employees. The stylish Sense provides body fitting support whilst offering a design which gives lower back support and improves your posture.Correct adjustable seating provides positive preventative and corrective workplace solutions.

Code £

IS150 395

Suffix/ADJ5

Code £

IS100 329

Black base, no arms. Seat slide adjustment. Synchro

mechanism. Side tension body weight control. High

Plastic backrest. Gas lift height adjustment. Push button

back height adjustment.

Sense Task

IS100 Shown with ADJ5 arms

Shown with ADJ5 arms & polished base

Suffix/ASC

Suffix/A/MF

Suffix/AB Suffix/IL

150kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

Sense Dimensions (mm)

Floor to Seat Height:

Seat to Top of Backrest:

Seat Depth:

Seat Width:

Backrest Width:

480-600

570-630

460-535

480

450

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Options

Height Adjustable Arms Suffix/ADJ5 44

Adjustable Multifunctional Arm Suffix/A/MF (height, depth, width) 72

Air Flo Suffix/ASC 44

Polished Base Suffix/AB 44

Inflatable Lumbar Suffix/IL 33

Coccyx Cutout Suffix/CC 14

£

operator, task and posture

Black base, no arms. Seat slide adjustment. Synchro

mechanism. Side tension body weight control. High

plastic molded backrest. Gas lift height adjustment. Push

button back height adjustment. Adjustable headrest.

Sense Task with Headrest

24-25 Re-act Deluxe - Sence (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 11:09

Page 28: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

WhyWhy is an easy to use task chair ergonomically designed to provide responsive comfort to the majority of people of varying sizes and weights. The ‘S-Type’ Why task chair is available with stylish base and arm options and a choice of black, grey or white flexible back.

26 Delivered to a room of choice within 35 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Options

Polished Base PB 57

Polished Height Adjustable Arms PA 58

£

PB PA

150kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guaranteeT

TestingA fantastic value fully tested chair.

BS 5459 PART 2 : 2000 EN/BS 1335 PART1, 2 & 3.

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320.

24recommended

hours usage

Mesh High BackCode £

0SWYBB1 360

Fixed Seat. Self adjusting synchronised mechanism. Black mesh back.

Black nylon flat ergonomic base. Black height adjustable arms.

Ratchet back height/lumbar adjustment. Soft PU arm pads.

Dimensions (mm)

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Seat Height:

990-1180

640

670

460-590

Code £

0SWYAB1 374

Seat Slide. Self adjusting synchronised mechanism.

Black mesh back. Black nylon flat ergonomic base. Soft PU arm pads.

Black height adjustable arms. Ratchet back height/lumbar adjustment.

Mesh High Back

operator, task and posture

Black, grey or white mesh

back available atno extra cost

26-27 Why - Captive (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 11:12

Page 29: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

CaptiveCaptive offers a simple “one-chair-fits-all” innovative philosophy and is a new solution in ergonomic chair procurement. Aesthetically friendly and functionally sound, the Captive is an affordable task chair concept with physiotherapist endorsed posture credentials.

27Delivered to a room of choice within 24 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

150kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

Code £

CAP1 374

Black base, no arms. Independent back and seat angle adjustment. Flex

front seat. Dual seat slide adjustment - (125mm). Fully upholstered tri

curve back rest. Ratchet back height adjustment. Body weight tension

control. Gas-lift height adjustment.

Shown with ADJ5 arms

Priced in Camira Advantage/Phoenix fabric, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

TTestingA fantastic value fully tested posture chair.BS 5459-2 SATRA Strength & Stability.BS EN 1335-1 FIRA Ergonomics Requirement.

Options

Height Adjustable Arm Suffix/ADJ5 44

Adjustable Multifunctional Arm (height, width, depth) Suffix/A/MF 72

Polished Base Suffix/AB 44

Air Flo Suffix/ASC 44

Inflatable Lumbar Suffix/IL 33

Adjustable Head Rest Suffix/HR1 72

Performance Foam Suffix/PF 17

Coccyx Cutout Suffix/CC 14

£

Suffix/A/MF Suffix/ABSuffix/ADJ5 Suffix/ASC Suffix/IL Suffix/HR1 Suffix/PF

Extendable Backrest and SeatDesigned to aid postural alignment the tri-curved fully upholstered backrest cradles the user, further enhanced by the flex-front seat, unique twin seat extender, simple multi-adjustable controls and unique 3-dimensional adjustable armrests.

The ability to personalise to multiple users creates the ability to simplify the selection process whilst embracing design, comfort and support.

Captive Radial Back Posture

operator, task and posture

Posture

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Back Height:

Seat Depth:

Backrest Width:

490

490-550

520-600

420-550

460

One chairfits all

26-27 Why - Captive (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 11:12

Page 30: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

An elegant fusion of style and comfort, Is has an ergonomically designed and generously curved upholstered back and seat. The chair is contoured to fit the body providing positive lumbar and pelvic support all day long. A fully adjustable task chair featuring a sophisticated synchronised mechanism, seat depth and back height adjustment with height adjustable arms as standard. The back and seat pads are removable for easy replacement, extending the chair’s life.Gas lift is tested for 24hr use up to 150kg

Standard synchronised mechanism

Chrome Glide 16

Polished Aluminium Base with

Polished Chrome Gas Lift 72

Draughtsman Chair Options£

Is

28 Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Task Chair Draughtsman ChairCode £

02ISAA1 421

Height adjustable back. Adjustable arms.

Black nylon base. 60mm seat slide

Dimensions (mm)

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Seat Height:

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Seat Height:

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Seat Height:

1000-1120

545

400-450

420-540

1000-1120

545

400-450

420-540

1270-1520

600

650

670-940

Code £

02ISAC1 423

Height adjustable back. Adjustable arms.

Black nylon base. 60mm seat slide

Code £

02ISEE1 383

Black nylon draughtsman base & glides.

Task Chair

Silver 60mm Soft Wheel Castors 24

Polished Aluminium Base with

Polished Chrome Gas Lift 57

Polished Aluminium Multi-Adjustable Arms 68

Head Rest 101

Coccyx Cushion 72

Task Chair Options£ £

Replaceable Upholstery

operator, task and posture

8recomendedhours usage

5year

guarantee

Self adjusting synchronised dual lever mechanism

PCB mechanism

Silver 60mm Soft Wheel Castors

Polished Aluminium Base with Polished Chrome Gas Lift

Polished Aluminium Multi-Adjustable Arms

Head Rest

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

28-29 Is Double Page (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 11:19

Page 31: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

29

28-29 Is Double Page (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 11:19

Page 32: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

i-Sit

30 Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

i-Sit task chairs feature the latest instant adjustment synchronous technology. The modular design allows the easy addition of ergonomically designed arms, headrests and lumbar supports.Easy to understand icons clearly show the individual function of the controls.

Upholstered Task Chair

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

Overall Width:

Overall Depth:

Overall Height:

Seat Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

Overall Width:

Overall Depth:

Overall Height:

465

455-515

455-590

710

710

1010-1205

465

455-515

455-590

710

710

1175-1370

Code £

ISIT/UH 589

Without arms. Upholstered back with black base and headrest.

Swivel chair with height adjustable upholstered backrest.

Adjustable seat height with integral damping facility.

60mm sliding seat depth adjustment. Black nylon 5 star base.

Upholstered Task Chair with Headrest

Options

Fabric Insert Back - Upholstered backrest outershell. FIB 84

Polished Base - 5 star base. PB 52

i-Sit 2D Arms - Height & width adjustability. 2D 99

i-Sit 4D Arms - Height & width adjustability, horizontal

rotation. Depth adjustability. 4D1 132

4D2 153

£

150kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

24recommended hours usage

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Shown with 4D2 Arms

Shown with 4D2 Arms Shown with

polished base

2D 4D1 4D2FIB PB

operator, task and posture

Code £

ISIT 520

Without arms. Upholstered back with black base.

Swivel chair with height adjustable upholstered backrest.

Adjustable seat height with integral damping facility.

60mm sliding seat depth adjustment. Black nylon 5 star base.

30-31 i-Sit - Quattro (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 11:21

Page 33: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

QuattroQuattro supports the 4 principle spine curves: cervical, thoracic, lumbar & pelvic. 4-way back support curves. 4D controls (seat angle, back angle, seat depth, back height). Multi-functional adjustable arms (height, width, depth). All chairs are designed to conform to relevant British Standards and the current EEC VDU Directives.

31Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Quattro High Back Posture Chair

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Back Height:

Seat Depth:

Backrest Width:

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Back Height:

Seat Depth:

Backrest Width:

505

490-600

650-730

465-525

460

505

490-600

525-595

465-525

460

Quattro Extra High Back Posture Chair

Options

Height Adjustable Arms Suffix/ADJ5 44

Adjustable Multifunctional Arm (height, width, depth) Suffix/A/MF 72

Polished Base Suffix/AB 44

Air Flo Suffix/ASC 44

Performance Foam Suffix/PF 17

Coccyx Cutout Suffix/CC 14

£ £

150kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guaranteeT

TestingA fantastic value fully tested posture chair.BS 5459-2 SATRA Strength & Stability.BS EN 1335-1 FIRA Ergonomics Requirement.

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Shown with Black Base & A/MF arms

Suffix/ADJ5 Suffix/A/MF Suffix/AB Suffix/ASC Suffix/PF

Shown with Black Base & ADJ5 arms

Code £

AQ100 468

Black base. No arms. Independent back and seat angle adjustment.

Additional seat tilt adjustment. Flex front seat. Seat slide adjustment. Fully

upholstered tri curve extra high back rest. Inflatable lumbar. Ratchet back

height adjustment. Body weight tension control. Gas-lift height adjustment.

Code £

AQ200 439

Black base. No arms. Independent back and seat angle adjustment.

Additional seat tilt adjustment. Flex front seat. Seat slide adjustment. Fully

upholstered tri curve high back rest. Inflatable lumbar. Ratchet back

height adjustment. Body weight tension control. Gas-lift height adjustment.

operator, task and posture

Posture

30-31 i-Sit - Quattro (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 11:21

Page 34: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Air Unite

32

mesh

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

The Unite is a well equipped mesh back chair with highly specified options fitted as standard. The mesh back allows air flow around the upper body whilst working, and offers a waterfall front seat for leg comfort.

Air Mesh BackCode £

AIR03B - With height adjustable arms. 226

Height adjustable back.

Double membrane mesh back.

Seat height adjustment.

Back rake mechanism.

Black moulded base.

Dimensions (mm)

Overall Width:

Overall Depth:

Back Height:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Back Height:

Overall Width:

Overall Depth

620

550

500-560

450-570

440

430-540

450

570

490

630

Code £

UT1B - Without arms. 300

UT2B - With height adjustable arms. 361

Mesh back.

Synchro mechanism.

Height adjustable back.

Adjustable lumbar.

Black moulded base.

Unite Mesh Back

Options

Seat Slide SS 37

Polished Base C 38

Seat Slide SS 46

Polished Base C 53

£ £

150kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

8recommended hours usage

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

SS SSC C

The Air features a breathable mesh back and a back rake mechanism. The chair also has a range of different options available including polished base & seat slide options. There is also a height adjustable arm version available.

32-33 Air-Unite - Etna (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 11:27

Page 35: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

EtnaThis high quality mesh back task chair offers outstanding value for money.Not only does the Etna come with a breathable mesh back and moulded cushion seat pad as standard, thesynchronised mechanism and seat slide will ensure day long adjustability for ultimate user comfort.

33

mesh

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Polished Aluminium Base

CO/PAB 85

£

114kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

CO/PAB

E SpaceSee our executive furniture from page 156.

Executive Mesh

Dimensions (mm)

Back Width:

Back Height:

Seat Height:

Seat Width:

Seat Depth:

485

585

450-525

530

485-530

Code £

ET1HB/M/BLK 383

Mesh Back.

Synchronised mechanism.

Height adjustable arms included.

Lumbar support.

Black mesh & fabric.

Seat slide.

Steel spider base.

Options

Fantastic Value

8recommended hours usage

32-33 Air-Unite - Etna (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 11:27

Page 36: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Team Plus Mesh

34

mesh

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

The Team Plus Mesh range of chairs are classic in their design. Using premium materials, CMHR foams and fabrics they feature a waterfall seat to help alleviate pressure on the thighs when seated.

Skid Chair - Cantilever Meeting Draughtsman ChairCode £

TPM 242

Height adjustable mesh back.

PCB mechanism. Antishock locking system.

Seat height adjustment. Moulded foam seat.

690mm nylon 5 star base. Black castors.

Dimensions (mm)

Height:

Back Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

Height:

Back Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

Height:

Back Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

955-1125

455

470

480-590

985

455

470

485

1060-1410

455

470

640-910

Code £

TPMC 242

Mesh back.

Black tubular cantilever frame.

Protective glides. Moulded foam seat.

Code £

TPMD 326

Height adjustable mesh back.

PCB mechanism. Antishock locking system.

Seat height adjustment. Moulded foam seat.

690mm nylon 5 star base. Black nylon glides.

SF1D PB

Medium Back - Operator Chair

Height Adjustable Arms

Code 1D Per Pair 50

Silver Frame

Code SF (Cantilever Chair Only) 13

Polished Base (Operator or Draughtsman)

Code PB 48

Options£ £

New for 2015

125kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

34-35 Team Plus Mesh- Kind Mesh (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 11:33

Page 37: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

150kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

8-10recommended hours usage

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320.

KDT03B

KDT03B

Kind MeshThe mesh task chair is an exclusively unique product and features a dual mesh back with an integral adjustable lumbar, body weight responsive mechanism, fixed or 3D adjustable arms and a choice of 9 mesh colours are also available as standard.

35

mesh

Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

£

Synchro Mechanism SY 25

Seat Slide SS 27

Silver Base P 44

Polished Base C 44

Adjustable Head Rest HR 65

Polished Aluminium Arms (3D Only) AC 37

Mesh High Back

Dimensions (mm)

Back Height:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Overall Depth:

Overall Width

Back Width:

620

440-560

440

670

670

450

Code £

KDT01B - With No Arms 289

KDT02B - Fixed Arms 334

KDT03B - 3D Adjustable Arms 349

Upholstered seat. Adjustable lumbar support.

Body weight responsive mechanism. Black nylon base.

Nine colours available for mesh back.

Options

New for 2015

Polished Base

See pages22 & 67-69

for more Kind chairs

34-35 Team Plus Mesh- Kind Mesh (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 11:33

Page 38: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Bass

36

mesh

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

The Bass mesh back chair is a practical and functional seating solution that can be specified for any project. The chair is available with or without arms and as a cantilever visitors chair. Tailor your chair with an optional polished base or frame.

Cantilever Height Adjustable ArmsCode £

BASS11B 349

Black mesh back. Synchro mechanism.

Seat height & depth adjustment.

Black moulded base.

6cm twin wheel hooded castors.

Dimensions (mm)

Overall Width:

Seat Depth:

Back Height:

Seat Height:

Back Width:

Overall Width:

Overall Depth:

Back Height:

Seat Height:

Back Width:

Overall Width:

Overall Depth:

Back Height:

Seat Height:

Back Width:

500

450-500

520

450-570

460

500

550

520

450

460

620

450-500

520

450-570

460

Code £

BASS22B 307

Black coated frame.

Black mesh back.

Code £

BASS12B 406

Black mesh back. Synchro mechanism.

Seat height & depth adjustment.

Black moulded base.

6cm twin wheel hooded castors.

2D height & width adjustable arms.

No Arms

Polished Base

Code C 42

C C

Cantilever Frame

Code P Silver 42

Code C Chrome 55

Options£ £

150kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

36-37 Bass - My Mesh (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 11:35

Page 39: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Shown with standard synchronised mechanism

My Mesh

37

mesh

Delivered to a room of choice within 35 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

150kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

TTestingA fantastic value fully tested chair.BS 5459 PART 2 : 2000 EN/BS 1335 PART1, 2 & 3.

8recommended hours usage

Stackable up to 4 high

Shown with self-adjusting synchronised single lever mechanism

Task Chair - with fixed seat

Dimensions (mm)

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Seat Height:

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Seat Height:

1000-1140

630

660

470-600

1000-1140

630

660

470-600

Task Chair - with 60mm seat slide

Code £

02MYAA2 - Standard synchronised mechanism 421

02MYAB2 - Self adjusting synchronised single lever mechanism 421

Code £

02MYBA2 - Standard synchronised mechanism 392

02MYBB2 - Self adjusting synchronised single lever mechanism 383

Swivel Chair - Nylon black base.

Dimensions (mm)

H: 960 W:560 D: 580 Seat Height:450 H: 950-1080 W:670 D: 570 Seat Height: 440-580

Code £

MMY3A - Silver Cantilever frame. 369

Code £

OME2AAC - Height adjustable. Silver Frame. 396

Stacking Meeting Chair

Polished Base

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Options £

Polished Base - For OME2 Chair 47

Polished Aluminium Base With Polished Chrome Gas Lift -

For 02MY Chairs 57

The stylish My Mesh provides body fitting support whilst offering a design which is uncluttered and contemporary. It has a black single skin fabric mesh back with an upholstered seat. The Base is black nylon and has 50mm hard wheeled castors. The black height adjustable arms have soft PU arm pads.

36-37 Bass - My Mesh (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 11:35

Page 40: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Loreto

38

mesh

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

The Loreto operator chair provides an excellent solution to any seating environment. The chair provides a supporting back structure with a breathable mesh available in both black and white colours.

MeshCode £

LOR/BM Black mesh, no arms 373

LOR/WM White mesh, no arms 394

LOR/BM/1D Black mesh, height adjustable arms 420

LOR/WM/1D White mesh, height adjustable arms 441

Synchronised mechanism. Optional height adjustable arms.

Adjustable lumbar support. Tension adjustment. Black base.

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Seat Width:

Seat Depth:

Overall Depth:

480

480-600

470-520

480

470

600

Code £

LORC/BM Black mesh, no arms 324

LORC/WM White mesh, no arms 345

LORC/BM/FA Black mesh, arms 361

LORC/WM/FA White mesh, arms 382

Fixed height arms and back. Adjustable lumbar support.

Chrome cantilever frame.

Mesh Meeting

Polished Aluminium Base PB 21

£

Shown with polished base

5year

guarantee

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Blackor white

mesh back available

Option

38-39 Loreto - Sence Mesh (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 11:37

Page 41: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Sense MeshBack pain is a major cause of discomfort and absence from work. The modern Sense Mesh provides body fitting support whilst offering a design which gives lower back support and improves your posture.

39

mesh

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Sense Task Mesh with Headrest

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Floor to Seat Height:

Seat to Top of Backrest:

Seat Depth:

Backrest Width:

Seat Width:

Floor to Seat Height:

Seat to Top of Backrest:

Seat Depth:

Backrest Width:

480

480-600

610-680

460-535

450

480

480-600

610-680

460-535

450

Sense Task Mesh

Options

Height Adjustable Arms Suffix/ADJ5 44

Adjustable Multifunctional Arm (height, depth, width) Suffix/A/MF 72

Polished Base Suffix/AB 44

Air Flo Suffix/ASC 44

Coccyx Cutout Suffix/CC 14

£ £

150kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Shown with ADJ5 arms

Suffix/ADJ5 Suffix/A/MF Suffix/AB Suffix/ASC

Shown with Polished Base & ADJ5 arms

Code £

IS200 384

Black base, no arms. Synchro mechanism. High mesh backrest.

Lever control back height adjustment.

Seat slide, side tension body weight control.

Adjustable lumbar panel. Gas lift height adjustment

Code £

IS250 450

Black base, no arms. Synchro mechanism. High mesh backrest.

Lever control back height adjustment.

Seat slide, Side tension body weight control. Adjustable headrest.

Adjustable lumbar panel. Gas lift height adjustment

38-39 Loreto - Sence Mesh (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 11:38

Page 42: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

i-Sit Mesh

40

mesh

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

i-sit task chairs feature the latest instant adjustment synchronus technology. The modular design allows the easy addition of ergonomically designed arms, headrests and lumbar supports to both mesh and upholstered versions. Easy to understand icons clearly show the individual function of the controls.

Mesh Task ChairCode £

ISITM 520

Without arms. Upholstered seat with black base.

Swivel chair with height adjustable mesh backrest.

Adjustable seat height with integral damping facility.

60mm sliding seat depth adjustment.

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

Overall Width:

Overall Depth:

Overall Height:

Seat Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

Overall Width:

Overall Depth:

Overall Height:

465

455-515

455-590

710

710

1010-1205

465

455-515

455-590

710

710

1175-1370

Code £

ISITM/MH 589

Without arms. Upholstered seat with black base and headrest.

Swivel chair with height adjustable mesh backrest.

Adjustable seat height with integral damping facility.

60mm sliding seat depth adjustment.

Mesh Task Chair With Mesh Headrest

Options

Polished Base - 5 star base. PB 52

i-Sit 2D Arms - Height & width adjustability. 2D 99

i-Sit 4D Arms - Height & width adjustability, horizontal

rotation. Depth adjustability. 4D1 132

4D2 153

£

Shown with 4D Arms

ISITM Shown

Shown with polished base

2D 4D1 4D2PB

New for 2015

24recommendedhours usage

150kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

40-41 iSit Mesh - IS Mesh (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 11:45

Page 43: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Is MeshThe most recent addition to the Is family features a light and contemporary height adjustable elastomeric mesh back. The mesh moulds to your body size and shape to provide all day ventilation and support. This flexible task chair has a sophisticated synchronised mechanism and the same exceptional adjustability as the upholstered version.

41

mesh

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

5year

guarantee

Draughtsman ChairCode £

02ISAA2 465

Height adjustable back and arms.

Black nylon base. 60mm seat slide.

Dimensions (mm)

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Seat Height:

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Seat Height:

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Seat Height:

1000-1120

545

400-450

420-540

1000-1120

545

400-450

420-540

1270-1520

600

650

670-940

Code £

02ISAC2 468

Height adjustable back and arms.

Black nylon base. 60mm seat slide.

Code £

02ISEE2 408

Black nylon draughtsman base & glides.

PCB mechanism.

Medium Back

Standard Synchronised Mechanism

Chrome Glide 16

Polished Aluminium Base with

Polished Chrome Gas Lift 72

Draughtsman Chair Options£

Silver 60mm Soft Wheel Castors 24

Polished Aluminium Base with

Polished Chrome Gas Lift 57

Polished Aluminium Multi-Adjustable Arms 68

Alternative Mesh Colours POA

Coccyx Cushion 72

Task Chair Options£ £

New for 2015

Polished Aluminium Multi-Adjustable Arms

Polished Aluminium Base with Polished Chrome Gas Lift

Silver 60mm Soft Wheel Castors

Medium Back

Self Adjusting Synchronised Dual Lever Mechanism

PCB Mechanism

40-41 iSit Mesh - IS Mesh (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 11:46

Page 44: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

42 Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Amber Moore executive

The Moore, traditional in style, luxurious in feel. This popular range of executive chairs are upholstered in fabric or soft bonded leather and have generous cushioning on the seat and back.

Amber Fabric or Leather High BackCode £

AM2HB/F/BLUE - Blue Fabric. 152

AM2HB/F/BLK - Black Fabric. 152

AM1HB/L/BLK - Bonded Leather. 162

Black base. Lock Tilt Mechanism.

495

425-515

515

595

485

Code £

moore 287

Matching padded arms.

Durable nylon base and arms.

Gas lift tested up to 150kg.

Moore Fabric High Back

Options

Polished Aluminium Base CO/PAB 85

£

AM4/F/BLUE AM3/PU/BLK

The Amber range represent affordability in the executive chair market. The High Back chairs come with a pivoting lock tilt mechanism and added cushioning for executive levels of comfort.

Moore Standard Colours

Amber Standard Colours

Blue Fabric

Blue Fabric

Black Fabric

Black Fabric Bonded Leather

8recommendedhours usage

114kg max.weight tolerance

2year

guarantee

Amber Fabric or Leather VisitorCode £

AM4/F/BLUE - Blue Fabric. 133

AM4/F/BLK - Black Fabric. 133

AM3/PU/BLK - Bonded Leather. 133

530

480-580

520

700

530Amber Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Back Height:

Back Width:

Moore Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Back Height:

Back Width:

CO/PAB

42-43 Amber Moore - Obsidian Tanzanite (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 11:48

Page 45: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

These chairs will add style and comfort to any office environment. The two chairs come with a two year guarantee plus adjustable seat height and tilt for additional comfort in the office.

Executive Chairs

43

executive

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Options

Polished Aluminium Base CO/PAB 85

£

CO/PAB

8recommendedhours usage

114kg max.weight tolerance

2year

guarantee

E SpaceSee our executive furniture from page 156.

Obsidian High Back - Bonded Leather

Obsidian Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Back Height:

500

465-555

465

670

Code £

OB1HB/BL/BLK 175

Black base. Lock Tilt Mechanism.

Tanzanite High Back - Bonded Leather

Tanzanite Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

495

490-580

515

Code £

TZ1/HB/L/BLK 231

Black base. Soft padded arms. Lock Tilt Mechanism.TZ1/HB/L/BLK

42-43 Amber Moore - Obsidian Tanzanite (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 11:48

Page 46: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Black Leather

44

executive

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Atlas and Sapphire

Atlas Chair Details and ColoursSapphire High Back Chair Details and Bonded Leather Facings Colour

The Atlas is a versatile high back leather chair with a shaped seat and soft padded leather arms.

The Sapphire offers fantastic comfort and value for money.

150kg max.weight tolerance

114kg max.weight tolerance

2year

guarantee

2year

guarantee

8recomended hours usage

8recommended hours usage

Sapphire High Back Chair

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Height (min-max):

Seat Depth:

510

465-555

520

New for 2015

Atlas

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

510

420-520

480

Code £

atlas-black 335

atlas-white 335

atlas-brown 335

Code £

SAP/BL/BLK 285

Bonded Leather. Chrome base. Tilt and

height adjustable mechanism.

Chrome gas lift and chrome base.

SAP/BL/BLK

Bonded leather. Simple and stylish design.

Durable nylon base and arms. Padded

fixed armrest. Gas lift tested up to 150kg.

White Leather

Black Leather

Brown Leather

44-45 Sapphire Atlas - Classic Xenon (15).indd 1 04/12/2014 11:06

Page 47: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Classic and XenonThe Classic is an elegant, Italian style chair which will add charm to any office environment. These executive chairs are modern classics.

The Xenon is a design inspired chair that offers contemporary design and a high quality finish at outstanding value.

45

executive

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Classic Medium Back Xenon - Medium Back

Code £

classic-high-back-black 516

classic-high-back-white 516

Soft padded bonded leather. Leather

padded arms. Large contoured seat.

Chrome Frame.

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Height:

Width:

Depth:

Back Height:

Back Height:

Width:

Depth:

Seat Height:

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Back Height:

Width:

Depth:

475-575

480

500

640

550

480

470

460-560

410-530

450-520

540

630

610

Code £

classic-medium-back-black 475

classic-medium-back-white 475

Soft padded bonded leather. Leather

padded arms. Large contoured seat.

Chrome Frame.

Code £

xenon-medium-back 530

Blue fabric. Knee tilt mechanism & seat height

adjustment. Brushed aluminium 5 star base.

Integral contoured lumbar support.

Classic High Back

Classic Chair Details Xenon Chair Details

150kg max.weight tolerance

150kg max.weight tolerance

2year

guarantee

5year

guarantee

8recommended hours usage

8recommended hours usage

Code £

xenon-high-back 573

Knee tilt mechanism & seat height adjustment.

Brushed aluminium 5 star base. With Headrest.

Integral contoured lumbar support.

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Back Height:

Width:

Depth:

410-530

450-520

740

630

610

Xenon - High Back

New for 2015

Black Leather

Black Leather

Black Fabric

White Leather

Blue Fabric

44-45 Sapphire Atlas - Classic Xenon (15).indd 2 04/12/2014 11:06

Page 48: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

46

executive

High Back - With Headrest

Dimensions (mm)

Height:

Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

1280-1340

680

530

490-550

Black leather upholstery. Height adjustable seat

& back. Synchronised mechanism. Lockable back

angle adjustment. Aluminium 5 star base.

2D adjustable arms.

OpulaThe Opula chairs offer soft black leather upholstery along with a chrome finish to all metalwork.

125kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

8recommended

hours usage

New for 2015

Colour

Black

Cantilever Chair

Dimensions (mm)

Height:

Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

995

605

520

460

Black leather upholstery. High back. Fixed arms

with upholstered pads. Chrome cantilever frame.

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Code £

OPUC 391

Code £

OPU 522

46-47 Opula - Traditional (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 11:52

Page 49: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Code £

finsbury 396

Soft bonded leather. Light Oak colour wooden

arms and base. Gas lift tested up to 150kg

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Height (min-max):

Seat Depth:

520

450-540

490

Finsbury

TraditionalWith iconic designs this line of furniture offers superb comfort. Featuring deep cushioned seats and backs along with soft, sturdy fixed armrests.

47

executive

ChesterfieldCommodoreCode £

baron 356

Sturdy 4 leg wood frame. Soft high quality

Italian leather with brass stud detail.

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

600

480

530

530

460-550

490

560

510-570

530

Code £

chesterfield 360

Leather faced upholstery. Traditional button style

design. Wooden armrests with soft pad sleeve.

Code £

commodore 995

Top grain Italian leather faced upholstery with

button upholstery & brass stud decoration

Baron

New for 2015

Available in black, cream and brown leather. Tan micro-fibre (suede effect) option available.

Available in brown, burgundy, cream and green.

Available in brown, burgundy, cream and green.

Available in brown, burgundy, and green.

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

2year

guarantee

8recommended

hours usage

Bonded Leather Colours

Black BrownGreen Burgundy Cream

46-47 Opula - Traditional (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 11:52

Page 50: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

48

executivei-Sit

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

i-Sit task chairs feature the latest instant adjustment synchronous technology. The modular design allows the easy addition of ergonomically designed arms, headrests and lumbar supports.Easy to understand icons clearly show the individual function of the controls.

Upholstered Task Chair

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

Overall Width:

Overall Depth:

Overall Height:

Seat Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

Overall Width:

Overall Depth:

Overall Height:

470

455-515

455-590

710

710

1010-1205

470

455-515

455-590

710

710

1175-1370

Code £

ISIT/UH - Black Nylon 5 Star Base 589

Without arms. Upholstered back with black base and headrest.

Swivel chair with height adjustable upholstered backrest.

Adjustable seat height with integral damping facility.

60mm sliding seat depth adjustment.

Upholstered Task Chair with Headrest

Options

Fabric Insert Back - Upholstered backrest outershell. FIB 84

Polished Base - 5 star base. PB 52

i-Sit 2D Arms - Height & width adjustability. 2D 99

i-Sit 4D Arms - Height & width adjustability, horizontal

rotation. Depth adjustability. 4D1 132

4D2 153

£

150kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

24recommended

hours usage

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Shown with 4D2 Arms

Shown with 4D2 Arms

Shown with polished base

2D 4D1 4D2FIB PB

Code £

ISIT - Black Nylon 5 Star Base 520

Without arms. Upholstered back with black base.

Swivel chair with height adjustable upholstered backrest.

Adjustable seat height with integral damping facility.

60mm sliding seat depth adjustment.

48-49 iSit - Ocean (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 11:53

Page 51: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

SV MT

OceanA sophisticated range of managerial/task seating that caters for the needs of the most discerning user. A fully synchronised seat and back tilt mechanism and aluminium finish detailing enhance any environment.The choice of wooden armrests, which can be stained to match furniture and fittings, ensure that Ocean blends harmoniously with any design.

49

executive

WalnutOak BlackMaple BlackRosewood RoyalBeech ClaretCherry

Standard Wood Finishes Ocean Stock Fabrics

Black Hide Facings

WD

5year

guarantee

New for 2015

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Medium Back - 4 Legged Armchair Medium Back - Cantilever Visitors Chair

Black Hide Code Fabric £ Facings £

OCN1042 - Black Arms 559 688

OCN1044 - Wooden Arms 673 802

Syncro action. Tension control. Black base.

Back Height:

Seat Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

Back Height:

Back Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

Dimensions (mm)

Back Height:

Back Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

620

515

430

415-535

475

500

430

450

475

500

430

450

Black Hide Code Fabric £ Facings £

OCN1040 557 686

Wood and silver frame

Black Hide Code Fabric £ Facings £

OCN1039 442 571

Silver frame

Medium Back - Managerial Armchair

Silver Base SV 42

Polished Metal Base MT 52

Wooden Base WD 104

Seat Slide SS 26 Dimensions (mm)

Back Height:

Back Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

800

515

430

415-535

Options High Back - Armchair With Headrest£

Black Hide Code Fabric £ Facings £

OCN1045 - Black Arms 658 806

OCN1046 - Wooden Arms 773 923

Syncro action. Tension control. Black base.

48-49 iSit - Ocean (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 11:53

Page 52: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

50

executiveEnna

Medium Back Medium Back CantileverCode £

ENNHB 601

Ribbed soft black leather upholstery.

Knee tilt mechanism.

Body weight tension adjustment.

Seat height adjustment.

650mm Polished aluminium 5 star base.

Chrome fixed height arms.

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

Overall Width:

Overall Height:

Seat Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

Overall Width:

Overall Height:

Seat Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

Overall Width:

Overall Height:

530

460

450-550

680

1080-1180

540

460

450-550

680

890-990

540

485

465

565

900

Code £

ENN 546

Ribbed soft black leather upholstery.

Knee tilt mechanism.

Body weight tension adjustment.

Seat height adjustment.

650mm Polished aluminium 5 star base.

Chrome fixed height arms.

Code £

ENNC 462

Ribbed soft black leather upholstery.

Knee tilt mechanism.

Chrome fixed height arms.

Protective glides.

Chrome cantilever frame.

High Back

The Enna chair combines classic design with modern production techniques, featuring panelled luxury leather with fixed chrome arms and a chrome base.

5year

guarantee

8recomended

hours usage

125kg max.weight tolerance

Black Leather

Expanded range for

2015

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 workingdays fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled.

Certain exceptions see page 2.

Glides Code G 13

Option£

50-51 Enna - Venice (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 11:59

Page 53: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

VeniceThese panelled leather luxury chairs have a synchronised mechanism with side tension adjustment and seat height adjustment. They have fully upholstered integral arms and a 700mm polished aluminium 5 star base with 65mm twin hard wheeled black castors.

51

executive

New for 2015

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

High Back - Fully Upholstered In Leather

Dimensions (mm)

Height:

Overall Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

1240-1300

720

460

490-550

Code £

VENHB 839

Synchronised mechanism with slide tension

adjustment. Seat height adjustment.

Embossed upholstery. CMHR foam.

700mm polished aluminium 5 star base.

Medium Back - Fully Upholstered In Leather

Dimensions (mm)

Height:

Overall Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

1080-1140

720

460

490-550

Code £

VEN 787

Synchronised mechanism with slide tension

adjustment. Seat height adjustment.

Embossed upholstery. CMHR foam.

700mm polished aluminium 5 star base.

125kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

8recomended

hours usage

Black Leather

50-51 Enna - Venice (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 11:59

Page 54: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Stakka

Frame ColoursStock Fabric Colour Special Order Fabric Colours

The simple Stakka represents one of our most popular economy chairs. Versatility is affordable with this adaptable chair.

52

ChromeCharcoalBlue Black AquaGrey Claret Black

8recommendedhours usage

115kg max.weight tolerance

1year

guarantee

meeting & general purpose

Specials delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled, stock within 10 working days fully assembled Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Stakka Upholstered

Dimensions (mm)

Overall Height:

Overall Width:

Seat Width:

Seat Depth:

Back Height:

790

560

450

400

330

Code £

STP0500/B/CHA Black Frame/ Charcoal Fabric 79

STP0500/B/BLUE Black Frame/ Blue Fabric 79

STP0503/CH/CHA Chrome Frame/ Charcoal Fabric 88

STP0503/CH/BLUE Chrome Frame/ Blue Fabric 88

Extended Range for

2015

Chrome frame with upholstered seat & backrest

Black frame

Meeting TablesSee our tables section from

page 176.

BLUE CHA

52-53 Stakka Double Page (15).indd 1 04/12/2014 12:15

Page 55: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Chrome frame with wenge wood seat & back

Stakka

Stakka Wood Colours Stakka Mesh Colours

53

ISO-BWT

Please note minimum order quantities may apply to the products on this page.

ISO-WWT ISO-ARMS

WengeBeech Blue Green OrangeBlack

Stakka Plastic Colours

RedGreen BlackBlue

8recommendedhours usage

115kg max.weight tolerance

1year

guarantee

meeting & general purpose

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Stacksup to 20

high

Black Writing Tablet ISO-BWT 45

Wooden Writing Tablet ISO-WWT 60

Pair of Black Fixed Arms ISO-ARMS 33

Stakka MeshStakka PlasticCode £

STP0500/WB Black Frame 95

STP0503/WC Chrome Frame 103

Beech or wenge as standard please specify colour

Code £

STP0500/MB Black Frame 84

STP0503/MC Chrome Frame 92

Code £

STP0500/PB Black Frame 60

STP0503/PC Chrome Frame 68

Stakka Wood

£

Options

Dimensions (mm)

Overall Height:

Overall Width:

Seat Width:

Seat Depth:

Back Height:

790

560

450

400

330

Black frame with upholstered seat and mesh back

Shown in WengeBlack frame

52-53 Stakka Double Page (15).indd 2 04/12/2014 12:15

Page 56: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

WorkchairA range of tough wearing factory and office chairs that offer durability in the workplace, and height adjusting contoured back rests. Both chairs also have a seat height gas adjustment.

54

meeting & general purpose

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Adjustable Workchair - With Castors

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

455

450-580

430

Code £

FC1/BLK 202

Height adjustable mechanism.

Nylon base.

Fixed Footrest Workchair - With Glides

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

455

605-735

430

Code £

FC1/FC1/D-BASE 262

Height adjustable mechanism.

Nylon base.

110kg max.weight tolerance

2year

guarantee

Black

ToughWearing forFactory &

Office

54-55 Workchair - 2000-2600 (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 12:14

Page 57: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Transport Dolly - For use with 2000 chairs.

Code £

CF40045 - Stores up to 40 chairs. 216

Width:

Height:

Depth:

Dimensions (mm)

Width:

Height:

Depth:

470

1910

1130

1350

1220

1750

Code £

XH40030A - Stores 68 chairs (2000) & 36 chairs (2600) 645

Low Hanging - For use with 2000 & 2600 chairs.

2000/2600 Folding Chairs

55

meeting & general purpose

Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

These chairs are a stylish, comfortable & lightweight polypropylene folding chair. The 2600 chair comes with an option of either a steel or upholstered seat finish.The storage trolleys will help eliminate the problem of storage in premises where space is restricted.

2000 Folding Chair - Box of Eight

Code £

CF4001* - Box of Eight 240

Folds flat for compact storage.

Suitable for indoor & outdoor use.

Sold in boxes of 8 chairs

Sold in boxes of 4 chairs

Width:

Height:

Depth:

Dimensions (mm)

Width:

Height:

Depth:

450

450

550

470

450

540

Code £

CF4002* - Box of four with steel seat 184

CF4009* - Box of four with upholstered seat 288

2600 Folding Chair - Suitable For Indoor & Outdoor Use.

Blue/Grey

2000/2600 Seat Frame Colours

Burgundy/Grey Charcoal/Grey

5year

guarantee

Folds flat for compact

storage

Strong steel seat & folding frame. Twin double cross braces for added strength.

Low Hanging Storage, 2 rows. Requires double door access.

CF40015

Storage Strap with Alloy Buckle (5m) CF40015 33

Chair Linking Clips CF40075 2

£Options

54-55 Workchair - 2000-2600 (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 12:14

Page 58: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

BarcelonaIdeal for any multi seating environment such as training, conference or lectures. A comfortable and stylish chair at an affordable price that is sure to please.

56 Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Beech Alder

Chrome

Wenge

Black BlackGrey

Wooden Arm Colours

Frame ColoursPlastic Arm Colours

8recommendedhours usage

115kg max.weight tolerance

1year

guarantee

Pair of Beech Arm Pads 28

Pair of Alder, Wenge or Black Arm Pads 28

£

Barcelona

Dimensions (mm)

Overall Height:

Overall Width:

Seat Width:

Seat Depth:

Back Width:

Back Height:

840

530

485

455

390

420

Code £

BCLA/BL - Black Frame With Black Plastic Arm Pads 113

BCLA/CH - Chrome Frame With Black Plastic Arm Pads 122

Options

New for 2015

meeting & general purpose

See page 88

for meeting table

Shown with optional arm pads and chrome frame

Shown with chrome frame

56-57 Barcelona - Academy (15).indd 1 03/12/2014 10:35

Page 59: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

AcademyOur new multi use heavy duty meeting chair is funky, modern and completely versatile. Chrome oval tube legs, well padded seat and curved back with breathable holes will look and feel good in any environment.

57

meeting & general purpose

Delivered to a room of choice within 15 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Suitablefor

stacking

Stacking Chair - Stacks Up To 6 High

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

450

485

470

Code £

academy - without arms 216

Durable and stylish plastic backrest. Practical and comfortable.

Upholstered in black fabric.

Stacking Chair - Stacks Up To 6 High

Seat Width:

Seat Depth:

Seat Height:

450

485

470

Code £

academy - with arms 224

Durable and stylish plastic backrest. Practical and comfortable.

Upholstered in black fabric.

1year

guarantee

Black Plastic

8recommended hours usage

New for 2015

Priced in Group 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Coloured seat pad subject to longer lead time

£

Option

Coloured upholstered seat 60

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

56-57 Barcelona - Academy (15).indd 2 03/12/2014 10:35

Page 60: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

58 Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Turner Client 4 meeting & general purpose

The Client 4 offers a lightweight yet durable and comfortable cantilever meeting chair that gives style and elegance.

530

520

800

Code £

TUP1 - No Arms 139

TUP2 - With Arms 139

Turner Stacking Chair - Beechwood frame.

The Turner is a simple woodframe chair which has a cushioned seat and back pad. It’s stackable 4 high, and available in a choice of either charcoal or blue fabric.

Client 4 Colour and Information

Black

114kg max.weight tolerance

114kg max.weight tolerance

2year

guarantee

Turner Colours and Information

Charcoal Blue

BLUECHA2year

guarantee

Dimensions (mm)

Width:

Depth:

Height:

430

460

430

470

605

555

Code £

CL4/BL/BLK 162

Black Hide Facings. Cantilever Frame. Chrome Frame.

Client 4 Chair

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Back Height:

Overall Depth:

Overall Width:

58-59 Client 4 Turner - Step (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 12:23

Page 61: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Arm Option Add A 34

Upholstered seat only Replace 0 with 1 28

Upholstered seat & back Replace 0 with 2 46

Writing Tablet 85

Chair Trolley 136

Grey Frame GRY 10

White Frame WHT 10

Chrome Frame P 12

Step

59

meeting & general purpose

Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Plastic seat and back available in black, grey and white. Mesh back option in black and grey. Upholstery pads available for seat and back. Arm option and optional writing tablet for either the left or right hand side. Chair dolly available for the four leg and castors version. Black frame fitted as standard.

8recommendedhours usage

160kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

CastorsCantileverCode £

STP4-0-BLK-BLK 96

STP4-0-GRY-BLK 102

STP4-0-WHT-BLK 102

STP4-MSH-0-BLK-BLK Mesh Back 141

STP4-MSH-0-GRY-BLK Mesh Back 147

Code £

STP4C-0-BLK-BLK 131

STP4C-0-GRY-BLK 136

STP4C-0-WHT-BLK 136

STP4C-MSH-0-BLK-BLK Mesh Back 176

STP4C-MSH-0-GRY-BLK Mesh Back 187

Code £

STPV-0-BLK-BLK 131

STPV-0-GRY-BLK 136

STPV-0-WHT-BLK 136

STPV-MSH-0-BLK-BLK Mesh Back 176

STPV-MSH-0-GRY-BLK Mesh Back 182

Four Leg

£

Options

Step Dimensions (mm)

Height:

Depth:

Seat height:

Seat width:

Seat width with arms:

Seat depth:

820

540

455

460

585

460

Shown with mesh back and silver frame

Shown with grey plastic back and arms and with a silver frame

Shown with mesh back and silver frame

Example product code:

product

frame

0 is plastic 1 is seat pad only 2 is seat pad & back pad

arms

upholstery

colour nylon

frame colour

STP 4 A - 0 - BLK BLK

New for 2015

58-59 Client 4 Turner - Step (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 12:23

Page 62: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Ikon

Ikon Plastic Seat Colours

Black White Red GreyBlue Sand

Clear cut lines and inspirational shapes, Ikon chairs offer style and enhancement to any meeting or visitor environment. Whilst it provides contemporary elegance, Ikon is practical and provides comfort and ergonomics to the user. With the polypropylene seat and back in a choice of colours, the range also offers upholstered seat and back options.

60

Upholstered Seat & Plastic Back Upholstered Seat & Back PadCode £

IK01B - No arms, black frame 101

IK02B - With fixed arms, black frame 128

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width (IK01B):

Seat Width (IK02B):

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Seat Width (IK03B):

Seat Width (IK04B):

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Seat Width (IK05B):

Seat Width (IK06B):

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

458

544

443

460

458

544

443

460

458

544

443

460

Code £

IK03B - No arms, black frame 116

IK04B - With fixed arms, black frame 142

Code £

IK05B - No arms, black frame 141

IK06B - With fixed arms, black frame 167

Stack up to 6 high

P

IK04B Fixed Arms

IK02B Fixed Arms

C

IK06B Fixed Arms

Plastic Seat & Back

RD GYBL SDWHBLK115kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

meeting & general purpose

Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Options

IK01B with red plastic (RD) & silver frame (P)

IK03B with red plastic (RD) & chrome frame (C)

IK05B with red plastic (RD) & chrome frame (C)

TTesting

A fantastic value tested chair. BS EN 15373 SATRA Strength &

Durability.

Chrome Frame Code C 22

Silver Frame Code P FOC

£

60-61 Ikon (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 12:30

Page 63: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Ikon

61

Upholstered Seat & Plastic Back Upholstered Seat & Back PadCode £

IK21B - No arms, black cantilever frame 126

IK22B - With fixed arms, black cantilever frame 153

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width (IK21B):

Seat Width (IK22B):

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Seat Width (IK23B):

Seat Width (IK24B):

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Seat Width (IK25B):

Seat Width (IK26B):

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

458

544

443

460

458

544

443

460

458

544

443

460

Code £

IK23B - No arms, black cantilever frame 141

IK24B - With fixed arms, black cantilever frame 167

Code £

IK25B - No arms, black cantilever frame 166

IK26B - With fixed arms, black cantilever frame 192

IK22B Fixed Arms

IK24B Fixed Arms

IK26B Fixed Arms

Plastic Seat & Back

meeting & general purpose

Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

IK21B with white plastic (WH) and chrome frame (C)

IK23B with white plastic (WH) and chrome frame (P)

IK25B with white plastic (WH) and chrome frame (P)

OffersSeat and Back

Options

High Stool - Upholstered Seat & Plastic Back High Stool - Upholstered Seat & Back Pad

Code £

IK51B - No arms, black frame 154

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

458

770

460

458

770

460

458

770

460

Code £

IK53B - No arms, black frame 168

Code £

IK55B - No arms, black frame 194

High Stool - Plastic Seat & Back

Priced in Camira Advantage/Phoenix fabric, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

60-61 Ikon (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 12:30

Page 64: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Xpresso 1

Xpresso Seat Colours

Black PurpleGrey Light BlueWhite Green YellowRed Stone

Xpresso 1 is designed to provide a practical and stylish solution for a range of environments including educational establishments, cafes, auditoria, conference facilities and meeting rooms. They can be linked together an the optional linking strip. Polypropylene seat and back, tubular chrome steel frame, nylon glides. Chair available with or without black arms. Option of upholstered seat and/or back.

62

Upholstered Seat & Plastic Back Upholstered Seat & Back PadCode £

MXP1A 130

MXP1C - With black arms 211

Dimensions (mm)

Width:

Width with arms:

Height:

Depth:

Width:

Width with arms:

Height:

Depth:

Width:

Width with arms:

Height:

Depth:

580

595

830

490

580

595

830

490

580

595

830

490

Code £

MXP1A/F 166

MXP1C/F - With black arms 250

Code £

MXP1A/HF 190

MXP1C/HF - With black arms 274

MXPWriting Tablet

Plastic Seat & Back

Linking Feet Code LXP FOC Trolley - Holds 45 Code MXP 515

5year

guarantee

meeting & general purpose

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Options£ £

Highdensity stacking with multi colour

options!

Code £

GXP1A 168

Dimensions (mm)

Width:

Width with arms:

Height:

Depth:

Seat Height:

600

595

1070

490

720

High Plastic Seat & Back

MXP1A/HF Shown

MXP1A Shown

MXP1C/F Shown

Writing Tablet Code Writing Tablet 132

New for 2015

62-63 Xpresso 1 (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 12:44

Page 65: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

63

62-63 Xpresso 1 (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 12:44

Page 66: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

HostHost is our multipurpose high density stacking chair. It can be specified with or without arms. It has a plastic seat and perforated back on a chromed steel frame as standard.Host is also available with an upholstered seat or back, to further enhance its design and prominence.It is suitable for use in the office, dining areas, waiting and meeting rooms as well as conference facilities.

• Breathable Plastic Back • Upholstered Seat & Back Options • Integral Linking System • Stacks up to 6 high • Stacks up to 40 on Trolley (Upholstered models - 25)

64

Priced in Group 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Plastic Colours

YellowBlueWhite BlackGreenRed

BKGNRD YLBLWH5year

guarantee

Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Host Mobile trolley HST 386

£

Host Chrome Sledge Base Chair

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Back Height:

Overall Width:

Overall Width with arms:

Overall Depth:

430-540

450

570

490

630

630

Code £

HS01C Plastic Seat & Back 135

HS02C Plastic Seat, Back & Arms 200

HS03C Upholstered Seat & Plastic Back 157

HS04C Upholstered Seat, Plastic Back & Arms 222

HS05C Upholstered Seat & Back 165

HS06C Upholstered Seat, Back & Arms 231

Option

Simple yet elegant &

classic

meeting & general purpose

HS06C Shown

Stacks up to 40 high

64-65 Host - Arena (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 12:51

Page 67: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Arena

65

Priced in Camira Advantage/Phoenix fabric, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

115kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

Round Back - With ArmsRound Back Cantilever - With Fixed Arms

Code £

AR1B - Without Arms 116

Stacks 4 high.

Black frame.

Round shaped back.

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Back Height:

Seat Width:

Overall Height:

Seat Depth:

Back Height:

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Back Height:

460

435

480

440

600

435

480

440

520

435

480

440

Code £

AR2B - Fixed Arms 158

Stacks 4 high.

Black frame.

Round shaped back.

Code £

AR4B - Fixed Arms 156

Black frame.

Round shaped back.

Shown with optional Chrome Frame

Round Back - With No Arms

Arena is designed for conference rooms, meeting areas and general office applications. Four leg and cantilever options are stackable and available with writing tablets. The Arena comes as standard with a black frame, and options for either silver or chrome.

TTestingA fantastic value tested chair. BS EN 4875 SATRA Strength & Durability.

C WRT

Chrome/Silver Frame

Code C Chrome Frame 53

Code P Silver Frame FOC

Writing Tablet

Code WRT Right Hand 74

Code WLT Left Hand 74

££

Options

meeting & general purpose

64-65 Host - Arena (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 12:51

Page 68: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Plastic Colour Options

Blue Grey Sand Red

Plastic Seat & Back Plastic Back & Upholstered SeatCode £

KN01B 142

No arms. Plastic seat & back.

Black 4 leg frame. Black Plastic.

Code £

KN04B 175

With arms. Plastic back & upholstered seat

Black 4 leg frame. Black Plastic.

Dimensions (mm)

Back Height:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Overall Depth:

Overall Width:

Back Width:

Back Height:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Overall Depth:

Overall Width:

Back Width:

Back Height:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Overall Depth:

Overall Width:

Back Width:

380

470

420

550

540

440

380

470

450

550

620

440

365

485

420

550

620

440

Code £

KN02B 164

With arms. Plastic seat & back

Black 4 leg frame. Black Plastic.

Code £

KN03B 154

No arms. Plastic back & upholstered seat

Black 4 leg frame. Black Plastic.

All shown with optional chrome frame

Plastic Seat & Back

Chrome Frame C 33

Silver Frame P FOC

Linking Device L 16

Mobile Trolley KEN/TR 110

Tip Up Seat TP 19

Prices shown are for black plastic parts. For colours shown below add £6.

SD RDGYBL

Dimensions (mm)

Back Height:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Overall Depth:

Overall Width:

Back Width:

365

485

420

550

620

440

115kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

Options

Plastic Back & Upholstered Seat

£

La Kendo

66 Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

The La Kendo is a stylish and comfortable chair ideal for waiting rooms, conferences and lectures.With the polypropylene seat and back in a choice of colours, the range also offers upholstered seat and back options.Clever 4 legged nesting design ideal for space conscious environments, stacks up to 20 high.

meeting & general purpose

Ideal for Training or Conference

Rooms

66-67 LA Kendo - Kind Swivel (15).indd 1 04/12/2014 11:07

Page 69: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Mesh Back Swivel ChairCode £

KDMC81C - With No Arms 344

KDMC82C - Fixed Arms 376

Upholstered seat and mesh back.

Polished aluminium base.

Choice of 9 colours for mesh back.

67

Kind Swivelmeeting & general purpose

Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Dimensions (mm)

Back Height:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Overall Depth:

Overall Width (without arms):

Overall Width (With arms):

Back Width:

400

430-550

450

560

530

635

450

150kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

8-10recommended

hours usage

New for 2015

The Kind swivel meeting chair has a four star polished aluminium base and chrome gas stem as standard. Available with or without arms, the height can be adjusted to the required position by a uniquely designed integral button under the seat.

Swivel Chair - Upholstered Back

Code £

KDMC61C - With No Arms 347

KDMC62C - Fixed Arms 380

Upholstered seat and back.

Polished aluminium base.

KDMC82C

KDMC62C

Options£

Upholstered outer back panel

(KDMC61C/KDMC62C only) UB Add 5%

Black Nylon Base B FOC

Silver Base P -42

See pages22, 35 &

68-69 for more Kind chairs

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320.

66-67 LA Kendo - Kind Swivel (15).indd 2 04/12/2014 11:07

Page 70: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

KDMC32B

Kind

68 Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Kind meeting offers a cantilever and 4 leg chair which provides a perfect solution to all boardroom, training and conference applications. Frames can be specified in black, silver or chrome and as all meeting chair variants back panel options allow design integration with the task seating specified. All mesh back versions of the Kind chair are available in the following colours; Black, Sage, Slate, Burnt Orange, Graphite, White, Taupe, Mauve and Teal.

New for 2015

meeting & general purpose

150kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

8-10recommended

hour usage

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320.

Four Leg Meeting Chair

Kind Dimensions (mm)

Back Height:

Seat Height:

Seat Depth:

Overall Depth:

Overall Width - with no arms:

Overall Width - with arms:

Back Width:

400

500

450

560

530

640

450

Code £

KDMC01B - With No Arms 176

KDMC02B - With Fixed Arms 209

Upholstered seat and back. Black Plastic outer back

& under shroud. Black four leg frame.

Stackable 4 high.

KDMC01B

Black frame as standard. Range shown with optional chrome frame.

Cantilever Frame Meeting ChairCode £

KDMC31B - With No Arms 215

KDMC32B - With Fixed Arms 247

Upholstered seat and back. Black Plastic outer back

& under shroud. Black cantilever frame.

Stackable 3 high.

See pages22, 35 & 67

for more Kind chairs

68-69 Kind Double Page (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 12:57

Page 71: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Kind

69Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

The Kind four leg chair is a simple and elegant design. A choice of frame and upholstery variations can be specified, with the option to co-ordinate with the dual mesh design of the task seating.

meeting & general purpose

Cantilever Mesh Meeting Chair Four Leg Meeting ChairCode £

KDMC11B - With No Arms 148

KDMC12B - With Fixed Arms 182

Plastic seat and mesh back. Black plastic

back surround & under shroud. Black four

leg frame. Stackable 4 high. Choice of 9

colours available for mesh back.

Stackable 4 high.

Code £

KDMC41B - With No Arms 182

KDMC42B - With Fixed Arms 214

Plastic seat and mesh back. Black plastic

back surround & under shroud. Black

cantilever frame. Stackable 3 high. Choice

of 9 colours available for mesh back.

Code £

KDMC21B - With No Arms 174

KDMC22B - With Fixed Arms 207

Upholstered seat and mesh back. Black 4 leg

frame. Stackable 4 high. Black plastic back

surround & under shroud. Choice of 9

colours available for mesh back.

Four Leg Mesh Meeting Chair

Options£

Silver Frame P FOC

Chrome Frame C 22

Castors CS 22

KDMC51B

KDMC12B KDMC41B KDMC22B

Cantilever Frame Meeting ChairCode £

KDMC51B - With No Arms 211

KDMC52B - With Fixed Arms 244

Upholstered seat and mesh back. Black cantilever

frame. Stackable 3 high. Black plastic back surround

& under shroud.

Choice of 9 colours available for mesh back.

68-69 Kind Double Page (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 12:57

Page 72: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Writing Table (RH) WTRH 39

Writing Table (LH) WTLH 39

Leola Dolly LCD 209

Linking Device (Pair) LD 14

Leola

70

Priced in Group 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

115kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

Comfort and ergonomics are core to the modern, simple, clean cut design of Leola. The result is a multifunctionalchair suitable for almost every environment. Leola is a perfect choice for contemporary community areas, waitingrooms, conferencing, bars, bistro’s, waiting rooms, meeting rooms, boardrooms and multiple other applications within the office.

meeting & general purpose

Stacks4 chairs

high

Plastic Seat & Backrest - Without Arms, Chrome Legs Upholstered Seat & Plastic Backrest - Without Arms, Chrome Legs

Code £

LLBUSPB Black Plastic 171

LLGUSPB Grey Plastic 171

LLWUSPB White Plastic 171

Code £

LLBPSPB Black Plastic 137

LLGPSPB Grey Plastic 137

LLWPSPB White Plastic 137

Polypropylene fibreglass backrest, upholstered seat

Upholstered seat

Polypropylene fibreglass backrest, polypropylene seat

Shown with optional arms

Mesh Black Plastic Backrest - Without Arms, Chrome LegsUpholstered Seat & Backrest - Without Arms, Chrome Legs

Code £

Black Plastic Mesh Backrest,

Polypropylene Seat

LLBPSMB Black Plastic 171

LLGPSMB Grey Plastic 171

LLWPSMB White Plastic 171

Code £

Black Plastic Mesh Backrest,

Upholstered Seat

LLBUSMB Black Plastic 204

LLGUSMB Grey Plastic 204

LLWUSMB White Plastic 204

Code £

LLBUSUB Black Plastic 204

LLGUSUB Grey Plastic 204

LLWUSUB White Plastic 204

Polypropylene seat

Options

Black Plastic Arms BLA 34

Grey Plastic Arms GLA 34

White Plastic Arms WLA 34

£ £

BLA, GLA or WLA WTRH or WTLH (Available in black only)

LCD (Up to 8 chairs)

Leola Dimensions (mm) Plastic Seat Upholstered Seat

Seat Width: 470 485

Seat Depth: 470 475

Seat Height: 455 480

Plastic Colours

WhiteGreyBlack

70-71 Leola Double Page (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 13:05

Page 73: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

71

70-71 Leola Double Page (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 13:05

Page 74: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Alina UpholsteredThe extensive Alina range is ideal for training, meeting or conference applications. The upholstered seat and back create a comfortable conference chair. Arm and writing tablets can be added to the 4 legged Alina models. The Alina is stackable up to 5 high, comes with a chrome frame and available in a choice of three frame styles.

72

4 Leg with Castors CantileverCode £

ALUP/4LEG No arms 137

ALUP/4LEG/A With arms 195

Dimensions (mm)

Overall Width:

Seat Width:

Seat Depth:

Overall Height:

Overall Width:

Seat Width:

Seat Depth:

Overall Height:

Overall Width:

Seat Width:

Seat Depth:

Overall Height:

580

450

460

860

580

450

460

850

525

450

460

860

Code £

ALUP/CAST No arms 182

ALUP/CAST/A With arms 239

Code £

ALUP/CANT Cantilever Frame 208

ALUP/4LEG/WT ALUP/CAST/WT

4 Leg

4 Leg with Writing Tablet

ALUP/4LEG/WT 210

4 Leg with Writing Tablet & Castors

ALUP/CAST/WT 255

Note: Chairs will not stack with writing tablet or arms. Writing tablet is factory fitted only, no retro fit.

110kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed

and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Options£

meeting & general purpose

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Stacks up to 5

high

72-73 Alina - Alina Mesh (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 13:16

Page 75: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Versatile and robust, the Alina Mesh is designed for training, meeting or conferencing environments. The upholstered seat is combined with a breathable mesh back for added comfort. Arm and writing tablets can be added to 4 legged models. The Alina Mesh is stackable up to 5 high, available in a choice of three frame styles, and comes with a chrome frame.

73

4 Leg with Castors4 LegCode £

ALM/CANT Cantilever Frame 276

Dimensions (mm)

Overall Width:

Seat Width:

Seat Depth:

Overall Height:

Overall Width:

Seat Width:

Seat Depth:

Overall Height:

Overall Width:

Seat Width:

Seat Depth:

Overall Height:

450

390

455

780

580

450

460

850

580

450

460

850

Code £

ALM/CAST No arms 250

ALM/CAST/A With arms 306

Code £

ALM/4LEG No arms 205

ALM/4LEG/A With arms 261

ALM/4LEG/WT ALM/CAST/WT

Cantilever

Note: Chairs will not stack with writing tablet or arms. Writing tablet is factory fitted only, no retro fit.

4 Leg with Writing Tablet

ALM/4LEG/WT 278

4 Leg with Writing Tablet & Castors

ALM/CAST/WT 322

110kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Options£

Alina Meshmeeting & general purpose

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Add arm or writing

tablets

72-73 Alina - Alina Mesh (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 13:16

Page 76: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

74 Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

meeting & general purpose

Priced in Camira Advantage/Phoenix fabric, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320.Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

IsThe Is meeting chair has a light environmental impact and sustainability at the core of its design, it is simple to use, refurbish and eventually recycle.A flexible range of stacking meeting chairs are available with a number of options.

4 Leg Stacking Chair 4 Leg Stacking ArmchairCode £

MIS2I 225

Moulded backrest, silver frame.

Code £

MIS5A 296

Moulded backrest, silver frame.

Dimensions (mm)

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Seat Height:

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Seat Height:

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Seat Height:

820

505

535

480

820

505

535

480

820

590

535

480

Code £

MIS5I 272

Full upholstered, silver frame.

Code £

MIS2A 248

Moulded backrest, silver frame.

Shown with Fixed Arms

Trolley (Stacks 5 high)

Writing Tablet (RH)

4 Leg Stacking Chair

Castors (4 leg only) 39

Chrome Steel Frame POA

Trolley (Stacks 5 high) 293

* Linking Device (4 leg only) 23

Writing Tablet (LH) 103

t Writing Tablet (RH) 103

* Must be specified at time of order. t 8mm white laminate surface. Specify left or right at time of ordering.

Dimensions (mm)

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Seat Height:

820

590

535

480

5year

guarantee

Options

4 Leg Stacking Armchair

£

74-75 Is Double Page (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 14:12

Page 77: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Is

75

meeting & general purpose

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 workingdays fully assembled. Packaging removed andrecycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Cantilever Stacking ChairCantilever Stacking ChairCode £

MIS2E 304

Moulded backrest, silver frame.

Code £

MIS5E 355

Full upholstered, silver frame.

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Seat Height:

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Seat Height:

Dimensions (mm)

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Seat Height:

820

590

600

485

820

590

600

485

820

590

600

485

Code £

MIS5M 331

Full upholstered, silver frame.

Code £

MIS2M 284

Moulded backrest, silver frame.

Cantilever Stacking Armchair

Dimensions (mm)

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Seat Height:

820

590

600

485

Cantilever Stacking Armchair

Expanded Is range for

2015

74-75 Is Double Page (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 14:12

Page 78: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

76

Colletta meeting & general purpose

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Simple yet classic - elegant and comfortable, Colletta offers a comprehensive range of chairs that make the perfect addition to any meeting or conference environment. Colletta combines style and versatility. Made for meetings.

Priced in Camira Advantage/Phoenix fabric, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Mesh Back Pedestal Base

Options

Dimensions (mm)

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Width + Arms:

Overall Height:

Overall Depth:

465

480

440

545

880

680

Code £

COLP-P - Polished Chrome Frame 441

High Back CantileverMesh Back Five Star BaseCode £

COLV1 - Polished Chrome Frame 272

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Width + Arms:

Overall Height:

Overall Depth:

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Width + Arms:

Overall Height:

Overall Depth:

Dimensions (mm)

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Width + Arms:

Overall Height:

Overall Depth:

465

480

455

530

860

565

465

480

455

530

890

565

430-530

480

440

545

855-955

660

Code £

COLV2 - Polished Chrome Frame 284

Code £

COLS-B - Black base with Castors 397

COLS-P

Medium Back Cantilever

£

Polished Chrome Base COLS-P 40

Grey Mesh GRY FOC

White Mesh WHT FOC

5year

guarantee

Expanded range for

2015

76-77 Colletta - One (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 14:18

Page 79: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

77

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 workingdays fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320.

It really is the One. A meeting or task chair with complete unexaggerated honesty in design. The moulded plastic back,seat-pan and armrest form one unified sculptured piece. Moulded polypropylene backrest and seat-pan in black asstandard with the option of white. Removable seat cushion. Height adjustable swivel chair has 5 star black plastic baseas standard, with option of polished base. Available with black castors or glides. Silver cantilever and 4 leg versionshave option of chrome frame.

Cantilever Stacking ArmchairArmchair with 5 Star Base - Black Base

Code £

M0N1A - Silver Frame 240

Moulded backrest. Upholstered Seat.

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Seat Height:

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Seat Height:

Dimensions (mm)

Height:

Width:

Depth:

Seat Height:

830

560

590

490

830

560

590

490

830-960

560

590

490-620

Code £

M0N1C - Silver Frame 221

Moulded backrest. Upholstered Seat.

00N1AAA/AAB

Armchair - Non Stacking

£

00N1AAA Polished 5 Star Base 47

00N1AAA Chrome Steel Frame 37

White Body Components 30

MON1A Chrome Steel Frame POA

MON1C White Frame FOC

00N1AAA/AAB Glides (Specify on order) FOC

Stackable to 5 high

120kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

Options

Shown with Polished 5 star base with castors & white body

Shown with white body

TTestingMeeting chair tested BS EN 15373: 2007.

Swivel chair tested BS EN 1335 Parts 2 & 3.

Onemeeting & general purpose

Code £

M0N1AAA/AAA - Silver Frame 258

Adjustable Seat Height. Moulded backrest.

New for 2015

76-77 Colletta - One (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 14:18

Page 80: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Desking, Storage and Screens

78

A desk is not just some wood and metal, it is an object for which many of us spend several hours, of several days sitting at. So don’t settle for anything less than the exact desk which meets your every requirement. You may like a functional desk, a contemporary look, an executive feel, or one that adjusts in height for different users.

Once you have located the ideal desk, don’t forget to accessorise! With a choice of cable management gadgets which ensure a tidy and trip free workspace or a noise reducing desk mounted screen that can also add some colour to your environment. These can be found on pages 110-111.

2015 Range Highlights

Fraction PlusNewly extended and improved range of entry level furniture available in two standard finishes and three special finishes.

Optima PlusDesigned with emphasis on wire management solutions. The design enables the swift and effective installation

78-79 Desking, Storage, Screens Intro-Full Page (15).indd 1 02/12/2014 14:17

Page 81: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

79

78-79 Desking, Storage, Screens Intro-Full Page (15).indd 2 02/12/2014 14:17

Page 82: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

80

Frac

tion

Plus

Stor

age

Wor

kmod

e Pl

us

Jets

tream

Pane

l End

Wooden PedestalsPage 96

WorkstationsPage 90

TablesPage 88

Steel TamboursPage 106

Wooden CupboardsPage 104

Wooden TamboursPage 107

WorkstationsPage 92

Panel EndPage 94

Steel PedestalsPage 97

WorkstationsPage 82

PedestalsPage 84

StoragePage 86

Filing CabinetsPage 85

BookcasesPage 87

Filing CabinetsPage 108

BookcasesPage 109

Scre

ens

Lyle Desk Mounted Page 98

Hove Desk Mounted Page 101

Lyle Standing Page 99

Troon Desk Mounted Page 100

Mee

ting

Tabl

esAc

cess

orie

s

Mon

itor

Arm

s

Meeting Tables Page 102

Accessories Page 110

Monitor ArmsPage 111

desking, storage and screens contents

80-81 Desking, Storage, Screens Contents (15).indd 1 02/12/2014 12:57

Page 83: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

81

Nor

ton

Eclip

se

Opt

ima

Plus

Kass

ini

Adva

nce

Stor

age

‘I’ F

ram

e El

ectro

nic

Mat

rix B

ench

Linn

ea B

ench

Scre

enbo

x

Meeting TablesPage 129

Desk ExtensionsPage 118

Meeting TablesPage 123

Desk ExtensionsPage 129

Pedestal Supported Desks

Page 116

Desk ExtensionsPage 123

Meeting TablePage 135

WorkstationsPage 88 - 89

DesksPage 126-128

DesksPage 114-115

DesksPage 120-122

Height SettablePage 132-134

Height Adjustable DesksPage 136

WorkstationsPage 141

WorkstationsPage 144-147

Meeting ExtensionsPage 142

Conference TablesPage 147

Meeting Tables Page 142

Meeting ExtensionsPage 148

Screens Page 143

Screens Page 149

Extra StoragePage 150 - 151

ScreenboxPage 139

Height Adjustable DesksPage 130 - 131

Cable Trays/ RisersPage 119

Height Adjustable DesksPage 124 - 125

PedestalsPage 152

StoragePage 153

desking, storage and screens contents

80-81 Desking, Storage, Screens Contents (15).indd 2 02/12/2014 12:57

Page 84: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Fraction Plus desking, storage and screens

The Fraction Plus range is the first choice in affordable and practical office furniture. Fraction Plus is available in two standard finishes and three special finishes and offers a comprehensive range of furniture including these desks, pedestals, meeting tables, bookcases and filing cabinets.Fraction comes with 25mm desk tops, silver powder coated steel cantilever frames and 2mm PVC edging on the tops.

Wave WorkstationCore WorkstationCodes W x H x D (mm) £

ZFPC1412(L) Left Hand 1400 x 730 x 800/1200 268

ZFPC1412(R) Right Hand 1400 x 730 x 800/1200 268

ZFPC1612(L) Left Hand 1600 x 730 x 800/1200 289

ZFPC1612(R) Right Hand 1600 x 730 x 800/1200 289

ZFPC1812(L) Left Hand 1800 x 730 x 800/1200 304

ZFPC1812(R) Right Hand 1800 x 730 x 800/1200 304

Codes W x H x D (mm) £

ZFPW1410(L) Left Hand 1400 x 730 x 800/1000 228

ZFPW1410(R) Right Hand 1400 x 730 x 800/1000 228

ZFPW1610(L) Left Hand 1600 x 730 x 800/1000 245

ZFPW1610(R) Right Hand 1600 x 730 x 800/1000 245

25mmworktops

82 Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Rectangular Workstation Desk End TablesCodes W x H x D (mm) £

ZFP0800 800 x 730 x 800 (Square) 146

ZFP1208 1200 x 730 x 800 181

ZFP1408 1400 x 730 x 800 192

ZFP1608 1600 x 730 x 800 206

ZFP1808 1800 x 730 x 800 212

Codes W x H x D (mm) £

ZFPCE1000 1100 x 730 x 1000 142

ZFPCE1600 1600 x 730 x 800 153

ZFPCE/1000 ZFPCE/1600

Special ColoursFrame ColourStandard Colours

White Cappuccino MapleNova Oak Beech Silver

BCH WHT CAP MAPNOAK2year

guarantee

Special Finishes are on a 30 day lead time

82-83 Fraction Workstations (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 14:37

Page 85: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

83

82-83 Fraction Workstations (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 14:37

Page 86: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Fraction Plus desking, storage and screens

Fraction Plus is available in two standard finishes and three special finishes and offers a comprehensive range of furniture including these drawers and this pedestal. All are supplied with silver handles.

Low Mobile Pedestal 2 Drawer Fixed PedestalCode W x H x D (mm) £

FPFP2D 2 Drawer 410 x 400 x 606 138

FPFP3D 3 Drawer 410 x 400 x 606 149

Code W x H x D (mm) £

FPMP2D 430 x 510 x 500 182

84 Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

IsSee the seating

section from page 10.

High Mobile Pedestal 3 DrawerLow Mobile Pedestal 3 DrawerCode W x H x D (mm) £

FPMP3D 430 x 510 x 500 191

Code W x H x D (mm) £

FPHMP3D 430 x 650 x 600 223

Desk High Pedestal 3 DrawerCode W x H x D (mm) £

FPDHP63 430 x 730 x 600 228

FPDHP83 430 x 730 x 800 245

Special ColoursStandard Colours

White Cappuccino MapleNova Oak Beech

BCH WHT CAP MAPNOAK2year

guarantee

Special Finishes are on a 30 day lead time

84-85 Fraction peds - Filing Cabinets (15).indd 1 04/12/2014 11:09

Page 87: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

85Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

3 Drawer Filing Cabinet2 Drawer Filing CabinetCode W x H x D (mm) £

FPFC2 500 x 730 x 600 260

Code W x H x D (mm) £

FPFC3 500 x 1020 x 600 291

Code W x H x D (mm) £

FPFC4 500 x 1320 x 600 319

Desk High Lateral Filing CabinetCode W x H x D (mm) £

FPDHFC600 800 x 730 x 600 319

Fraction Plusdesking, storage and screens

Practical, durable and stylish. Choose from these filing cabinets to meet any office filing requirement.

4 Drawer Filing Cabinet

Special ColoursStandard Colours

White Cappuccino MapleNova Oak Beech

BCH WHT CAP MAPNOAK2year

guarantee

Special Finishes are on a 30 day lead time

84-85 Fraction peds - Filing Cabinets (15).indd 2 04/12/2014 11:09

Page 88: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Fraction Plus desking, storage and screens

86

1200 High Storage Unit800 High Storage UnitDesk High Storage Unit

1600 High Storage Unit 2000 High Storage Unit

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ZFPDDC720 800 x 730 x 600 225

Supplied with 1 shelf

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ZFPDDC1200 800 x 1200 x 400 295

Supplied with 2 shelves

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ZFPDDC800 800 x 800 x 400 225

Supplied with 1 shelf

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ZFPDDC1600 800 x 1600 x 400 365

Supplied with 3 shelves

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ZFPDDC2000 800 x 2000 x 400 411

Supplied with 4 shelves

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Special Colours

Standard Colours

White Cappuccino Maple

Nova Oak Beech

BCH

WHT CAP MAP

NOAK2year

guarantee

Special Finishes are on a 30 day lead time

86-87 Storage Unit - Bookcases (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 14:57

Page 89: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Fraction Plusdesking, storage and screens

These smart and affordable open fronted bookcases come complete with solid wood back panels, and fully height adjustable shelving, (one fixed shelf).

1200mm High Bookcase - Includes 2 shelves

1600mm High Bookcase - Includes 3 shelves 2000mm High Bookcase - Includes 4 shelves

800mm High Bookcase - Includes 1 shelf

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ZFPBC1600 800 x 1600 x 400 212

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ZFPBC2000 800 x 2000 x 400 229

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ZFPBC1200 800 x 1200 x 400 199

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ZFPBC800 800 x 800 x 400 136

87Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Completewith solid wood

back panels

Special ColoursStandard Colours

White Cappuccino MapleNova Oak Beech

BCH WHT CAP MAPNOAK2year

guarantee

Special Finishes are on a 30 day lead time

86-87 Storage Unit - Bookcases (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 14:57

Page 90: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Fraction Plus desking, storage and screens

Free Standing ReturnRectangular Meeting Table Circular Meeting TableCodes W x H x D (mm) £

ZFPMT1208 1200 x 730 x 800 165

ZFPMT1408 1400 x 730 x 800 185

ZFPMT1608 1600 x 730 x 800 206

ZFPMT1808 1800 x 730 x 800 218

Codes W x H x D (mm) £

ZFPRET800 800 x 730 x 600 119

ZFPRET1000 1000 x 730 x 600 126

ZFPRET1200 1200 x 730 x 600 130

Codes Dia x H (mm) £

ZFPCMT10D 1000 x 730 197

ZFPCMT12D 1200 x 730 199

88 Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Barrel Table - Wooden LegsBoardroom Table - Metal LegsBoardroom Table - Metal Legs

Codes W x H x D (mm) £

ZFPBD2400 2400 x 730 x 1200 382

Codes W x H x D (mm) £

ZFPBD1800 1800 x 730 x 1200 295

ZFPBD1800 ZFPBD2400

Codes W x H x D (mm) £

ZFPBT2400 2400 x 730 x 1200 361

Special ColoursFrame ColourStandard Colours

White Cappuccino MapleNova Oak Beech Silver

BCH WHT CAP MAPNOAK2year

guarantee

Special Finishes are on a 30 day lead time

88-89 Fraction Meeting Table Boardroom Table (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 15:02

Page 91: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Practical, durable and stylish. Choose from filing cabinets to cupboards to meet any office filing requirement.

Low Mobile Pedestal 2 Drawer Fixed PedestalCode W x H x D (mm) £

FPFP2D 2 Drawer 409 x 450 x 530 000

FPFP3D 3 Drawer 409 x 450 x 530 000

Code W x H x D (mm) £

FPMP2 419 x 595 x 530 000

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

IsSee the seating

section from page 10.

High Mobile Pedestal 3 DrawerLow Mobile Pedestal 3 DrawerCode W x H x D (mm) £

FPMP3 419 x 595 x 530 000

Code W x H x D (mm) £

FPHMP3 419 x 680 x 530 000

Desk High Pedestal 3 DrawerCode W x H x D (mm) £

FPDHP63 419 x 727 x 600 000

FPDHP83 419 x 727 x 800 000

Special ColoursStandard Colours

White Cherry MapleNova Oak Beech

BCH ? ? ?NOVA OAK2

year guarantee

Special Finishes are on a 30 day lead time

89

88-89 Fraction Meeting Table Boardroom Table (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 15:02

Page 92: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

25mmqualitytops

Workmode Plus desking, storage and screens

Keep your workspace tidy with Workmode Plus. The leg design has been engineered to offer fully integrated cable management to ensure work areas remain safe and tidy.

Core Workstation Rectangular WorkstationCode W x H x D (mm) £

ZWMP16LC Left Hand 1600 x 727 x 1200/800/600 409

ZWMP18LC Left Hand 1800 x 727 x 1200/800/600 423

ZWMP16RC Right Hand 1600 x 727 x 1200/800/600 409

ZWMP18RC Right Hand 1800 x 727 x 1200/800/600 423

Pedestal not included, see pages 96-97.

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ZWMP8080C 800 x 727 x 800 261

ZWMP1280C 1200 x 727 x 800 286

ZWMP1480C 1400 x 727 x 800 307

ZWMP1680C 1600 x 727 x 800 322

ZWMP1880C 1800 x 727 x 800 334

90 Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

ScreensSee the seating section from page 98-101

Standard FeaturesIntegrated cable management.

Narrow Workstation Wave WorkstationCode W x H x D (mm) £

ZWMP8060C 800 x 727 x 600 225

ZWMP1260C 1200 x 727 x 600 259

ZWMP1660C 1600 x 727 x 600 297

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ZWMP1410LWC Left Hand 1400 x 727 x 800/1000 359

ZWMP1610LWC Left Hand 1600 x 727 x 800/1000 382

ZWMP1410RWC Right Hand 1400 x 727 x 800/1000 359

ZWMP1610RWC Right Hand 1600 x 727 x 800/1000 382

Colours

Oak & Silver Beech & Silver

B/SBLUEO/S5year

guarantee

Forcomplimenting

storage see pages 104-109

90-91 Workmode Plus (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 15:12

Page 93: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

91

90-91 Workmode Plus (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 15:12

Page 94: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Jetstream desking, storage and screens

This stylish and contemporary leg system supports 25mm MFC worktops fitted with integral cable ports. A wide range of storage solutions compliment the Jetstream range.

Core Workstation Rectangular WorkstationCode W x H x D (mm) £

ZJT16LCW Left Hand 1600 x 727 x 1200/800/600 444

ZJT18LCW Left Hand 1800 x 727 x 1200/800/600 455

ZJT16RCW Right Hand 1600 x 727 x 1200/800/600 444

ZJT18RCW Right Hand 1800 x 727 x 1200/800/600 455

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ZJT8080CW 800 x 727 x 800 273

ZJT1280CW 1200 x 727 x 800 297

ZJT1480CW 1400 x 727 x 800 313

ZJT1680CW 1600 x 727 x 800 331

ZJT1880CW 1800 x 727 x 800 344

92 Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

TamboursSee the range from page 106

Narrow Rectangular Workstation Wave WorkstationCode W x H x D (mm) £

ZJT8060CW 800 x 727 x 600 227

ZJT1260CW 1200 x 727 x 600 259

ZJT1660CW 1600 x 727 x 600 293

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ZJT1410LWCW Left Hand 1400 x 727 x 800/1000 365

ZJT1610LWCW Left Hand 1600 x 727 x 800/1000 390

ZJT1410RWCW Right Hand 1400 x 727 x 800/1000 365

ZJT1610RWCW Right Hand 1600 x 727 x 800/1000 390

Colours

Oak & Silver Beech & Silver

B/SBLUEO/S5year

guaranteeTTesting

Tested for contract use to BS4875: Part 5: 2001- Level 4 and BS EN 527: Part 1: 2000.

25mmqualitytops

Forcomplimenting

storage see pages 104-109

92-93 Jetstream (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 15:29

Page 95: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

93

92-93 Jetstream (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 15:29

Page 96: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Panel End desking, storage and screens

This stylish and contemporary system supports 25mm MFC worktops. A wide range of storage options compliment the Panel End range. Traditionally styled in two colour finishes.

Core Workstation Rectangular WorkstationCode W x H x D (mm) £

ZWM16LP Left Hand 1600 x 727 x 1200/800/600 373

ZWM18LP Left Hand 1800 x 727 x 1200/800/600 386

ZWM16RP Right Hand 1600 x 727 x 1200/800/600 373

ZWM18RP Right Hand 1800 x 727 x 1200/800/600 386

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ZWM8080P 800 x 727 x 800 216

ZWM1280P 1200 x 727 x 800 241

ZWM1480P 1400 x 727 x 800 262

ZWM1680P 1600 x 727 x 800 279

ZWM1880P 1800 x 727 x 800 289

94 Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Meeting TablesSee our range on page 102-103.

Narrow Rectangular Workstation Wave WorkstationCode W x H x D (mm) £

ZWM8060P 800 x 727 x 600 180

ZWM1260P 1200 x 727 x 600 214

ZWM1660P 1600 x 727 x 600 252

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ZWM1410LWP Left Hand 1400 x 727 x 800/1000 313

ZWM1610LWP Left Hand 1600 x 727 x 800/1000 338

ZWM1410RWP Right Hand 1400 x 727 x 800/1000 313

ZWM1610RWP Right Hand 1600 x 727 x 800/1000 338

Colours

Oak Beech

BCHOAK5year

guarantee

25mmqualitytops

Forcomplimenting

storage see pages 104-109

94-95 Panel End (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 15:33

Page 97: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

95

94-95 Panel End (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 15:33

Page 98: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Wooden Pedestals desking, storage and screens

A range of high quality, heavy duty pedestals; desk high, mobile, and our stylish steel pedestals opposite.

Standard Colours

Oak Beech

5year

guarantee

96 Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

MultidrawersSee our Storage & Filing from page 248.

Standard FeaturesSteel sided drawers.

Locking drawers and folding key fob.

800 Desk High Pedestal High Mobile PedestalCode £

DHP3-6 294

Dimensions (mm)

W392 H727 D600 W392 H727 D800 W392 H680 D600

Code £

DHP3-8 342

Code £

HMP3 294

600 Desk High Pedestal

Code £

MP2 282

Dimensions (mm)

W392 H550 D600 W392 H550 D600

Code £

MP3 282

Low Mobile - 2 Drawer Low Mobile - 3 Drawer

OAK BCH

Delivery &installation

included

96-97 Wooden - Steel Pedestals (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 15:44

Page 99: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Steel Pedestalsdesking, storage and screens

Colours - Add 15%

Standard Colours Colours - Add 10%

Orange

GraphiteEdinburgh Oxford BlueLight Grey Cream

Green

Goose GreyBeige Coffee

Yellow

White Black

Pink

Silver

New Blue

5year

guarantee

Deliveredfromstock

97Stock Pedestals are delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days and fully assembled. Bisley Pedestals are delivered to a room ofchoice within 30 working days and fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

3 Drawer Mobile - White3 Drawer Mobile - Silver

Stock Item Stock Item

Code £

NWA59M1SF 278

W420 H501 D565W392 H580 D575

Dimensions (mm)

W392 H580 D575

Code £

JMRP01WHT 279

Code £

JMRP01SIL 279

Low Mobile - 2 Drawer

Code £

NWA5AM1IIF 290

W420 H573 D565W300 H573 D565

Code £

NW35AM1IIF 290

High Mobile - 3 DrawerNarrow Mobile - 3 DrawerLow Mobile - 3 Drawer

Dimensions (mm)

W420 H501 D565

Code £

NWA59M1SSS 290

96-97 Wooden - Steel Pedestals (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 15:44

Page 100: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Brackets 2 brackets must be ordered with each screen. Code: SBKT-01 Add £16 each.

Specification Codes with ‘R’ refer to the return screen. Add suffix ‘S’ for silver and ‘W’ for white trim.

All screens are priced in Camira Cara fabric. To view colours and order samples visit:

www.camirafabrics.com/fabrics-and-samples/cara

Lyle Desk Mounted Screens desking, storage and screens

This entry level screen boasts 25mm thickness, 4mm thick PVC trim in either silver [s] or white [w] and a comprehensive range of accessories to choose from.The Lyle will fit to the Fraction, Workmode Plus, Jetstream and Panel End ranges.

Straight Top - 380mm High Wave Top - 180mm To 380mm High

Code Width (mm) £

L-ST-0638R 585 77

L-ST-0838R 785 84

L-ST-0838 800 84

L-ST-1038R 985 90

L-ST-1038 1000 90

L-ST-1238R 1185 100

L-ST-1238 1200 100

Code Width (mm) £

L-WV-0638R 585 77

L-WV-0838R 785 84

L-WV-0838 800 84

L-WV-1038R 985 90

L-WV-1038 1000 90

L-WV-1238R 1185 100

L-WV-1238 1200 100

Code Width (mm) £

L-ST-1438R 1385 105

L-ST-1438 1400 105

L-ST-1638R 1585 124

L-ST-1638 1600 124

L-ST-1838R 1785 130

L-ST-1838 1800 130

L-ST-2038 2000 135

Code Width (mm) £

L-WV-1438R 1385 105

L-WV-1438 1400 105

L-WV-1638R 1585 124

L-WV-1638 1600 124

L-WV-1838R 1785 130

L-WV-1838 1800 130

L-WV-2038 2000 135

98 Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

5year

guarantee

Arc Top - 180mm To 380mm High

Code Width (mm) £

L-AC-0638R 585 77

L-AC-0838R 785 84

L-AC-0838 800 84

L-AC-1038R 985 90

L-AC-1038 1000 90

L-AC-1238R 1185 100

L-AC-1238 1200 100

Code Width (mm) £

L-AC-1438R 1385 105

L-AC-1438 1400 105

L-AC-1638R 1585 124

L-AC-1638 1600 124

L-AC-1838R 1785 130

L-AC-1838 1800 130

L-AC-2038 2000 135

Desk Mounted Stan

Desk Mounted Stan 480

Desk Mounted Stan 580

Wave screens Desk Mount

Wave screens Desk Mount580

Curve screens Desk Mount

Curve screens Desk Mount480

Modesty screens

Desk Mounted Stan

Desk Mounted Stan 480

Desk Mounted Stan 580

Wave screens Desk Mount

Wave screens Desk Mount580

Curve screens Desk Mount

Curve screens Desk Mount480

Modesty screens

Desk Mounted Stan

Desk Mounted Stan 480

Desk Mounted Stan 580

Wave screens Desk Mount

Wave screens Desk Mount580

Curve screens Desk Mount

Curve screens Desk Mount480

Modesty screens

Accessory RailCode Rail Width (mm) £

ACR-08 600 15

ACR-10 800 17

ACR-12 1000 18

Code Rail Width (mm) £

ACR-14 1200 19

ACR-16 1400 24

ACR-18 1600 25

Accessories £

A4 Letter Tray SA-A4LT 14

A3 Letter Tray SA-A3LT 17

Pencil Pot SA-PEPT 12

Phone Holder SA-PHLD 12

Name Holder SA-NHLD 11

Trinket Pot SA-TRPT 12

Note: a rail must be ordered for any accessory.

SA-A4LT SA-PEPT SA-PHLD SA-NHLD SA-TRPT

98-99 Lyle Desk Mounted Screens (15).indd 1 04/12/2014 11:10

Page 101: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Lyle Free Standing Screensdesking, storage and screens

Lyle One Free Standing ScreensLyle Free Standing Screens

Lyle Free Standing Screens

Lyle One Free Standing screens

Code Dimensions W x H (mm) £

1/12.08 800 x 1200 226

1/12.12 1200 x 1200 237

1/12.16 1600 x 1200 274

1/16.08 800 x 1600 255

1/16.12 1200 x 1600 266

1/16.16 1600 x 1600 297

Code Dimensions W x H (mm) £

EL/12.08 800 x 1200 185

EL/12.12 1200 x 1200 196

EL/12.16 1600 x 1200 233

EL/16.08 800 x 1600 214

EL/16.12 1200 x 1600 225

EL/16.16 1600 x 1600 257

99Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Lyle Free Standing Screens

• UPVC uprights supplied in silver • Supplied with 2x height adjusters• Fabric wrapped top• Non Linking• Supplied with 2 x T-feet

Lyle One Free Standing Screens

• UPVC uprights supplied in silver • Supplied with 2x height adjusters• Fabric wrapped top• Supplied with 1x Inline Link and 1x Cover Strip• Supplied with 2 x T-feet

All screens are priced in Camira Cara fabric. To view colours and order samples visit:

www.camirafabrics.com/fabrics-and-samples/cara

Suppliedwith two

feet

98-99 Lyle Desk Mounted Screens (15).indd 2 04/12/2014 11:10

Page 102: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Brackets & LinkingTwo brackets must be ordered with each screen. One kit required for each return screen.

Code: SBKT-01 Add £16 each. Code: SA-LINK-KIT. Add £15 each.

Specification

30mm Screen thickness. Integral hanging facility. Codes with ‘R’ refer to the return screen. Add suffix ‘S’ for silver and ‘W’ for white trim. All screens are priced in Camira Cara fabric. To view colours and order samples visit:

www.camirafabrics.com/fabrics-and-samples/cara

Troon Desk Mounted ScreensFramed on 3 sides using lightly proportioned bespoke aluminium extrusions, conceived to reflect the latest trends in office furniture. Troon screens will integrate with our stocked desk ranges.

Straight Top - 380mm High Wave Top - 380mm at Highest Point

Code Width (mm) £

T-T1-0838R 785 102

T-T1-0838 800 102

T-T1-1038R 985 114

T-T1-1038 1000 114

T-T1-1238R 1185 121

T-T1-1238 1200 121

Code Width (mm) £

T-T5-0638R 585 102

T-T5-0838R 785 102

T-T5-0838 800 102

T-T5-1038R 985 114

T-T5-1038 1000 114

T-T5-1238R 1185 121

Code Width (mm) £

T-T1-1438R 1385 129

T-T1-1438 1400 129

T-T1-1638R 1585 149

T-T1-1638 1600 149

T-T1-1838R 1785 160

T-T1-1838 1800 160

Code Width (mm) £

T-T5-1238 1200 121

T-T5-1438R 1385 129

T-T5-1438 1400 129

T-T5-1638R 1585 149

T-T5-1638 1600 149

T-T5-1838 1800 160

100 Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

5year

guarantee

Arc Top - 380mm at Highest Point

Code Width (mm) £

T-T6-0638R 585 102

T-T6-0838R 785 102

T-T6-0838 800 102

T-T6-1038R 985 114

T-T6-1038 1000 114

T-T6-1238R 1185 121

Code Width (mm) £

T-T6-1238 1200 121

T-T6-1438R 1385 129

T-T6-1438 1400 129

T-T6-1638R 1585 149

T-T6-1638 1600 149

T-T6-1838 1800 160

Desk Mounted Stan

Desk Mounted Stan 480

Desk Mounted Stan 580

Wave screens Desk Mount

Wave screens Desk Mount580

Curve screens Desk Mount

Curve screens Desk Mount480

Modesty screens

Desk Mounted Stan

Desk Mounted Stan 480

Desk Mounted Stan 580

Wave screens Desk Mount

Wave screens Desk Mount580

Curve screens Desk Mount

Curve screens Desk Mount480

Modesty screens

Desk Mounted Stan

Desk Mounted Stan 480

Desk Mounted Stan 580

Wave screens Desk Mount

Wave screens Desk Mount580

Curve screens Desk Mount

Curve screens Desk Mount480

Modesty screens

Desk Mounted Stan

Desk Mounted Stan 480

Desk Mounted Stan 580

Wave screens Desk Mount

Wave screens Desk Mount580

Curve screens Desk Mount

Curve screens Desk Mount480

Modesty screens

Toolbar - 380mm High

Code Width (mm) £

T-T2-0838R 785 118

T-T2-0838 800 118

T-T2-1038R 985 136

T-T2-1038 1000 136

T-T2-1238R 1185 141

T-T2-1238 1200 141

Code Width (mm) £

T-T2-1438R 1385 161

T-T2-1438 1400 161

T-T2-1638R 1585 180

T-T2-1638 1600 180

T-T2-1838R 1785 204

T-T2-1838 1800 204

Accessories £

A4 Letter Tray SA-A4LT 14

A3 Letter Tray SA-A3LT 17

Pencil Pot SA-PEPT 12

Phone Holder SA-PHLD 12

Name Holder SA-NHLD 11

Trinket Pot SA-TRPT 12

SA-A4LT SA-PEPT SA-PHLD SA-NHLD SA-TRPT

All screens are priced in Camira Cara fabric. To view colours and order samples visit: www.camirafabrics.com/fabrics-and-samples/cara

TTesting

These Screens successfully satisfied the relevant sections

of BS EN 1023 and BS46.

desking, storage and screens

100-101 Troon Hove Desk Mounted Screens (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 16:01

Page 103: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Brackets & Linking. These must be ordered for each screen.

Code: SBKT-10. One Pair required for each screen. Add £21 (pair).

Code: SA-LINK-KIT. One kit required for each return screen. Add £15 each. All screens are priced in Camira Cara fabric. To view colours and order

Hove Mounted ScreensFramed on 4 sides, Hove is a highly functional contemporary desk mounted screen. Thoughtful design, clever engineering, beautiful build quality and competitive prices ensure that Hove screens can be confidently specified for use within the full hierarchy of office furniture.

Acrylic - 380mm HighStraight Top - 380mm High

Code Width (mm) £

H-T3-0638R 585 149

H-T3-0838R 785 157

H-T3-0838 800 157

H-T3-1038R 985 172

H-T3-1038 1000 172

H-T3-1238R 1185 195

H-T3-1238 1200 195

Code Width (mm) £

H-T3-1438R 1385 210

H-T3-1438 1400 210

H-T3-1638R 1585 227

H-T3-1638 1600 227

H-T3-1838R 1785 259

H-T3-1838 1800 259

Code Width (mm) £

H-T1-1438R 1385 163

H-T1-1438 1400 163

H-T1-1638R 1585 178

H-T1-1638 1600 178

H-T1-1838R 1785 204

H-T1-1838 1800 204

101Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Acrylic and Toolbar - 380mm High

Code Width (mm) £

H-T4-0638R 585 154

H-T4-0838R 785 167

H-T4-0838 800 167

H-T4-1038R 985 180

H-T4-1038 1000 180

H-T4-1238R 1185 204

H-T4-1238 1200 204

Code Width (mm) £

H-T4-1438R 1385 233

H-T4-1438 1400 233

H-T4-1638R 1585 245

H-T4-1638 1600 245

H-T4-1838R 1785 290

H-T4-1838 1800 290

Desk Mounted Stan

Desk Mounted Stan 480

Desk Mounted Stan 580

Wave screens Desk Mount

Wave screens Desk Mount580

Curve screens Desk Mount

Curve screens Desk Mount480

Modesty screens

Desk Mounted Stan

Desk Mounted Stan 480

Desk Mounted Stan 580

Wave screens Desk Mount

Wave screens Desk Mount580

Curve screens Desk Mount

Curve screens Desk Mount480

Modesty screens

Desk Mounted Stan

Desk Mounted Stan 480

Desk Mounted Stan 580

Wave screens Desk Mount

Wave screens Desk Mount580

Curve screens Desk Mount

Curve screens Desk Mount480

Modesty screens

Desk Mounted Stan

Desk Mounted Stan 480

Desk Mounted Stan 580

Wave screens Desk Mount

Wave screens Desk Mount580

Curve screens Desk Mount

Curve screens Desk Mount480

Modesty screens

Toolbar - 380mm High

Code Width (mm) £

H-T2-0638R 585 131

H-T2-0838R 785 147

H-T2-0838 800 147

H-T2-1038R 985 173

H-T2-1038 1000 173

H-T2-1238R 1185 181

H-T2-1238 1200 181

Code Width (mm) £

H-T2-1438R 1385 209

H-T2-1438 1400 209

H-T2-1638R 1585 227

H-T2-1638 1600 227

H-T2-1838R 1785 271

H-T2-1838 1800 271

A4 Letter Tray SA-A4LT 14

A3 Letter Tray SA-A3LT 17

Pencil Pot SA-PEPT 12

Phone Holder SA-PHLD 12

Name Holder SA-NHLD 11

Trinket Pot SA-TRPT 12

SA-A4LT SA-PEPT SA-PHLD SA-NHLD SA-TRPT

5year

guarantee

Polar White

Slate Grey

Acrylic Colours

Aurora Violet

Chilli Red

Perfect Plum

Mandarin Orange

Acid Green

Lime Zest

Electric Blue

Glacier Green

Code Width (mm) £

H-T1-0638R 585 109

H-T1-0838R 785 132

H-T1-0838 800 132

H-T1-1038R 985 138

H-T1-1038 1000 138

H-T1-1238R 1185 145

H-T1-1238 1200 145

Accessories £

samples visit: www.camirafabrics.com/fabrics-and-samples/cara

desking, storage and screens

100-101 Troon Hove Desk Mounted Screens (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 16:01

Page 104: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Tables desking, storage and screens

Practical, stylish and affordable meeting tables to suit your requirements for any type of office. Choose from a selection of different shaped and sized meeting tables to compliment the Fraction, Workmode Plus, and Jetstream ranges.

Finishes for Tubular Leg TablesTable Finishes

Oak & SilverOak Beech & SilverBeech

B/SBCH BLUEO/SOAK5year

guarantee

25mmqualitytops

102 Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Circular with Gullwing Legs Rectangular with Gullwing LegsCode Dimensions Dia x H (mm) £

ZTABT4D10 1000 x 727 252

ZTABT4D12 1200 x 727 287

Code Dimensions Dia x H (mm) £

ZTABTD10 1000 x 727 227

ZTABTD12 1200 x 727 263

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

ZTABTG12 1200 x 727 x 800 241

ZTABTG16 1600 x 727 x 800 285

Circular with Tubular Legs

Elliptical with Gullwing LegsCode Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

ZTABT12 1200 x 727 x 800 242

ZTABT16 1600 x 727 x 800 286

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

ZTABT24 2400 x 727 x 1047 391

Rectangular with Silver Tubular Legs

102-103 Meeting Tables (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 16:08

Page 105: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

103

102-103 Meeting Tables (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 16:08

Page 106: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Wooden Cupboards desking, storage and screens

These robust storage units compliment the Workmode Plus, Jetstream and Panel End desk ranges. All are supplied with locks and silver handles. Specify internal fitments to meet your storage requirements.

Stock Finishes

Oak Beech

BCHOAK5year

guarantee

104 Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Lateral Filing Cradle Pull-out Filing FrameCode £

SUS08 38

SUS10 38

Code £

ZSULCR10 (926mm wide only) 60

Code £

ZSULFS10 (926mm wide only) 133

Shelves

Desk End Cupboards Double Door Storage UnitsCode Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

ZSU70825DD 800 x 727 x 500 339

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

ZSU710DD 926 x 720 x 500 339

ZSU1610DD 926 x 1600 x 500 523

ZSU2010DD 926 x 2000 x 500 603

Supplied empty ready to take internal fitments

TTesting

These Storage Units have been tested for contract use to BS4875: Part 7 & 8 to certify

strength and durability.

104-105 Wooden Cupboards (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 16:20

Page 107: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

105

104-105 Wooden Cupboards (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 16:20

Page 108: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Steel Tambours desking, storage and screens

The tambour cupboard represents great value and flexibility for office storage. Tambour doors open into the steel carcass saving on valuable office space. These tambour cupboards are supplied empty ready to accept internal fitments.

5year

guarantee

106 Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Medium

Slotted Shelf

Low

Roll-out Suspension Filing Frame

Code Finish £

IME191SOTO/S Oak/Silver 702

IME191SOTB/S Beech/Silver 702

IME191SOTG/G Goose Grey 584

Code Description £

BBSP1 Grey as standard 37

Allow 25mm for the shelf plus clearance

height for items to be stored on the shelf.

Dimensions (mm)

W1000 H1968 D470 W1000 H1651 D470 W1000 H1016 D470

Code Finish £

IME161SOTO/S Oak/Silver 665

IME161SOTB/S Beech/Silver 665

IME161SOTG/G Goose Grey 552

Code Description £

BSSPDP1 Slotted shelf 53

SHDV85P5PS Pack of 5 dividers 57

Allow 175mm for shelf and dividers plus

clearance for the items to be stored.

Code Finish £

IME101SOTO/S Oak/Silver 571

IME101SOTB/S Beech/Silver 571

IME101SOTG/G Goose Grey 451

Code Description £

ROSFF Single pack 138

Allow 258mm when used with standard

suspension files. Safety Note: Will only fit in

lower half of storage unit.

High

Standard Shelf

Stock Colours

Oak & Silver

Beech & Silver

Goose Grey

B/S

G/G

O/S

Lateral Filing Rail - Allow 285mm

Code Description £

ROSH Single pack 120

Code Description £

BUR Adjustment lateral file 48

Roll-out Shelf - Allow 60mm for shelf

106-107 Steel and Wooden Tambours (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 16:26

Page 109: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Wooden Tamboursdesking, storage and screens

High quality storage tambour cupboards offering space saving and security features. Fully lockable. Select your fitments below.

5year

guarantee

107Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Lateral Filing CradlePull-out Filing FrameCode £

SUS10 38

Code £

ZSULCR10 60

Code £

ZSULFS10 133

Shelves

Fully lockableSupplied empty

Beech

BCH

720mm High Wooden Tambour Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

SU2010SOT 1050 x 2000 x 500 941

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

SU710SOT 1050 x 720 x 500 495

2000mm High Wooden Tambour

TitanSee our education section from page 272.

Wooden Tambours Stock Colour

Note: Storage fitments will not be installed into any units on delivery but will be left on site with instructions for self assembly.

106-107 Steel and Wooden Tambours (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 16:26

Page 110: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Filing Cabinets desking, storage and screens

Simple clean lines for a professional quality finish. Fitted with locks and stylish silver handles.Choose from filing cabinets to side filers to meet any office filing requirement.

5year

guarantee

108 Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Oak

Stock Finishes

Beech

OAK

2 Drawer Filing Cabinet 3 Drawer Filing CabinetCode £

SUSF2 566

Dimensions (mm)

W975 H727 D600 W490 H720 D640 W490 H1066 D640

Code £

SUFC2 408

Code £

SUFC3 488

2 Drawer Side Filer

Standard FeaturesSilver Handles Fully lockable Metal Roller Runners

Note: Filing Cabinets are for hanging files only. They are not designed for bulk storage.

Code £

SUFC4 676

Dimensions (mm)

W490 H1421 D640

4 Drawer Filing Cabinet

TTesting

These filing cabinets have been tested for contract use to BS4875: Part 7 & 8 to certify

strength and durability.

BCH

Fully lockable

Durable & stylish

108-109 Filing Cabinets - Bookcases (15) .indd 1 26/11/2014 16:49

Page 111: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Bookcasesdesking, storage and screens

These smart and affordable open fronted bookcases come complete with solid wood back panels, and fully height adjustable shelving.

5year

guarantee

109Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Oak

Colours

Beech

OAK

800mm High with one shelfDesk High with one shelfCode £

ZIMBC1400 210

W800 H1400 D310W800 H800 D310

Dimensions (mm)

W800 H727 D310

Code £

ZIMBC800 195

Code £

ZIMBC728 188

1400mm High with two shelves

TTestingThese filing cabinets have been tested for contract use to BS4875: Part 7 & 8 to certify strength and durability.

BCH

See our seating range

from page 10

MySee our seating section from page 10.

1600mm High with three shelvesCode £

ZIMBC1800 240

W800 H1800 D310

Dimensions (mm)

W800 H1600 D310

Code £

ZIMBC1600 221

1800mm High with four shelves

108-109 Filing Cabinets - Bookcases (15) .indd 2 26/11/2014 16:49

Page 112: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Universal Accessories and Cable Management

desking, storage and screens

5year

guarantee

110 Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Keep neat, tidy

& safe

Wipe-in Cable Tray

Vertical Cable Spine

Code Description £

ZJTBCPUSL Standard 102

JTBCPUSL Jetstream only 74

CPU holder fixes to underside of desk.

Code £

DTK-2PINF/1S 65

2 power, Ind Fused, Neon switch

DTK-2PINF/1S/2D 92

2 power, Ind Fused, Neon switch, 2 data

DTK-3PINF/1S 74

3 power, Ind Fused, Neon switch.

Prices include leads and fixings. Shown are our most popular items. Other configurations are available.

Note: For items on this page a minimum order quantity may apply. Please check with our sales office.

Code Length (mm) £

822.22.310 1500 35

Black plastic cable trunking with soft top that

allows cables to be “wiped-in” and easily

removed without the need for tools.

Can be cut to the desired length.

Code £

ROSP-GR Grey 32

ROSP-BL Black 32

ROSP-OP Opaque 32

Unique rotating desk fixing.

Attractive oval shape spine segments.

Large weighted base for extra stability.

Available in grey, black & opaque white.

CPU Holder

Desk Top Power Modules

Code Length (mm) £

VICMB08 600 34

VICMB10 800 35

VICMB12 1000 38

VICMB14 1200 41

VICMB16 1400 45

VICMB18 1600 49

A sturdy steel mesh basket ensures cables are

neat, safe and visible. Can be cut to

required length.

Code Length (mm) £

CL1M-B 1000 10

CL2M-B 2000 12

Basket Style Cable Tray

Connector Leads

Under Desk Power ModulesCode Sockets £

PMK303-E 3 26

PMK405-E 4 33

Code Length (m) £

ML3M-B 3 15

Mains Leads

DTK-2PINF/1S

DTK-3PINF/1S

DTK-2PINF/1S/2D

These accessories enable you to create a tidy and clean workplace environment.

110-111 Accessories (15).indd 1 04/12/2014 11:13

Page 113: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Monitor Armsdesking, storage and screens

5year

guarantee

111Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Tool Rail Mounted Monitor Arm

Tool Rail Mounted Monitor Gas Arm

Desk Mounted Moniter Arm - For One Screen

Desk Mounted Monitor Gas Arm

Code Colour £

TRFSA-S Silver 154

TRFSA-W White 154

Has all the features of more expensive arms. Suits a wide range of tool

rails. Weight capacity 20kg (subject to tool rail capacity). Easy height

adjustment. Can be adjusted to above and below the mounting point.

Code Colour £

TRGA-SR Silver 284

TRGA-WH White 294

75 & 100mm quick release Vesa plates included. Excellent cable

management. Suites perfectly with Aero flip and Konnective products.

Weight capacity 3 to 8KG (subject to tool rail capacity).

Code Colour £

HAFSA-SR Silver 137

HAFSA-WH White 152

Supplied with both through desk & edge clamp fittings as standard.

Universal 75 & 100mm Vesa plates included. Cable management

clips. Can be adjusted to any height via the quick release clamp.

Code £

FFGA-SR Silver 314

FFGA-WH White 323

75 & 100mm quick release Vesa plates included. Excellent cable

management (concealed on lower arm). Supplied with both through

desk & edge clamp fittings as standard. Suites perfectly with Aero flip

and Konnective products. Weight capacity 3 to 8KG.

See our

screens section from page 98-101.

110-111 Accessories (15).indd 2 04/12/2014 11:13

Page 114: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Norton desking, storage and screens

Attractive clean style with economy in mind. Norton desking offers 25mm silver square frame legs and is available in beech or oak finish with 18mm tops and lockable drawers.

Norton MFC Colours

Beech Oak

O/SB/S5year

guarantee

112 Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Single Pedestal Desk Single Pedestal DeskCodes Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

DP72 1800 x 720 x 750 387

DP60 1500 x 720 x 750 336

Complete with 2 pedestals,

1 x 3 drawer, 1 x 1 drawer & 1 filing drawer.

Codes Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

SP72 1800 x 720 x 750 305

SP60 1500 x 720 x 750 258

SP48 1200 x 720 x 750 222

Complete with 3 drawer pedestal.

Codes Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

SPF72 1800 x 720 x 750 305

SPF60 1500 x 720 x 750 258

SPF48 1200 x 720 x 750 222

Complete with 1 drawer & 1 filing drawer

pedestal.

Double Pedestal Desk

Delivery &installation

included

112-113 Norton (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 17:04

Page 115: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Nortondesking, storage and screens

113Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Desk High Secretarial ReturnDesk High Secretarial ReturnCodes W x H x D (mm) £

SRT RH Right Hand 1025 x 720 x 550 259

SRT LH Left Hand 1025 x 720 x 550 259

Complete with tambour pedestal

Codes W x H x D (mm) £

SR RH Right Hand 1025 x 720 x 550 259

SR LH Left Hand 1025 x 720 x 550 259

Complete with 3 drawer pedestal

Reference Table

Code W x H x D (mm) £

TEL 750 x 720 x 400 153

Complete with undershelf.

Telephone Table

Available to accommodate paper size

A0 (841mm x 1189mm) & A1 (594mm x 841mm)

Codes W x H x D (mm) £

REF A0 1340 x 830 x 960 182

REF A1 992 x 830 x 707 160

Sturdy,traditional &

practicalStorageFor complimentary storage see pages 152-153.

112-113 Norton (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 17:04

Page 116: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Key Features• Modular system desking• Optional cable management• Extensive selection of shapes and sizes• Complementary range of screens and accessories• Designed for use with mobile or desk height pedestals• Stylish angular leg frame using 40mm square tube for strength and stability

Code W x H x D (mm) £

EDD12-6 1200 x 727 x 800/600 290

EDD14-6 1400 x 727 x 800/600 303

EDD16-6 1600 x 727 x 800/600 314

EDD18-6 1800 x 727 x 800/600 325

Dune Wave Desks - 600mm Deep

Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Eclipse desking, storage and screens

114

Rectangular Desk - 600mm Deep Dune Wave Desks - 800mm Deep

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ED08-8 800 x 727 x 800 244

ED10-8 1000 x 727 x 800 261

ED12-8 1200 x 727 x 800 275

ED14-8 1400 x 727 x 800 288

ED16-8 1600 x 727 x 800 299

ED18-8 1800 x 727 x 800 309

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ED8-6 800 x 727 x 600 230

ED10-6 1000 x 727 x 600 247

ED12-6 1200 x 727 x 600 261

ED14-6 1400 x 727 x 600 274

ED16-6 1600 x 727 x 600 285

ED18-6 1800 x 727 x 600 295

Code W x H x D (mm) £

EDD12-8 1200 x 727 x 1000/800 304

EDD14-8 1400 x 727 x 1000/800 318

EDD16-8 1600 x 727 x 1000/800 328

EDD18-8 1800 x 727 x 1000/800 339

Rectangular Desk - 800mm Deep

24 colour options

Eclipse desking is an elegant and stylish post legged modular system providing the solution for individual desks or an entire office space. Designed with flexibility to allow cable management.

10year

guarantee

Top Colours Frame/Trim Colours

Apple White WhiteGreyAutumn Cherry

PearBeech Walnut SilverLight OakEnglish Oak Maple Ash Verade Oak

RH illustrated (LH also available)

RH illustrated (LH also available)

114-115 Eclipse (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 17:24

Page 117: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

RH illustrated (LH also available)

Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Eclipsedesking, storage and screens

115

Scalloped Wave Desk - 600mm DeepScalloped Wave Desk - 800mm Deep

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ECS3W10-6 1000x727x1000x600x600 445

ECS3W12-6 1200x727x1200x600x600 492

ECS3W12-8 1200x727x1200x800x800 492

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ESD14-6 1400 x 727 x 600/500 298

ESD16-6 1600 x 727 x 600/500 307

ESD18-6 1800 x 727 x 600/500 316

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ESD14-8 1400 x 727 x 800/700 310

ESD16-8 1600 x 727 x 800/700 321

ESD18-8 1800 x 727 x 800/700 330

120° Cluster Workstation

Cockpit Workstation - A TypeContact Cockpit WorkstationCode W x H x D (mm) £

ECWS16F 1600x727x1600x800x800 520

ECWS18F 1800x727x1600x800x800 577

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ECWS14A 1400x727x1200x800x600 391

ECWS16A 1600x727x1200x800x600 409

ECWS18A 1800x727x1200x800x600 439

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ECCWS19 1900x727x1300x800x600 521

Cockpit Workstation - F Type

RH illustrated (LH also available) RH illustrated (LH also available)

Frames andtrim available

in white or silver

New for 2015

114-115 Eclipse (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 17:24

Page 118: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

116

25mmworktops

Eclipse desking, storage and screens

Pedestal Supported Rectangular Desk - 800mm Deep Pedestal Supported Rectangular Desk - 600mm Deep

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ED12-6PS 1200 x 727 x 600 443

ED14-6PS 1400 x 727 x 600 456

ED16-6PS 1600 x 727 x 600 470

ED18-6PS 1800 x 727 x 600 483

Price includes pedestal with 2, 3 or 4 drawers.

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ED12-8PS 1200 x 727 x 800 457

ED14-8PS 1400 x 727 x 800 471

ED16-8PS 1600 x 727 x 800 485

ED18-8PS 1800 x 727 x 800 498

Price includes pedestal with 2, 3 or 4 drawers.

RH illustrated (RH also available)

RH illustrated (RH also available)

Pedestal Supported Cockpit Workstation - H Type Pedestal Supported Contact Desk - 600mm Deep

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ECD16-6PS 1600 x 727 x 1000/600 525

ECD18-6PS 1800 x 727 x 1000/600 538

Price includes pedestal with 2, 3 or 4 drawers.

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ECWS16C-PS 1600 x 727x 1600 x 600 x 600 715

ECWS18C-PS 1800 x 727x 1600 x 600 x 600 776

Price includes pedestal with 2, 3 or 4 drawers.

LH illustrated (RH also available)RH illustrated

(LH also available)

Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

10year

guarantee

Top Colours

Frame/Trim Colours

Apple

White

White

Grey

Autumn Cherry

Pear

Beech

Walnut

Silver

Light Oak

English Oak

Maple

Ash

Verade Oak

116-117 Eclipse (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 17:28

Page 119: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

000117

116-117 Eclipse (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 17:28

Page 120: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

10year

guarantee

Top Colours

Frame/Trim Colours

Apple

White

White

Grey

Autumn Cherry

Pear

Beech

Walnut

Silver

Light Oak

English Oak

Maple

Ash

Verade Oak

000

Eclipse desking, storage and screens

118

D-Ended Conference Extension Pedestal Extension Tops - Wave

Code Dia x H (mm) £

ECE-B12 1200 x 727 360

Connects to end of any 800mm deep workstation.

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ECE-D120 1200 x 727 x 450 255

ECE-D121 1210 x 727 x 450 255

ECE-D123 1230 x 727 x 450 255

Connects to end of two 600mm deep workstations.

Code W x D (mm) £

EPETW08-6 800 x 800/600 151

EPETW10-6 1000 x 800/600 157

Pedestals are not included in the above price.

Bulb Conference Extension

D-Ended Conference Extension Pedestal Extension Tops - Rectangular

Code Dia x H (mm) £

ECE-T12 1200 x 727 387

Connects to end of any 800mm deep workstation.

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ECE-D160 1600 x 727 x 450 279

ECE-D161 1610 x 727 x 450 279

ECE-D163 1630 x 727 x 450 279

Connects to end of two 800mm deep workstations.

Code W x D (mm) £

EPET08-6 800 x 600 133

EPET10-6 1000 x 600 136

EPET08-8 800 x 800 133

EPET10-8 1000 x 800 140

Rectangular pedestal extension tops are unhanded.

Pedestals are not included in the above price.

Teardrop Conference Extension

New for 2015

RH illustrated (LH also available)

1600 Deep

1200 Deep

Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

118-119 Eclipse (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 17:31

Page 121: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Cable TraysCode Size (mm) £

UCAB08 800 48

UCAB10 1000 51

UCAB12 1200 53

UCAB14 1400 56

UCAB16 1600 59

UCAB18 1800 62

Cable RiserCode £

UMCR Affixes to rear leg of all Eclipse desks. 25

119

Eclipsedesking, storage and screens

Cable trays fit all corresponding size of desk & workstations.

For example: UCAB08 would fit a ED08-8 desk.

When ordering cable trays for pedestal supported

desks & workstations please order the next size down

For example: UCAB16 would fit a ED18-6PS desk.

118-119 Eclipse (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 17:31

Page 122: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Optima Plus has been designed with emphasis on wire management solutions. The design enables the swift and effective installation of desk top hardware via discreet apertures in the modesty panels and removable rises within the leg upright.

Double Wave WorkstationLeft Hand

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

OPCB18LH 1800x725x1300 788 1101

Right Hand

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

OPCB18RH 1800x725x1300 788 1101

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

OPDW16/9 1600 x 725 x 900 502 700

OPDW18/9 1800 x 725 x 900 521 721

Bow Fronted Crescent Workstation

Optima Plus desking, storage and screens

120

Core Workstation Single Wave WorkstationCode W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

OPR10 1000x725x800 367 516

OPR12 1200x725x800 382 532

OPR14 1400x725x800 394 551

OPR16 1600x725x800 406 570

OPR18 1800x725x800 422 591

Left Hand

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

OPC14LH 1400x725 x 1200 581 811

OPC16LH 1600x725 x 1200 600 840

OPC18LH 1800x725 x 1200 626 876

Right Hand

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

OPC14RH 1400x725x1200 581 811

OPC16RH 1600x725x1200 600 840

OPC18RH 1800x725x1200 626 876

Left Hand

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

OPW12LH 1200x725x800-1000 453 633

OPW14LH 1400x725x800-1000 474 662

OPW16LH 1600x725x800-1000 491 683

OPW18LH 1800x725x800-1000 507 708

Right Hand

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

OPW12RH 1200x725x800-1000 453 633

OPW14RH 1400x725x800-1000 474 662

OPW16RH 1600x725x800-1000 491 683

OPW18RH 1800x725x800-1000 507 708

Right hand shown

Right hand shown

Right hand shown

Rectangular Workstation

Veneer ColoursMFC Colours

Ash Oak

A/SV

Silver

S/S O/SV

White

WH/S

Wenge

WE/S

Oak

O/S

Autmn Cherry

C/S

Walnut

W/S

Beech

B/S

Ash

A/S5year

guarantee

Cablemanagementincluded in

leg

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days for MFC, 25 working days for Veneer and fully assembled.Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

New for 2015

For matchingstorage

see pages 152-153

Note: Silver frames as standard. White and black frames are available, ask sales for more details.

120-121 Optima Plus Fixed Height (15).indd 1 27/11/2014 09:48

Page 123: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

121

120-121 Optima Plus Fixed Height (15).indd 2 27/11/2014 09:48

Page 124: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Optima Plus has been designed with emphasis on wire management solutions. The design enables the swift and effective installation of desk top hardware via discreet apertures in the modesty panels and removable rises within the leg upright.

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

OPSC18A 1800 x 725 x 1800 788 1101

OPSC18B 1800 x 725 x 1800 788 1101

OPSC16A 1600 x 725 x 1600 741 1035

OPSC16B 1600 x 725 x 1600 741 1035

Symmetrical Crescent Workstation

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days for MFC, 25 working days for Veneer and fully assembled. Packaging

removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Optima Plus desking, storage and screens

122

Radius Executive Desk D-Ended DeskCode W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

OPRC19RH 1900 x 725 x 1200 788 1101

OPRC19LH 1900 x 725 x 1200 788 1101

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

OPRE19RH 1900 x 725 x 1000 585 818

OPRE19LH 1900 x 725 x 1000 585 818

Left Hand

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

OPR22DLH 2200 x 725 x 800 623 869

OPR20DLH 2000 x 725 x 800 608 853

Right Hand

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

OPR22DRH 2200 x 725 x 800 623 869

OPR20DRH 2000 x 725 x 800 608 853

Right hand shown

Right hand shown

Right hand shown

Radius Crescent Workstation

Veneer ColoursMFC Colours

MFC Colours

Walnut

BeechAsh

Wenge

Oak Autmn Cherry

Ash

Silver

OakWhite

A/SV

S/S

O/SVWH/S WE/S

O/S C/S

W/S

B/SA/S

5year

guarantee

The grain is as illustrated with arrows

B A

New for 2015

Note: Silver frames as standard. White and black frames are available, ask sales for more details.

Delivery &installation

included

For matchingstorage see pages

152-153

122-123 Optima Plus (15).indd 1 27/11/2014 17:57

Page 125: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Optima Plusdesking, storage and screens

123

120O Workstation Meeting ExtensionMeeting ExtensionCode W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

OPDWSCMT18 1800x725x800 594 836

Complete with support leg.

Suitable for Double Wave Desking.

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

OPSCMT120 1600x725x660 511 716

Complete with support leg.

Suitable for 120O Desking.

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

OPSCMT8 800x725x600 458 643

OPSCMT12 1200x725x600 492 686

OPSCMT16 1600x725x660 511 716

Complete with support leg.

Meeting Extension

Double D-Ended Conference TableDouble D-Ended Conference TableCode W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

OPCONF2 3400x725x1200 1480 2218

Supplied in 2 x 1700mm sections

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

OPCONF1A 2000x725x1200 740 1108

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

OPCONF1CA 2000x725x1200 740 1108

OPCONF1CB 2400x725x1200 886 1331

Seating up to 8 people

Seating up to 8 people

Seating up to 10 people

Double D-Ended Conference Table

122-123 Optima Plus (15).indd 2 27/11/2014 17:57

Page 126: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Optima Plus Height Adjustable

124

5year

guarantee

Optima Plus Height Adjustable is well suited to most applications.The desk can be heightened using a push in - pull out rotating handle, ideal for wheelchair users.

Rectangular WorkstationBow Fronted Rectangular WorkstationCode W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

800mm Ends

OPR8 HA 800 x 650 - 850 x 800 745 892

OPR10 HA 1000 x 650 - 850 x 800 780 943

OPR12 HA 1200 x 650 - 850 x 800 795 968

OPR14 HA 1400 x 650 - 850 x 800 813 985

OPR16 HA 1600 x 650 - 850 x 800 823 1005

OPR18 HA 1800 x 650 - 850 x 800 844 1029

600mm Ends

OPR8/6 HA 800 x 650 - 850 x 600 742 884

OPR10/6 HA 1000 x 650 - 850 x 600 772 931

OPR12/6 HA 1200 x 650 - 850 x 600 788 953

OPR14/6 HA 1400 x 650 - 850 x 600 800 972

OPR16/6 HA 1600 x 650 - 850 x 600 814 990

OPR18/6 HA 1800 x 650 - 850 x 600 823 1005

Note: Silver frames as standard. White and black frames are available, ask sales for more details.

Crankhandle

adjustment

Code W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

OPRB16 HA 1600 x 650 - 850 x 900 1006 1259

OPRB18 HA 1800 x 650 - 850 x 900 1026 1286

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days for MFC, 25 working days for Veneer and fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Veneer Colours

MFC Colours

Walnut

BeechAsh

Wenge

Oak

Autmn Cherry

Ash

Silver

Oak

White

A/SV

S/S

O/SV

WH/S WE/S

O/S

C/S W/S

B/SA/S

Delivery &installation

included

desking, storage and screens

124-125 Optima Plus Height Adjustable (15).indd 1 27/11/2014 12:10

Page 127: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Optima Plus Height Adjustable

125

Crescent Workstation - Left & Right HandSingle Wave Workstation - Left & Right Hand

Code W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

OPC14 LH HA 1400x650-850x1200 1136 1391

OPC16 LH HA 1600x650-850x1200 1154 1423

OPC18 LH HA 1800x650-850x1200 1183 1464

OPC14 RH HA 1400x650-850x1200 1136 1391

OPC16 RH HA 1600x650-850x1200 1154 1423

OPC18 RH HA 1800x650-850x1200 1183 1464

Code W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

1000mm - 800mm Table Depth

OPW12 LH HA 1200x650-850x1000-800 876 1192

OPW14 LH HA 1400x650-850x1000-800 898 1225

OPW16 LH HA 1600x650-850x1000-800 918 1248

OPW18 LH HA 1800x650-850x1000-800 937 1276

OPW12 RH HA 1200x650-850x1000-800 876 1192

OPW14 RH HA 1400x650-850x1000-800 898 1225

OPW16 RH HA 1600x650-850x1000-800 918 1248

OPW18 RH HA 1800x650-850x1000-800 937 1276

800mm - 600mm Table Depth

OPW12/6 LH HA 1200x650-850x800-600 852 1158

OPW14/6 LH HA 1400x650-850x800-600 873 1190

OPW16/6 LH HA 1600x650-850x800-600 892 1212

OPW18/6 LH HA 1800x650-850x800-600 910 1238

OPW12/6 RH HA 1200x650-850x800-600 852 1158

OPW14/6 RH HA 1400x650-850x800-600 873 1190

OPW16/6 RH HA 1600x650-850x800-600 892 1212

OPW18/6 RH HA 1800x650-850x800-600 910 1238

Bow Fronted Crescent Workstation - Left & Right Hand

Code W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

OPCB18 LH HA 1800x650-850x1300 1365 1716

OPCB18 RH HA 1800x650-850x1300 1365 1716

Right hand illustrated

Right hand illustrated

Right hand illustrated

desking, storage and screens

124-125 Optima Plus Height Adjustable (15).indd 2 27/11/2014 12:10

Page 128: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

A unique wire management system. Cable risers within the leg frames together with horizontal cable ducts along the beams, facilitates discreet management of all wires and cables, any excess can be neatly hidden within the large cable ducts. Power and data modules can easily be mounted at any position along the cable beams.

Double Wave WorkstationLeft Hand

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

KCB18LH 1800 x 725 x 1300 882 1233

Right Hand

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

KCB18RH 1800 x 725 x 1300 882 1233

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

KDW16/9 1600 x 725 x 900 577 795

KDW18/9 1800 x 725 x 900 598 822

Bow Fronted Crescent Workstation

Kassini desking, storage and screens

126

Core Workstation Single Wave WorkstationCode W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

KR10 1000 x 725 x 800 410 574

KR12 1200 x 725 x 800 427 599

KR14 1400 x 725 x 800 444 617

KR16 1600 x 725 x 800 454 636

KR18 1800 x 725 x 800 474 660

Left Hand

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

KC14LH 1400 x 725 x 1200 653 908

KC16LH 1600 x 725 x 1200 672 940

KC18LH 1800 x 725 x 1200 701 981

Right Hand

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

KC14RH 1400 x 725 x 1200 653 908

KC16RH 1600 x 725 x 1200 672 940

KC18RH 1800 x 725 x 1200 701 981

Left Hand

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

KW12LH 1200 x 725 x 800-1000 508 709

KW14LH 1400 x 725 x 800-1000 529 742

KW16LH 1600 x 725 x 800-1000 549 766

KW18LH 1800 x 725 x 800-1000 569 793

Right Hand

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

KW12RH 1200 x 725 x 800-1000 508 709

KW14RH 1400 x 725 x 800-1000 529 742

KW16RH 1600 x 725 x 800-1000 549 766

KW18RH 1800 x 725 x 800-1000 569 793

Right hand shown

Right hand shown

Right hand shown

Rectangular Workstation

For matchingstorage see pages

152-153

25mmworktops

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days for MFC, 25 working days for Veneer and fully assembled.Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Note: Silver frames as standard. White and black frames are available, ask sales for more details.

Veneer ColoursMFC Colours

Ash Oak

A/SV

Silver

S/S O/SV

White

WH/S

Wenge

WE/S

Oak

O/S

Autmn Cherry

C/S

Walnut

W/S

Beech

B/S

Ash

A/S5year

guarantee

Delivery &installation

included

126-127 Kassini (15).indd 1 27/11/2014 12:24

Page 129: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

127

126-127 Kassini (15).indd 2 27/11/2014 12:24

Page 130: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

The radius executive desks provide style and individuality and our radius crescent workstations are the executive solution providing a generous surface area. Symmetrical desks offer the user additional work space with ergonomic benefits.

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

KSC18A 1800 x 725 x 1800 927 1298

KSC18B 1800 x 725 x 1800 927 1298

KSC16A 1600 x 725 x 1600 869 1217

KSC16B 1600 x 725 x 1600 869 1217

Symmetrical Crescent Workstation

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days for MFC, 25 working days for Veneer and fully assembled. Packaging

removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Kassini desking, storage and screens

128

Radius Executive Desk Radius Crescent WorkstationCode W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

KRC19RH 1900 x 725 x 1200 882 1233

KRC19LH 1900 x 725 x 1200 882 1233

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

KRE19RH 1900 x 725 x 1000 657 917

KRE19LH 1900 x 725 x 1000 657 917

Left Hand

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

KR22DLH 2200 x 725 x 800 695 974

KR20DLH 2000 x 725 x 800 683 957

Right Hand

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

KR22DRH 2200 x 725 x 800 695 974

KR20DRH 2000 x 725 x 800 683 957

Right hand shown

Right hand shown

Right hand shown

Radius Crescent Workstation

Veneer ColoursMFC Colours

MFC Colours

Walnut

BeechAsh

Wenge

Oak Autmn Cherry

Ash

Silver

OakWhite

A/SV

S/S

O/SVWH/S WE/S

O/S C/S

W/S

B/SA/S

5year

guarantee

The grain is as illustrated with arrows

B A

Note: Silver frames as standard. White and black frames are available, ask sales for more details.

For matchingstorage

see pages 152-153

128-129 Kassini (15).indd 1 27/11/2014 13:19

Page 131: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

KBST24 2400x725x1200 1110 1535

Barrel Shaped Conference Table

Kassinidesking, storage and screens

129

120O Workstation Meeting ExtensionMeeting ExtensionCode W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

KDWSCMT18 1800x725x800 604 848

Complete with support leg.

Suitable for Double Wave Desking.

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

KSCMT120 1600x725x660 511 716

Complete with support leg.

Suitable for 120O Desking.

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

KSCMT8 800x725x600 458 641

KSCMT12 1200x725x600 492 686

KSCMT16 1600x725x660 511 716

Complete with support leg.

Meeting Extension

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

KOVT24 2400x725x1200 1110 1535

Oval Conference Table

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

KCONF1A 2000x725x1200 982 1365

KCONF1B 2400x725x1200 1108 1535

KCONF2 3400x725x1200 1836 2603

KCONF3 4800x725x1200 2461 3543

Double ‘D’ Ended Conference Table

This barrel shaped meeting/conference table is supported by four stylish 90 degree support legs.This table caters for up to eight persons comfortably.

Delivery &installation

included

128-129 Kassini (15).indd 2 27/11/2014 13:19

Page 132: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Kassini Height Adjustable

130

5year

guarantee

Kassini height adjustable desking offers a stylish yet functional workstation complying with DDA regulations. The manual crank handle allows for desk height adjustments of between 650mm to 850mm.

Bow Fronted Rectangular DeskRectangular DeskCode W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

KRB16 HA 1600 x 650 - 850 x 900 1006 1259

KRB18 HA 1800 x 650 - 850 x 900 1026 1286

Crank handleadjustment

800mm Ends

Code W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

KR8 HA 800 x 650 - 850 x 800 745 892

KR10 HA 1000 x 650 - 850 x 800 780 943

KR12 HA 1200 x 650 - 850 x 800 795 968

KR14 HA 1400 x 650 - 850 x 800 813 985

KR16 HA 1600 x 650 - 850 x 800 823 1005

KR18 HA 1800 x 650 - 850 x 800 844 1029

600mm Ends

KR8/6 HA 800 x 650 - 850 x 600 742 884

KR10/6 HA 1000 x 650 - 850 x 600 772 931

KR12/6 HA 1200 x 650 - 850 x 600 788 953

KR14/6 HA 1400 x 650 - 850 x 600 800 972

KR16/6 HA 1600 x 650 - 850 x 600 814 990

KR18/6 HA 1800 x 650 - 850 x 600 823 1005

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days for MFC, 25 working days for Veneer and fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Veneer ColoursMFC Colours

MFC Colours

Walnut Wenge

Autmn Cherry

Ash OakWhite

A/SV

Silver

S/S

O/SVWH/S WE/S

Oak

O/S C/S

W/S

Beech

B/S

Ash

A/S

desking, storage and screens

Note: Silver frames as standard. White and black frames are available, ask sales for more details.

130-131 Kassini Height Adjustable (15).indd 1 27/11/2014 13:59

Page 133: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Kassini Height Adjustable

131

Crescent Workstation - Left & Right HandSingle Wave Desk - Left & Right Hand

Code W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

Left Hand

KC14 LH HA 1400x650-850x1200 1136 1391

KC16 LH HA 1600x650-850x1200 1154 1423

KC18 LH HA 1800x650-850x1200 1183 1464

Right Hand

KC14 RH HA 1400x650-850x1200 1136 1391

KC16 RH HA 1600x650-850x1200 1154 1423

KC18 RH HA 1800x650-850x1200 1183 1464

Code W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

1000mm - 800mm Table Depth

Left Hand

KW12 LH HA 1200x650-850x1000-800 876 1192

KW14 LH HA 1400x650-850x1000-800 898 1225

KW16 LH HA 1600x650-850x1000-800 918 1249

KW18 LH HA 1800x650-850x1000-800 937 1276

Right Hand

KW12 RH HA 1200x650-850x1000-800 876 1192

KW14 RH HA 1400x650-850x1000-800 898 1225

KW16 RH HA 1600x650-850x1000-800 918 1249

KW18 RH HA 1800x650-850x1000-800 937 1276

800mm - 600mm Table Depth

Left Hand

KW12/6 LH HA 1200x650-850x800-600 852 1158

KW14/6 LH HA 1400x650-850x800-600 873 1190

KW16/6 LH HA 1600x650-850x800-600 892 1212

KW18/6 LH HA 1800x650-850x800-600 910 1238

Right Hand

KW12/6 RH HA 1200x650-850x 800-600 852 1158

KW14/6 RH HA 1400x650-850x800-600 873 1190

KW16/6 RH HA 1600x650-850x800-600 892 1212

KW18/6 RH HA 1800x650-850x800-600 910 1238

Bow Fronted Crescent Workstation - Left & Right Hand

Code W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

KCB18 LH HA 1800x650-850x1300 1365 1716

KCB18 RH HA 1800x650-850x1300 1365 1716

desking, storage and screens

130-131 Kassini Height Adjustable (15).indd 2 27/11/2014 13:59

Page 134: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Elegant cohesive design enables Advance workstations to be configured at a height that suits the user. Workstations can easily be reset to different heights within minutes via simple adjustment of each telescopic leg to the preferred height. Clear markings on each leg denote dimensions to ensure adjustments are simple and accurate.

desking, storage and screensAdvance

132

Heightsettable desking

Height AdjustmentEach telescopic fully adjustable leg offers height variations of between 650mm and 850mm. The height can be adjusted using an Allen key by simply loosening the fixing bolt positioned on the inside of the vertical leg upright. The leg can be set / positioned with the aid of clear height markings on the leg frame.

Advance Steel StructureThe Advance frame consists of two end legs and two cross rails. Optional Modesty panels and cable trays can be added. (Please note, cable trays can be installed retrospectively).

AssemblyA combination of unique engineering and design ensures that the assembly of Advance is made simple to reduce installation times. This maintains the clean lines, strength and stability of the workstation.

132-133 Advance (15).indd 1 27/11/2014 14:38

Page 135: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

133

Delivery &installation

included

132-133 Advance (15).indd 2 27/11/2014 14:38

Page 136: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Can be configured as singular desking or in modules of 3, 6, 9, etc

Right hand shown

Advance workstations provide a contemporary look and offer flexibility for single desks or multiple users working as a team. Optional modesty panels and cable management are compatible with all Advance workstations. The workstation offers the user height adjustment from 650mm - 850mm.

Advance desking, storage and screens

134

Rectangular Workstation - 800mm and 600mm Deep Angular WorkstationCode W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

AR10/8 1000 x 650 - 850 x 800 461 670

AR12/8 1200 x 650 - 850 x 800 472 683

AR14/8 1400 x 650 - 850 x 800 480 699

AR16/8 1600 x 650 - 850 x 800 492 711

AR18/8 1800 x 650 - 850 x 800 500 726

AR20/8 2000 x 650 - 850 x 800 509 738

AR10/6 1000 x 650 - 850 x 600 460 668

AR12/6 1200 x 650 - 850 x 600 470 679

AR14/6 1400 x 650 - 850 x 600 476 690

AR16/6 -1600 x 650 - 850 x 600 485 705

AR18/6 1800 x 650 - 850 x 600 494 716

AR20/6 2000 x 650 - 850 x 600 501 727

Code Description W x H x D (mm) £

MA3 For use with 1.2m 120° Desks 800x110x100 38

MA2 For use with 1m 120° Desks 600x110x100 35

Up to 2 trays per desk can be specified, however this is not always

necessary when using desks in clusters.

Code W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

A14/10/8LH 1400 x 650 - 850 x 1000 - 800 523 760

A14/10/8RH 1400 x 650 - 850 x 1000 - 800 523 760

A16/10/8LH 1600 x 650 - 850 x 1000 - 800 532 771

A16/10/8RH 1600 x 650 - 850 x 1000 - 800 532 771

A18/10/8LH 1800 x 650 - 850 x 1000 - 800 544 788

A18/10/8RH 1800 x 650 - 850 x 1000 - 800 544 788

A20/10/8LH 2000 x 650 - 850 x 1000 - 800 551 800

A20/10/8RH 2000 x 650 - 850 x 1000 - 800 551 800

Code W x D x H (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

1200mm x 1200mm x 800mm Ends

AC120 2078 x 850 x 650 - 800 677 981

1000mm x 1000mm x 600mm Ends

AC120/6 1732 x 850 x 650 - 800 636 922

120° Cluster Workstation - 800mm & 600mm Ends

Cable Trays

Code W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

ASR10/6LH 1000 x 650 - 850 x 600 317 457

ASR10/6RH 1000 x 650 - 850 x 600 317 457

ASR12/6LH 1200 x 650 - 850 x 600 332 480

ASR12/6RH 1200 x 650 - 850 x 600 332 480

Only compatible with 600mm & 800mm rectangular workstations.

Secretarial Return - 600mm Deep

Note: Silver frames as standard. White and black frames are available, ask sales for more details.

134-135 Advance (15).indd 1 27/11/2014 14:51

Page 137: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days for MFC, 25 working days for Veneer and fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Advancedesking, storage and screens

135

Modesty PanelsMeeting TableCode W x H (mm) £

ARMP10 760 x 275 112

ARMP12 960 x 275 115

ARMP14 1160 x 275 117

ARMP16 1360 x 275 120

ARMP18 1560 x 275 122

ARMP20 1760 x 275 126

Silver finish as standard, illustrated in red. Suffix /B for Black, suffix /W for White.

Veneer Colours

MFC Colours

Walnut Wenge

Autmn Cherry

Ash Oak

White

A/SV

Silver

S/S

O/SV

WH/S WE/S

Oak

O/S C/S

W/S

Beech

B/S

Ash

A/S

5year

guarantee

Code W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

AMT10/8 1000 x 650 - 850 x 800 461 670

AMT12/8 1200 x 650 - 850 x 800 472 683

AMT14/8 1400 x 650 - 850 x 800 480 695

AMT16/8 1600 x 650 - 850 x 800 492 711

AMT18/8 1800 x 650 - 850 x 800 500 726

AMT20/8 2000 x 650 - 850 x 800 509 738

Cable TraysCode Desk (mm) W x H x D (mm) £

MA2 1000 600 x 110 x 100 35

MA3 1200 800 x 110 x 100 38

MA5 1400 1000 x 110 x 100 41

MA7 1600 1200 x 110 x 100 44

MA9 1800 1400 x 110 x 100 50

MA10 2000 1600 x 110 x 100 55

Cable trays can be accessed from back or front of desk via the easy

slot and hook design. The standard finish is silver, illustrated in red.

Cable Risers

Standard silver finish (illustrated in red). Single channel cable riser. (2 per pack).

CPU Holders

Fixing kit included. Adjustable CPU holder for PC towers. Includes mounting kit.

Options

Heightsettable desking

134-135 Advance (15).indd 2 27/11/2014 14:51

Page 138: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

‘I’ Frame Electronic Height Adjustabledesking, storage and screens

136

Desks can be adjusted using electronic keypad. 3 settings, memory function and store. Illuminated LED display for height indication.

Wave Electronic Sit & Stand Desk

Rectangular Electronic Sit & Stand Desk

Code W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

Right Hand

OW12 RH EHA 1200 x 630-1310 x 1000-800 1359 1629

OW14 RH EHA 1400 x 630-1310 x 1000-800 1376 1650

OW16 RH EHA 1600 x 630-1310 x 1000-800 1394 1673

OW18 RH EHA 1800 x 630-1310 x 1000-800 1416 1698

Left Hand

OW12 LH EHA 1200 x 630-1310 x 1000-800 1359 1629

OW14 LH EHA 1400 x 630-1310 x 1000-800 1376 1650

OW16 LH EHA 1600 x 630-1310 x 1000-800 1394 1673

OW18 LH EHA 1800 x 630-1310 x 1000-800 1416 1698

Note: Electronic Sit & Stand desks only compatible with MPF & MP3 pedestals which will protrude 140mm.

Electronic keypad

adjustment

Code W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

OR12 EHA 1200 x 630-1310 x 800 1283 1539

OR14 EHA 1400 x 630-1310 x 800 1290 1549

OR16 EHA 1600 x 630-1310 x 800 1298 1557

OR18 EHA 1800 x 630-1310 x 800 1313 1575

Right hand shown

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days for MFC, 25 working days for Veneer and fully assembled.Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Veneer ColoursMFC Colours

Ash Oak

A/SV

Silver

S/S O/SV

White

WH/S

Wenge

WE/S

Oak

O/S

Autmn Cherry

C/S

Walnut

W/S

Beech

B/S

Ash

A/S5year

guarantee

136-137 I Frame Electric (15).indd 1 27/11/2014 15:13

Page 139: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

137

136-137 I Frame Electric (15).indd 2 27/11/2014 15:13

Page 140: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Screenbox desking, storage and screens

Screenbox allows for multi-purpose use of a workstation, integrating monitor, keyboard and mouse into the desktop. This allows for a quick change over from IT based tasks to paper based.The unit also adds to the security of IT equipment in the workplace as the unit is operational using a lock and key facility.

Screenbox in fully closed & locked position Screenbox in the transitional midway position Screenbox in the operational position

Standard FeaturesLocking as standard.

138

Delivery &installation

included

138-139 Screenbox (15).indd 1 27/11/2014 15:17

Page 141: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Kassini Kassini

Modular Modular

MFC Colours

5year

guarantee

Screenbox

139

desking, storage and screens

Kassini Code Modular Code W x H x D Kassini £ Modular £

17” Screen 17” Screen

SBLH17/KR12 SBLH17/TR12 1200x725x800 989 807

SBLH17/KR14 SBLH17/TR14 1400x725x800 1005 829

SBLH17/KR16 SBLH17/TR16 1600x725x800 1016 849

SBLH17/KR18 SBLH17/TR18 1800x725x800 1036 872

19” Screen 19” Screen

SBLH19/KR12 SBLH19/TR12 1200x725x800 1004 823

SBLH19/KR14 SBLH19/TR14 1400x725x800 1021 846

SBLH19/KR16 SBLH19/TR16 1600x725x800 1032 865

SBLH19/KR18 SBLH19/TR18 1800x725x800 1053 887

Kassini Kassini

Modular Modular

Ash

Autumn Cherry

Beech OakSilver

White Walnut Wenge

A/S

C/S

B/S O/SS/S

WH/S W/S WE/S

Single - CentreKassini Code Modular Code W x H x D Kassini £ Modular £

17” Screen 17” Screen

SBC17/KR10 SBC17/TR10 1000x725x800 973 796

SBC17/KR12 SBC17/TR12 1200x725x800 989 807

SBC17/KR14 SBC17/TR14 1400x725x800 1005 829

SBC17/KR16 SBC17/TR16 1600x725x800 1016 849

SBC17/KR18 SBC17/TR18 1800x725x800 1036 872

19” Screen 19” Screen

SBC19/KR10 SBC19/TR10 1000x725x800 989 813

SBC19/KR12 SBC19/TR12 1200x725x800 1004 823

SBC19/KR14 SBC19/TR14 1400x725x800 1021 846

SBC19/KR16 SBC19/TR16 1600x725x800 1032 865

SBC19/KR18 SBC19/TR18 1800x725x800 1053 887

Single - Left

Kassini Code Modular Code W x H x D Kassini £ Modular £

17” Screen 17” Screen

SBRH17/KR12 SBRH17/TR12 1200x725x800 989 807

SBRH17/KR14 SBRH17/TR14 1400x725x800 1005 829

SBRH17/KR16 SBRH17/TR16 1600x725x800 1016 849

SBRH17/KR18 SBRH17/TR18 1800x725x800 1036 872

19” Screen 19” Screen

SBRH19/KR12 SBRH19/TR12 1200x725x800 1004 823

SBRH19/KR14 SBRH19/TR14 1400x725x800 1021 846

SBRH19/KR16 SBRH19/TR16 1600x725x800 1032 865

SBRH19/KR18 SBRH19/TR18 1800x725x800 1053 887

DoubleKassini Code Modular Code W x H x D Kassini £ Modular £

17” Screen 17” Screen

SBD17/KR16 SBD17/TR16 1600x725x800 1735 1404

SBD17/KR18 SBD17/TR18 1800x725x800 1755 1427

19” Screen 19” Screen

SBD19/KR18 SBD19/TR18 1800x725x800 1772 1451

Single - Right

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Note: Silver frames as standard. White and black frames are available, ask sales for more details.

138-139 Screenbox (15).indd 2 27/11/2014 15:17

Page 142: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Rectangular workstations offer a traditional workspace available in several widths and two depth options, 800d & 600d.Meeting Extensions are compatible with Double Bench Workstations. There are two widths available when specifying on Double Benches with screens and without screens. The meeting extension is supported by brackets to ensure maximum strength and stability without the use of a visible support leg. Double Bench workstations offer clean lines and symmetry with the use of vertical leg frame uprights. Double modules share components reducing the number of legs required. This also increases the movement for the user under the workstations via a recessed shared leg frame between adjoining modules. Optional horizontal and vertical wire management is available and a choice of screen panels. Matrix Bench is available in three paint finishes for the desk metalwork and system screen trim, Silver RAL9006 is standard and White RAL9003 & Black RAL9005 are an optional extra.Complimentary conference and meeting tables form part of the portfolio.

140

Matrix Bench desking, storage and screens

MFC Colours

5year

guarantee

Ash

Autumn Cherry

Beech OakSilver

White Walnut Wenge

A/S

C/S

B/S O/SS/S

WH/S W/S WE/S

Delivery &installation

included

140-141 Matrix Bench (15).indd 1 27/11/2014 16:33

Page 143: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled.Certain exceptions see page 2.

Matrix Benchdesking, storage and screens

141

Rectangular Workstation - Shared Leg

Double Bench

Rectangular WorkstationCode W x H x D £

Right Hand

M16/10/8RH 1600 x 725 x 1000-800 447

M18/10/8RH 1800 x 725 x 1000-800 457

Left Hand

M16/10/8LH 1600 x 725 x 1000-800 447

M18/10/8LH 1800 x 725 x 1000-800 457

Code W x H x D £

M10/12/INT 1000 x 725 x 1200 561

M12/12/INT 1200 x 725 x 1200 566

M14/12/INT 1400 x 725 x 1200 573

M16/12/INT 1600 x 725 x 1200 578

M18/12/INT 1800 x 725 x 1200 584

M20/12/INT 2000 x 725 x 1200 601

M10/16/INT 1000 x 725 x 1600 590

M12/16/INT 1200 x 725 x 1600 596

M14/16/INT 1400 x 725 x 1600 601

M16/16/INT 1600 x 725 x 1600 607

M18/16/INT 1800 x 725 x 1600 619

M20/16/INT 2000 x 725 x 1600 630

Code W x H x D £

MR10/8/INT 1000 x 725 x 800 388

MR12/8/INT 1200 x 725 x 800 393

MR14/8/INT 1400 x 725 x 800 399

MR16/8/INT 1600 x 725 x 800 405

MR18/8/INT 1800 x 725 x 800 411

MR20/8/INT 2000 x 725 x 800 416

Code W x H x D £

M10/12 1000 x 725 x 1200 590

M12/12 1200 x 725 x 1200 596

M14/12 1400 x 725 x 1200 601

M16/12 1600 x 725 x 1200 607

M18/12 1800 x 725 x 1200 619

M20/12 2000 x 725 x 1200 630

M10/16 1000 x 725 x 1600 619

M12/16 1200 x 725 x 1600 624

M14/16 1400 x 725 x 1600 630

M16/16 1600 x 725 x 1600 636

M18/16 1800 x 725 x 1600 647

M20/16 2000 x 725 x 1600 659

Code W x H x D £

MR10/8 1000 x 725 x 800 416

MR12/8 1200 x 725 x 800 423

MR14/8 1400 x 725 x 800 428

MR16/8 1600 x 725 x 800 434

MR18/8 1800 x 725 x 800 439

MR20/8 2000 x 725 x 800 446

Angular Workstation

Double Bench - Shared Inset Leg

See colours available on

opposite page

Not including horizontal cable tray.

Not including horizontal cable tray.

StorageFor complimentary storage see pages 150-153.

Note: Silver frames as standard. White and black frames are available, ask sales for more details.

140-141 Matrix Bench (15).indd 2 27/11/2014 16:33

Page 144: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Single channel Cable Riser

Illustrated in red.

Matrix Bench desking, storage and screens

142

MFC Colours

Silver

S/S

White

WH/S

Wenge

WE/S

Oak

O/S

Autmn Cherry

C/S

Walnut

W/S

Beech

B/S

Ash

A/S

5year

guarantee

Straight Meeting Extension Bench Cable Risers - 2 per pack

Code W x H x D £

MSME12/5 1200 x 725 x 500 361

MSME16/6 1600 x 725 x 650 376

For use with Double Bench Desking

without Dividing Screens.

Code W x H x D £

MSME12/5/S 1227 x 725 x 500 361

MSME16/6/S 1627 x 725 x 650 376

For use with Double Bench Desking

with Dividing Screens.

Code W x H x D £

MLCR 575 x 50 x 50 30

Single channel Cable Riser (2 per pack).

Straight Meeting Extension

For Single & Double Bench Desks. Illustrated in red. 2 recommended for Double

Bench Workstations.

MFC Modesty Panels Meeting TableCode W x H x D £

MA2 (1m Desk) 600x100x110 35

MA3 (1.2m Desk) 800x100x110 38

MA5 (1.4m Desk) 1000x100x110 41

MA7 (1.6m Desk) 1200x100x110 44

MA9 (1.8m Desk) 1400x100x110 50

MA10 (2m Desk) 1600x100x110 55

Code W x H £

MRMP10 700 x 300 78

MRMP12 900 x 300 81

MRMP14 1100 x 300 84

MRMP16 1300 x 300 88

MRMP18 1500 x 300 90

MRMP20 1700 x 300 93

Code W x H x D £

MMT12/10 1200 x 725 x 1000 431

MMT14/10 1400 x 725 x 1000 436

MMT16/10 1600 x 725 x 1000 441

MMT18/10 1800 x 725 x 1000 447

MMT20/10 2000 x 725 x 1000 452

Available with 1000mm depth. 25mm Fixed Top.

Bench Cable Trays

Conference Table - 25mm Fixed Top

Code W x H x D £

MMT16/16 1600 x 725 x 1600 636

MMT18/16 1800 x 725 x 1600 647

MMT20/16 2000 x 725 x 1600 659

Code W x H x D £

MCONF34 3400 x 725 x 1200 1271

Supplied in 2 x 1700mm sections. Shared

centre leg frame. Seats up to 10 people.

Meeting Table - 25mm Fixed Top

Note: Silver frames as standard. White and black frames are available, ask sales for more details.

142-143 Matrix Bench (15).indd 1 27/11/2014 16:06

Page 145: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Code W x H x D £

ELSS10A 973 x 350 x 27 265

ELSS12A 1173 x 375 x 27 280

ELSS14A 1373 x 375 x 27 307

ELSS16A 1573 x 375 x 27 330

ELSS18A 1773 x 375 x 27 361

ELSS20A 1973 x 375 x 27 381

Acrylic screen with aluminium trim. With acrylic

finishes below.

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Matrix Screensdesking, storage and screens

143

Fabric System - Screen with Management RailFabric System ScreenCode W x H x D £

ELSS10MF 973 x 375 x 27 330

ELSS12MF 1173 x 375 x 27 363

ELSS14MF 1373 x 375 x 27 390

ELSS16MF 1573 x 375 x 27 443

ELSS18MF 1773 x 375 x 27 479

ELSS20MF 1973 x 375 x 27 512

Fully upholstered pinnable surfaces with management

rail and aluminium trim. Standard Lucia fabric.

Code W x H x D £

ELSS10F 973 x 375 x 27 265

ELSS12F 1173 x 375 x 27 280

ELSS14F 1373 x 375 x 27 307

ELSS16F 1573 x 375 x 27 330

ELSS18F 1773 x 375 x 27 361

ELSS20F 1973 x 375 x 27 381

Fully upholstered pinnable surfaces with

aluminium trim. Standard Lucia fabric.

Acrylic System Screen

Acrylic Finishes

OrangeBlue RedGreen White

WRG OB

5year

guarantee

Return screens & linking posts available for all screens, ask sales for details. Please note: When fixing screens to -a) Rectangular Desk b) Angular Desk Remove /L from product code.

Fabric Finishes: Group 1 Camira Lucia

Code W x H x D £

ECS10F/M 970 x 375 x 27 184

ECS12F/M 1170 x 375 x 27 195

ECS14F/M 1370 x 375 x 27 205

ECS16F/M 1570 x 375 x 27 215

ECS18F/M 1770 x 375 x 27 223

ECS20F/M 1970 x 375 x 27 233

Fully upholstered screen.

Single Workstation Screen - FabricAcrylic System - Screen with Management Rail

Code W x H x D £

ECS10F 970 x 375 x 27 184

ECS12F 1170 x 375 x 27 195

ECS14F 1370 x 375 x 27 205

ECS16F 1570 x 375 x 27 215

ECS18F 1770 x 375 x 27 223

ECS20F 1970 x 375 x 27 233

Fully upholstered screen.

Code W x H x D £

ELSS10MA 973 x 375 x 27 330

ELSS12MA 1173 x 375 x 27 363

ELSS14MA 1373 x 375 x 27 390

ELSS16MA 1573 x 375 x 27 443

ELSS18MA 1773 x 375 x 27 479

ELSS20MA 1973 x 375 x 27 512

Acrylic screen with management rail and

aluminium trim. With acrylic finishes below.

Double Workstation Screen - Fabric

142-143 Matrix Bench (15).indd 2 27/11/2014 16:07

Page 146: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Configuring Multiple Linnea Bench Desking

144

For screensto complimentthis range see

page 149

Linnea Bench desking, storage and screens

Linnea provides space for multiple users working as a team or individually.The frame structure is strong, easy to assemble and reconfigure. Linnea has been engineered to allow leg sharing to reduce costs and maximise space. Dividing screens can also be included and are available in several styles.

Stage 1Product Code: L18/16 Double Bench. Remove end leg frame (illustrated red) from Double Bench

Stage 2Product Code: L18/16INT Add a double bench shared insert leg

Stage 3Product Code: L18/16 & L18/16INT Re-attach the leg frame from the Double Bench to the Double Bench Shared Leg Desk

Stage 4Finished Result. Typical 4 workstation layout

Delivery &installation

included

144-145 Linnea Bench (15).indd 1 27/11/2014 17:35

Page 147: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

145

144-145 Linnea Bench (15).indd 2 27/11/2014 17:35

Page 148: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Linnea Bench desking, storage and screens

146

Rectangular Workstation

Shared Inset Leg

Rectangular WorkstationCode W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

LR10/8 1000x725x800 461 670

LR12/8 1200x725x800 472 683

LR14/8 1400x725x800 480 695

LR16/8 1600x725x800 492 711

LR18/8 1800x725x800 500 726

LR20/8 2000x725x800 509 738

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

LR10/8/INT 1000x725x800 461 670

LR12/8/INT 1200x725x800 472 683

LR14/8/INT 1400x725x800 480 695

LR16/8/INT 1600x725x800 492 711

LR18/8/INT 1800x725x800 500 726

LR20/8/INT 2000x725x800 509 738

Angular Workstation - Right & Left Hand

Complete with central cable tray and sliding top.

Complete with central cable tray and sliding top.

Shared Inset Leg

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

L14/8/6RH 1400x725x800-600 517 746

L16/8/6RH 1600x725x800-600 523 760

L18/8/6RH 1800x725x800-600 534 773

L20/8/6RH 2000x725x800-600 545 790

L14/8/6LH 1400x725x800-600 517 746

L16/8/6LH 1600x725x800-600 523 760

L18/8/6LH 1800x725x800-600 534 773

L20/8/6LH 2000x725x800-600 545 790

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

L10/12/INT 1000x725x1200 769 1116

L12/12/INT 1200x725x1200 792 1148

L14/12/INT 1400x725x1200 821 1191

L16/12/INT 1600x725x1200 850 1232

L18/12/INT 1800x725x1200 876 1271

L20/12/INT 2000x725x1200 902 1309

L10/16/INT 1000x725x1600 822 1192

L12/16/INT 1200x725x1600 849 1230

L14/16/INT 1400x725x1600 875 1268

L16/16/INT 1600x725x1600 900 1306

L18/16/INT 1800x725x1600 929 1346

L20/16/INT 2000x725x1600 956 1386

Double Bench Double BenchCode W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

L10/12 1000x725x1200 804 1166

L12/12 1200x725x1200 826 1198

L14/12 1400x725x1200 855 1241

L16/12 1600x725x1200 884 1281

L18/12 1800x725x1200 910 1318

L20/12 2000x725x1200 936 1358

L10/16 1000x725x1600 856 1242

L12/16 1200x725x1600 882 1280

L14/16 1400x725x1600 909 1317

L16/16 1600x725x1600 937 1360

L18/16 1800x725x1600 962 1396

L20/16 2000x725x1600 992 1437

5year

guarantee

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days for MFC, 25 working days for Veneer and fully assembled. Packaging removed

and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Veneer Colours

MFC Colours

Ash Oak

A/SV

Silver

S/S

O/SV

White

WH/S

Wenge

WE/S

Oak

O/S

Autmn Cherry

C/S

Walnut

W/S

Beech

B/S

Ash

A/S

Note: Silver frames as standard. White and black frames are available, ask sales for more details.

146-147 Linnea Bench (15).indd 1 27/11/2014 17:44

Page 149: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Linnea Benchdesking, storage and screens

147

120O Cluster Workstations120O Cluster WorkstationsCode W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

LMT12/10 1200x1000x725 481 700

LMT14/10 1400x1000x725 492 711

LMT16/10 1600x1000x725 499 723

LMT18/10 1800x1000x725 508 737

LMT20/10 2000x1000x725 519 752

Code Size MFC £ Veneer £

LC120/6 2683 Dia. 725 (h) 1736 2430

Intermediate Leg

LC120/6INT 1736 2430

Configured as a three person desking module.

Shared leg option available when ordering

multiple LC120.

Please Note: If fitting screens on Linnea 120

degree workstation cluster a 3-way link post is

required, please contact sales for details.

Code Size MFC £ Veneer £

LC120 2886 Dia. 725 (h) 1929 2700

Intermediate Leg

LC120INT 1929 2700

Configured as a three person desking module.

Shared leg option available when ordering

multiple LC120.

800mm Ends

Meeting Table

StorageFor complimentary storage see pages 150-153.

600mm Ends

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

LCONF24 2400x725x1200 1103 1601

Supplied in 2x 1700mm sections. Shared centre leg frame.

Seats up to 8 people

Seats up to 10 people

Boardroom/ Conference Table Boardroom/ Conference TableCode W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

LCONF34 3400x725x1200 1585 2299

Delivery &installation

included

146-147 Linnea Bench (15).indd 2 27/11/2014 17:44

Page 150: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Linnea Bench desking, storage and screens

148

Curved Extensions Straight ExtensionsCode W x D x H MFC £ Veneer £

LCME12/5 1200x725x500 464 672

LCME16/6 1600x725x650 481 700

Code W x H £

LRCT10 470x75x222 60

LRCT12 670x75x222 73

LRCT14 870x75x222 80

LRCT16 1070x75x222 93

LRCT18 1270x75x222 105

LRCT20 1470x75x222 117

Note: Cable Trays for Rectangular & Angular

Workstations and Secretarial Returns will only accept 2

Gang Sockets. Cable Trays can be accessed either sides

of Linnea desking via the easy slot and hook design.

Code W x D x H MFC £ Veneer £

LCME12/5/S 1227x725x500 464 672

LCME16/6/S 1627x725x650 481 700

Code W x D x H MFC £ Veneer £

LSME12/5 1200x725x500 464 672

LSME16/6 1600x725x650 481 700

Curved Extensions

Modesty Panels Straight ExtensionsCode W x H £

LRMP10 760x275 117

LRMP12 960x275 120

LRMP14 1160x275 122

LRMP16 1360x275 126

LRMP18 1560x275 130

LRMP20 1760x275 134

Code W x D x H MFC £ Veneer £

LSME12/5/S 1227x725x500 464 672

LSME16/6/S 1627x725x650 481 700

For use with screen

Cable Trays

5year

guarantee

Veneer ColoursMFC Colours

MFC Colours

Walnut

BeechAsh

Wenge

Oak Autmn Cherry

Ash

Silver

OakWhite

A/SV

S/S

O/SVWH/S WE/S

O/S C/S

W/S

B/SA/S

Illustrated in red. Silver finish as standard.Illustrated in red. Silver finish as standard.

For use without screen For use with screen For use without screen

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days for MFC, 25 working days for Veneer and fully assembled.

Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Illustrated in red. Silver finish as standard.

Single channel cable risers (2 pack)

Cable RiserCode £

LLCR 33

148-149 Linnea Bench and Screens (15).indd 1 27/11/2014 17:23

Page 151: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Code W x H x D £

ELSS10A 973 x 375 x 27 265

ELSS12A 1173 x 375 x 27 280

ELSS14A 1373 x 375 x 27 307

ELSS16A 1573 x 375 x 27 330

ELSS18A 1773 x 375 x 27 361

ELSS20A 1973 x 375 x 27 381

Acrylic screen with aluminium trim.

With acrylic finishes below.

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Linnea Screensdesking, storage and screens

149

Fabric System - Screen with Management RailFabric System ScreenCode W x H x D £

ELSS10MF 973 x 375 x 27 330

ELSS12MF 1173 x 375 x 27 363

ELSS14MF 1373 x 375 x 27 390

ELSS16MF 1573 x 375 x 27 443

ELSS18MF 1773 x 375 x 27 479

ELSS20MF 1973 x 375 x 27 512

Fully upholstered pinnable surfaces with management

rail and aluminium trim. Standard Lucia fabric.

Code W x H x D £

ELSS10F 973 x 375 x 27 265

ELSS12F 1173 x 375 x 27 280

ELSS14F 1373 x 375 x 27 307

ELSS16F 1573 x 375 x 27 330

ELSS18F 1773 x 375 x 27 361

ELSS20F 1973 x 375 x 27 381

Fully upholstered pinnable surfaces with

aluminium trim. Standard Lucia fabric.

Acrylic System Screen

Acrylic Finishes

OrangeBlue RedGreen White

WRG OB

5year

guarantee

Return screens & linking posts available for all screens, ask sales for details. Please note: When fixing screens to -a) Rectangular Desk b) Angular Desk Remove /L from product code.

Fabric Finishes: Group 1 Camira Lucia

Code W x H x D £

ELSS10MA 973 x 375 x 27 330

ELSS12MA 1173 x 375 x 27 363

ELSS14MA 1373 x 375 x 27 390

ELSS16MA 1573 x 375 x 27 443

ELSS18MA 1773 x 375 x 27 479

ELSS20MA 1973 x 375 x 27 512

Acrylic screen with management rail and

aluminium trim. With acrylic finishes below.

Acrylic System - Screen with Management Rail

148-149 Linnea Bench and Screens (15).indd 2 27/11/2014 17:23

Page 152: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Linnea Bench desking, storage and screens

150

Single Sided Desk High Mobile Unit Double Sided Under Desk Mobile UnitCode W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

DHSU 1000 x 725 x 600 519 777

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

DLSU/SP 1000 x 690 x 600 609 858

With Seat Pad With Seat Pad

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

SHSU 1000 x 725 x 400 449 675

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

DLSU 1000 x 630 x 600 496 745

Double Sided Desk High Mobile Unit

Single Sided Under Desk Mobile Unit Single Sided Under Desk Mobile UnitCode W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

SLSU 1000 x 630 x 400 427 640

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

SLSU/SP 1000 x 690 x 400 540 754

Double Sided Under Desk Mobile Unit

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days for MFC, 25 working days for Veneer and fully assembled.

Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

For other storage options

see pages152-153

5year

guarantee

Veneer Colours

MFC Colours

Walnut Wenge Autmn Cherry

Ash Oak

White

A/SV

Silver

S/S

O/SV

WH/S WE/S

Oak

O/S

C/SW/S

Beech

B/S

Ash

A/S

150-151 Linnea Bench (15).indd 1 27/11/2014 17:00

Page 153: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Linnea Benchdesking, storage and screens

151

5year

guarantee

Veneer ColoursMFC Colours

Ash

A/SV

Silver

S/S

Oak

O/SV

White

WH/S

Wenge

WE/S

Oak

O/S

Autmn Cherry

C/S

Walnut

W/S

Beech

B/S

Ash

A/S

Single Sided Mobile Under Desk Unit with Seat PadCode W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

2 Drawer

MPP2D LH 1000 x 570 x 600 606 849

MPP2D RH 1000 x 570 x 600 606 849

3 Drawer

MPP3D LH 1000 x 570 x 600 606 849

MPP3D RH 1000 x 570 x 600 606 849

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

2 Drawer

MPP2D LH/SP 1000 x 630 x 600 720 962

MPP2D RH/SP 1000 x 630 x 600 720 962

3 Drawer

MPP3D LH/SP 1000 x 630 x 600 720 962

MPP3D RH/SP 1000 x 630 x 600 720 962

Single Sided Mobile Under Desk Unit

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days for MFC, 25 working days for Veneer and fully assembled.Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Left hand shown Left hand shown

150-151 Linnea Bench (15).indd 2 27/11/2014 17:00

Page 154: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

152

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days for MFC, 25 working days for Veneer and

fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

DHPF - Wooden Drawer 420x725x600 309 466

SDHPF - System Drawer 420x725x600 366 521

Desk High Pedestal Low Mobile PedestalsCode W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

DHPF/8 - Wooden Drawer 420x725x800 408 609

SDHPF/8 - System Drawer 420x725x800 461 666

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

MPF - 2 Drawer 420x460x600 231 349

MP3 - 3 Drawer 420x460x600 231 349

Desk High Pedestal

600 desk high pedestal, 2 drawers, 1 filing drawer

800 desk high pedestal, 2 drawers, 1 filing drawer

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

DMPF/N - 3 Drawer 300x630x600 279 419

90° Desk HighCode W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

SU8X8ST 800x725x800 450 675

Narrow Mobile Pedestal

Pedestals desking, storage and screens

Veneer ColoursMFC Colours

Ash Oak

A/SV

Silver

S/S O/SV

White

WH/S

Wenge

WE/S

Oak

O/S

Autmn Cherry

C/S

Walnut

W/S

Beech

B/S

Ash

A/S5year

guarantee

152-153 Pedestals - Cupboards - Filers (15).indd 1 27/11/2014 17:13

Page 155: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Cupboards and Filers

153

desking, storage and screens

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

NSSC7 990x725x500 418 626

NSSC12 990x1200x500 477 716

NSSC16 990x1600x500 535 807

NSSC18 990x1800x500 597 893

NSSC20 990x2000x500 660 987

Wooden Storage Unit Shelf. (Not compatible

with System Storage Unit Skins)

NSSC 950x18x450 33 52

Side Filing UnitTambour Door System Storage UnitCode W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

NSF2/5 800x725x500 591 885

NSF2/6 800x725x600 623 931

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

NSSC7ST 1050x725x500 666 853

NSSC12ST 1050x1200x500 784 984

NSSC16ST 1050x1600x500 844 1057

NSSC18ST 1050x1800x500 931 1164

NSSC20ST 1050x2000x500 1020 1257

Complete with System Storage Unit Skins.

Double Door System Storage Unit

System Storage Unit Skins

Adapts System Storage Units to

accept accessories.

Code £

BTS20 2000 High 155

BTS18 1800 High 147

BTS16 1600 High 125

BTS12 1200 High 109

BTS7 725 High 95

Standard Shelf

BMS10/1 1 Shelf 32

Pull Out Reference Shelf

System Storage Unit Skins are

required for this shelf.

BMRS10 119

Code £

Slotted Filing Shelf

BMSFS10 Shelf 57

BMSDIV (5 x Dividers) 52

Lateral Filing Cradle

Adjustable lateral filing cradle,

between 250mm & 350mm centres

BMALCR10 50

Pull Out Vertical Filing Cradle

Two cross bars to accept foolscap filing side on.

Foolscap front to back. A4 front to back.

BMPCR10 119

Code W x H x D MFC £ Veneer £

FC2 - 2 Drawer 468x725x600 320 511

FC3 - 3 Drawer 468x1060x600 402 637

FC4 - 4 Drawer 468x1385x600 475 761

See colours available on

opposite page

Filing Cabinet

Internal Storage Accessories

System Storage Unit Skins are required for all accessories.

152-153 Pedestals - Cupboards - Filers (15).indd 2 27/11/2014 17:13

Page 156: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

154

The increasingly popular Prime, E Space and Windsor offer stylish and affordable executive furniture solutions. The range includes all the essential executive furniture products, from a large bow fronted desk to meeting extensions and tables, cupboards and side filers. New for 2015 we also included the traditional but beautiful Corniche and the superb contemporary design of the Aston range.

Why not flick to page 42 to view some equally affordable and stylish executive seating.

Executive Furniture

2015 Range Highlights

AstonBy mixing and matching complimentary finishes on individual items and across suites, quietly stylish or eye catching schemes can be easily created using this simple to specify range of executive furniture.

Windsor VeneerNew for 2015, the Windsor Veneer range is designed to embrace the classic executive look but combining with the modern technology era.

154-155 Executive Intro and Contents (15).indd 1 02/12/2014 12:51

Page 157: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Storage Page 156

Meeting Tables Page 156

Desks Page 156

Pedestals Page 156

Prim

eE

Spac

eW

inds

or V

enee

rC

orni

che

Asto

n

Desks Page 158

Desks Page 162

Desks Page 166

Desks Page 170

Pedestals Page 158

Side Filing Units Page 164

Pedestals Page 166

Pedestals Page 171

Meeting Tables Page 161

Storage Units Page 164

Tables Page 169

Console Tables Page 173

Conference Tables Page 165

Bookcases Page 173

Storage Page 160

Pedestals Page 164

StoragePage 168

StoragePage 172

executive furniture contents

155

154-155 Executive Intro and Contents (15).indd 2 02/12/2014 12:51

Page 158: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Prime

Colour

Lucida Pear

This range is a traditional yet affordable executive group of furniture which adds style to any office. Choose from a multitude of extension, storage and table options to compliment the presence of this executive desk.

156

Return Shell Desk High CabinetCode W x H x D £

ZWSPME389 1800 x 750 x 1050 438

Code W x H x D £

WSPME392 890 x 750 x 590 194

Code W x H x D £

WSPME313 800 x 750 x 560 348

Bow Front Executive Desk

LP5year

guarantee

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

executive furniture

Standard Features

Circular cable ports.

36mm thick tops.

Supplied without topMakes desk height

Note: Filing Cabinets are for hanging files only. They are not designed for bulk storage.

Top & Under Desk Pedestal Connection TopsCode W x H x D £

WSPME312 800 x 750 x 560 562

Code W x H x D £

Top for Pedestal

WSPME166T 36mm thick 43

Under Desk Pedestal

WSPM166 400 x 714 x 550 246

Code W x H x D £

Left Hand

WSPMECT (L) 900 x 36 x 1000 121

Right Hand

WSPMECT (R) 900 x 36 x 1000 121

Metal Black Leg

WSMLPL720-3E 720 x 75 48

2 Drawer Side Filer

Code W x H x D £

ZWSPM135 1800 x 750 x 900 314

ZWSPM136 2400 x 750 x 1000 413

Oval Conference Table

156-157 Prime (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 10:08

Page 159: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

157

156-157 Prime (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 10:08

Page 160: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

E Space

Colour

Cappuccino

E Space is the modern, stylish and affordable executive office solution. With 36mm thick tops and substantial 50mm wide leg panels, E Space provides strength and presence.

158

Executive Desk Side Return - 2 Drawer Pedestal

Code W x H x D £

ZES601 - RH Pedestal 2200x750x1190 639

ZES603 - LH Pedestal 2200x750x1190 639

Code W x H x D £

ZES605 - RH 2200x750x1190 492

ZES604 - LH 2200x750x1190 492

Executive Desk - with 3 Drawer Pedestal

5year

guarantee

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

executive furniture

Mobile Pedestal - 2 Drawer Mobile Pedestal - 3 Drawer

Code W x H x D £

ZES607 1380 x 700 x 480 381

For ZES604/ZES605

Code W x H x D £

ES622 406 x 640 x 550 221

Code W x H x D £

ES621 406 x 640 x 550 203

Side Return - 3 Drawer Pedestal

Code W x H x D £

ZES600 - RH Pedestal 2200x750x1190 664

ZES602 - LH Pedestal 2200x750x1190 664

Executive Desk - with 2 Drawer Pedestal

Standard FeaturesBrushed aluminium handles.Pen tray drawer.Silver leg with height adjustment

Right Hand Shown

Code W x H x D £

ZES606 1380 x 700 x 480 407

For ZES604/ZES605

158-159 E Space (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 10:11

Page 161: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

159

158-159 E Space (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 10:11

Page 162: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

E Space

Colour

Cappuccino

160

5year

guarantee

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

executive furniture

Code W x H x D £

ZES625 806 x 1900 x 425 703

Wooden and glass doors with three shelves

High Storage Cabinet with Glass Doors

Note: Filing Cabinets are for hanging files only. They are not designed for bulk storage.

Low Cabinet Two Drawer Side FilerCode W x H x D £

ZES624 806 x 1900 x 425 496

Wooden doors with three shelves

Code W x H x D £

ES626 806 x 825 x 425 245

One shelf included

High Storage CabinetCode W x H x D £

ES623 806 x 680 x 500 386

160-161 E Space (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 10:16

Page 163: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

E Space

161

executive furniture

Barrel Shaped TableCode Dia x H £

ZES609 1200 x 750 382

Code W x H x D £

ZES608 2200 x 750 x 1000 470

Circular Meeting Table

160-161 E Space (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 10:17

Page 164: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Windsor Veneer

162 Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

executive furniture

The Windsor Veener range is designed to embrace the classic executive look but combining with the modern day technology era. Integrating cable management outlets in the desk top allows for the use of IT equipment inmultiple locations on the work surface. The desking range is manufactured using 25mm Veneer panels giving the product a quality and modern feel. As the product is manufactured from natural materials the desk will age with its surroundings making it look and feel like part of the environment.

Bow Fronted Crescent WorkstationCode W x H x D Veneer £

WR10 1000x725x800 472

WR12 1200x725x800 490

WR14 1400x725x800 507

WR16 1600x725x800 528

WR18 1800x725x800 546

Code W x H x D Veneer £

Left Hand

WCB18LH 1800x725x1300 858

Right Hand

WCB18RH 1800x725x1300 858

Rectangular Desk

25mmworktops

Extension Meeting Table Circular Meeting Table

Code W x H x D Veneer £

WRB16 1600x725x900 761

WRB18 1800x725x900 780

Code W x H x D Veneer £

DEXTRH 1600 x 725 x 800 716

DEXTLH 1600 x 725 x 800 716

120mm diameter leg on 300mm diameter base.

Code Dia x H Veneer £

CMT12 1200 x 725 660

120mm diameter leg on 300mm diameter base.

Bow Fronted Rectangular Desk

600mm return. Right hand shown.

Left hand shown.

Secretarial Return

Note: Only compatible with rectangular desks

Right hand shown

New for 2015

Veneer Colour

Walnut

5year

guarantee

Code W x H x D Veneer £

WSR10/6LH 1000x725x600 364

WSR10/6RH 1800x725x600 364

Ash Oak

A/SVW/SV O/SV

162-163 Windsor Veneer (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 10:34

Page 165: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

163

162-163 Windsor Veneer (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 10:35

Page 166: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Windsor Veneer executive furniture

164 Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Desk High Storage UnitDouble Door System Storage UnitCode W x H x D Veneer £

FC2 - 2 Drawer 468 x 725 x 600 511

FC3 - 3 Drawer 468 x 1060 x 600 637

FC4 - 4 Drawer 468 x 1385 x 600 761

Code W x H x D Veneer £

NSSC7 990 x 725 x 500 626

NSSC12 990 x 1200 x 500 716

NSSC16 990 x 1600 x 500 807

NSSC18 990 x 1800 x 500 893

NSSC20 990 x 2000 x 500 987

Storage Unit Shelf.

NSSC 950 x 18 x 450 52

Filing Cabinets

Code W x H x D Veneer £

DHPF/8 - Wooden Drawer 420x725x800 609

SDHPF/8 - System Drawer 420x725x800 666

DHPF - Wooden Drawer 420x725x600 466

SDHPF - System Drawer 420x725x600 521

Code W x H x D Veneer £

TCG8 800 x 725 x 350 447

TCG12 1200 x 725 x 350 565

1 adjustable shelf.

2 x 4mm toughened glass sliding doors.

Code W x H x D Veneer £

NSU12/5 1200 x 725 x 500 744

NSU8/5 800 x 725 x 500 581

2 sliding doors. Lockable, includes 2 keys.

1 adjustable shelf.

Desk High Pedestals Glass Fronted Top Storage Unit

600 desk high pedestal, 2 drawers, 1 filing drawer

800 desk high pedestal, 2 drawers, 1 filing drawer

Code W x H x D Veneer £

NSF2/5 800 x 725 x 500 885

NSF2/6 800 x 725 x 600 931

Side Filing Units

Veneer Colour

Walnut

5year

guarantee

Ash Oak

A/SVW/SV O/SV

Delivery &installation

included

164-165 Windsor Veneer (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 10:38

Page 167: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

165

Double D Ended Conference Table

Double D Ended Conference Table

Code W x H x D Veneer £

DDT24 2400x725x1200 1640

Arrowhead leg base with modesty panel. Seating up to 8 people.

Code W x H x D Veneer £

CONF2AL 3400x725x1200 2340

Arrowhead leg base with modesty panel. Seating up to 10 people.

Supplied in two 1700mm Sections

Barrel Shaped Conference Table

Oval Conference Table

Code W x H x D Veneer £

BST24 2400x725x1200 1640

Arrowhead leg base with modesty panel. Seating up to 8 people.

Code W x H x D Veneer £

OVT24 2400x725x1200 1640

Arrowhead leg base with modesty panel.

Seating up to 8 people.

Real Wood

Veneer

Windsor Veneerexecutive furniture

164-165 Windsor Veneer (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 10:38

Page 168: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Mobile Under Desk Pedestal - 3 Drawer

Code W x H x D £

CDHP603 420 x 720 x 610 1035

Code W x H x D £

CMP3 420 x 675 x 600 973

610 Desk High Pedestal - 3 Drawer

800 Desk High Pedestal - 2 Drawer 800 Desk High Pedestal - 3 Drawer

Code W x H x D £

CDHP602 420 x 720 x 610 1014

Code W x H x D £

CDHP802 420 x 720 x 800 1139

Code W x H x D £

CDHP803 420 x 720 x 800 1170

610 Desk High Pedestal - 2 Drawer

Wooden Cable Ports - Pair CCP 141

Wire Management - Ask Sales For Details

Options£

Corniche

166 Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

executive furniture

Corniche represents a commitment to providing a range of executive furniture with the highest achievable standards of elegance and quality. Manufactured with solid wood lipping’s all round and available in five real wood veneer finishes, the superior Corniche range of executive furniture will enhance any environment.

Code W x H x D £

CRD1808 1800 x 720 x 800 1534

CRD2010 2000 x 720 x 1000 1638

Rectangular Desk Teardrop Conference EndCode W x H x D £

CBD2008 2000 x 720 x 1000/800 1690

Code W x H x D £

Left Hand

CME08/L 920 x 720 x 1020 962

CME10/L 1000 x 720 x 1465 1040

Right Hand

CME08/R 920 x 720 x 1020 962

CME10/R 1000 x 720 x 1465 1040

Bow Fronted Desk

Left hand shown

Wood Veneer Finish

Oak Cherry Stained to Rosewood

Maple Cherry Stained to

Walnut

Cherry

5year

guarantee

C M O W RWNote: To prices shown please add +10% for Stain to Sample and +20% for Suiting.

166-167 Corniche (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 10:45

Page 169: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

167

166-167 Corniche (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 10:45

Page 170: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Corniche

168 Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

executive furniture

Desk High 4 Door Storage UnitCode W x H x D (mm) £

Supplied empty ready to accept system

internal units.

CSSD1007 1000 x 720 x 530 1508

Supplied with a single wooden shelf.

CCSD1007 1000 x 720 x 530 1508

Code W x H x D (mm) £

Supplied empty ready to accept system

internal units.

CSSD2007 2000 x 720 x 530 3016

Supplied with a single wooden shelf.

CCSD2007 2000 x 720 x 530 3016

Desk High 2 Door Storage UnitCode W x H x D (mm) £

Supplied empty ready to accept system

internal units.

CSSD1507 1500 x 720 x 530 2262

Supplied with a single wooden shelf.

CCSD1507 1500 x 720 x 530 2262

Desk High 3 Door Storage Unit

Real Wood

Veneer

Steel Shelf VFSS 37

Lateral Filing Cradle VLFC 37

Steel Slotted Shelf VSSS 84

Wardrobe Kit VWKM 146

Options £

Code W x H x D (mm) £

CSBU1009 1000 x 920 x 330 1144

Code W x H x D (mm) £

CSSD1016 1000 x 1600 x 530 1976

Code W x H x D (mm) £

CSSF1007 1000 x 720 x 530 1716

With a ‘soft close’ feature

Bookcase Unit - With Clear Glass Doors

High Storage Cabinet

Desk High 2 Door Storage Unit

VCFSS VLFC VSSS VWKM

Wood Veneer Finish

Oak Cherry Stained to Rosewood

Maple Cherry Stained to

Walnut

Cherry

5year

guarantee

C M O W RWNote: To prices shown please add +10% for Stain to Sample and +20% for Suiting.

168-169 Corniche (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 10:57

Page 171: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Cornicheexecutive furniture

169

The Corniche table and Corniche coffee tables represent a commitment to providing executive furniture with the highest achievable standards of elegance and quality. Table tops are 40mm thick with solid wood lippings all round and with a Bull nose profile. A choice of three veneers: Oak, Cherry and Maple and the additional ability to stain to sample ensures that Corniche conference tables will enhance any meeting environment.

Square Coffee Table with Bull Nose Profile

D Ended Oval Table with Bull Nose Profile

Circular Table with Bull Nose Profile

Circular Coffee Table with Bull Nose Profile

Code Diam x H (mm) £

COR1 1220 x 720 1976

Radial Veneer. Arrowhead leg frame.

Arrowhead leg frame.

Radial Veneer. Arrowhead leg frame.

Code Diam x H (mm) £

COF5 930 x 400 1040

Code W x H x D (mm) £

COF4 660 x 400 x 660 791

Code W x H x D (mm) £

COR2 2500 x 720 x 1100 Seating up to 8 people 2262

COR3 3000 x 720 x 1100 Seating up to 10 people 2418

COR2 Shown Arrow head leg frames

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Wood Veneer Finish

Oak Cherry Stained to Rosewood

Maple Cherry Stained to

Walnut

Cherry

5year

guarantee

C M O W RW

Note: To prices shown please add +10% for Stain to Sample and +20% for Suiting.

Extended range for

2015

For matchingconference tables

see pages191

168-169 Corniche (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 10:57

Page 172: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Aston

170 Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

executive furniture

Supported Desk TopCode W x H x D £

ARD2210 2200 x 740 x 1000 2060

ARD2010 2000 x 740 x 1000 1956

ARD1808 1800 x 740 x 800 1789

Note: Supplied without cable ports as standard

Code W x H x D £

ASST2210R 2200 x 740 x 1000 2372

ASST2010R 2000 x 740 x 1000 2268

With one standard left hand leg frame, modesty

panel & one supporting right hand leg frame.

Rectangular DeskCode W x H x D £

ASST2210L 2200 x 740 x 1000 2372

ASST2010L 2000 x 740 x 1000 2268

With one standard right hand leg frame, modesty

panel & one supporting left hand leg frame.

Supported Desk Top

New for 2015

Desk Top & Storage Finishes Edge Profile Finishes

Natural WalnutNatural Walnut

Ice White Laminate

Black Laminate

OakOakEdge profile detail

5year

guarantee

Aston has the elegance of a classic car along with gravitas and attention to detail. Featuring a crisp mitred corner and stylish reverse chamfer, the Aston executive desk can be specified with a single wood veneer finish, either oak or natural walnut and including a solid wood edge profile of the same finish, or in ice white or black, through-colour laminate with a solid wood edge profile. By mixing and matching complementary finishes on individual items and across suites, quietly stylish or eye-catching schemes can be easily created using this simple to specify range of executive furniture.

O I OW BL W

Wooden Cable Ports - Pair ACP/V 141

Laminate Cable Ports - Pair ACP/L 141

Please Specify:

Options£

Desk Supporting Return UnitCode W x H x D £

ADSR2006R 2000 x 565 x 600 1935

Code W x H x D £

ADSR2006L 2000 x 565 x 600 1935

Desk Supporting Return Unit

Left Hand

Left Hand

Right Hand

Right Hand

25mm

desk top finish 1.

2.

3. edge profile finish

modesty panel finish

170-171 Aston (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 11:26

Page 173: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Astonexecutive furniture

171

Suspended Lockable Single DrawerCode W x H x D £

AMP3 420 x 640 x 600 936

Under Desk.

Two single drawers & one deep filing drawer.

Code W x H x D £

ASP1 420 x 110 x 500 676

Including solid cherry sculptured pen tray.

3 Drawer Tall Mobile PedestalCode W x H x D £

AMP2S 420 x 525 x 530 817

Under Return.

One single drawer & one deep filing drawer.

2 Drawer Shallow Mobile Pedestal

Real Wood

VeneerCode £

IPT Sculptured Solid Cherry 78

Included in suspended lockable single drawer.

Pen Tray

170-171 Aston (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 11:26

Page 174: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Aston

172

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed

and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

executive furniture

Double Storage Cupboard UnitCode W x H x D (mm) £

ACSD1008 1000 x 860 x 550 1602

2 doors. With one adjustable shelf.

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ACSF2008 2000 x 860 x 550 2767

2 doors & one adjustable shelf in left side.

2 pullout filing drawers right side.

Single Storage Cupboard UnitCode W x H x D (mm) £

ACSD2008 2000 x 860 x 550 2559

4 doors. With one adjustable shelf in each side.

Double Storage Cupboard Unit

New for 2015

Desk Top & Storage Finishes

Edge Profile Finishes

Natural Walnut

Natural Walnut

Ice White Laminate

Black Laminate

Oak

Oak

5year

guarantee

O I

O

W BL

W

Wardrobe PackCode £

AWP 146

Includes shelf with rail under and mirror.

Fits unit ACSD1016 only.

Note: A fridge may be added in the single or double length cupboards by adding the suffix “F” after the product code.

Ask sales for details

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ACSD1016 1000 x 1600 x 550 2018

Single vertical division. 6 adjustable narrow shelves.

Tall Storage Cupboard

172-173 Aston (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 11:30

Page 175: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Astonexecutive furniture

173

Real Wood

Veneer

Console Table

Over Credenza Bookcase Unit

Credenza and Bookcase Unit

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ACT1605 1600 x 740 x 525 1794

ACT1205 1260 x 740 x 525 1623

With open divided shelf.

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ASBU2007 2000 x 740 x 350 1852

Single open shelf, with an overall combined height of 1600mm

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ACT1605D 1600 x 740 x 525 2231

ACT1205D 1260 x 740 x 525 2060

With open shelf & two single drawers.

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ASBU2011 2000 x 1110 x 350 2933

Double open shelves, with an overall combined height of 1970mm

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ACSU2008 2000 x 860 x 550 2933

Credenza double length unit with four doors and one

adjustable wooden shelf in each side. Accepts 1 x row A4 filing only.

Console Table

Over Credenza Bookcase Unit

172-173 Aston (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 11:30

Page 176: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

174

For 2015 we have met the increased demand for tables by ensuring several options for all types of meeting, conference and training requirements.

Many of our hugely popular stocked tables are now available fully delivered and installed within ten working days.

Tables

2015 Range Highlights

ImpactOur cost effective conference and meeting tables return for 2015 with three new special finishes now available.

CornicheAchieving the highest standards of elegance and quality. Available in three veneers: Oak, Cherry and Maple and the additional ability to stain to sample.

174-175 Tables Intro - Contents (15).indd 1 02/12/2014 12:48

Page 177: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

175

Tabl

es

tables contents

ImpactPage 176

GyratePage 181

E SpacePage 186

PremierPage 190

BoxPage 177

PrimePage 186

CornichePage 191

Domino FlipPage 182

General OfficePage 178

ModularPage 183

WindsorPage 187

Wooden Coffee TablesPage 192

EnviroPage 184

AerofoilPage 188

Glass Coffee TablesPage 193

Union FoldingPage 179

One EightyPage 180

ConferencePage 185

ChilternPage 189

174-175 Tables Intro - Contents (15).indd 2 02/12/2014 12:48

Page 178: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Impact Office

176

tables

Impact office tables are a cost effective conference and meeting furniture solution. The range can be quickly rearranged and stored, saving space and time. Designed for simplicity and economy with a sturdy 30 x 30mm frame for durability, 18mm thick MFC table tops and a choice of two finishes from stock.

Semi Circular

Trapezoidal 300

Rectangular

Square

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £IMOT1208 1200 x 725 x 800 135IMOT1408 1400 x 725 x 800 151IMOT1608 1600 x 725 x 800 167IMOT1808 1800 x 725 x 800 181

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £IMOT0808 800 x 725 x 800 133

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £IMOTSC1608 1600 x 725 x 800 187

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £IMOTT1608 1600 x 725 x 800 187

(3 tables make a ‘U’ shape)

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

2year

guarantee

Special ColoursFrame Colour Special Frame ColourStock Colours

White Cappuccino MapleNova Oak Beech Silver Black

BCH WHT CAP MAPNOAK Special Finishes are on a 30 day lead time

S B

176-177 Impact & Box (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 14:34

Page 179: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Box

177

tables

Trapezoidal

Semi Circular

Square/RectangularCode Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

BX0808 800 x 730 x 800 (Square) 140

BX1008 1000 x 730 x 800 157

BX1208 1200 x 730 x 800 175

BX1408 1400 x 730 x 800 196

BX1608 1600 x 730 x 800 218

BX1808 1800 x 730 x 800 238

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

BXTR1608 1600 x 730 x 800 248

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

BXSC1608 1600 x 730 x 800 248

Fantastic Quality &

Value!

A more substantial office table than Impact, the Box range offers practical and reconfigurable tables featuring a 40mm diameter tubular leg in silver and a 25mm top in a range of attractive finishes.

Delivery & Installation

Included

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

2year

guarantee

Special ColoursFrame Colour Special Frame ColourStock Colours

White Cappuccino MapleNova Oak Beech Silver Black

BCH WHT CAP MAPNOAK Special Finishes are on a 30 day lead time

S B

For Barcelona chair see page 56

176-177 Impact & Box (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 14:34

Page 180: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

General Office

178

tables

Practical, stylish and affordable. Choose from this selection of meeting tables to match the stocked Fraction, Workmode Plus & Jetstream.

2year

guarantee

2year

guarantee

Circular with Gullwing

Circular with Silver Tubular

Boardroom Table - Metal Legs

Elliptical with Gullwing

Barrel Shaped

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ZTABTG12 1200 x 727 x 800 241

ZTABTG16 1600 x 727 x 800 285

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ZFPMT1208 1200 x 730 x 800 165

ZFPMT1408 1400 x 730 x 800 185

ZFPMT1608 1600 x 730 x 800 206

ZFPMT1808 1800 x 730 x 800 218

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ZFPBD1800 1800 x 730 x 1200 295

Code Dia x H (mm) £

ZTABTD10 1000 x 727 227

ZTABTD12 1200 x 727 263

Code Dia x H (mm) £

ZFPCMT10D 1000 x 730 197

ZFPCMT12D 1200 x 730 199

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ZFPBD2400 2400 x 730 x 1200 382

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ZTABT24 2400 x 727 x 1047 391

Code W x H x D (mm) £

ZFPBT2400 2400 x 730 x 1200 361

Rectangular with Gullwing

Rectangular with Silver Tubular

Boardroom Table - Metal LegsDelivery & Installation

Included

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Special ColoursFrame ColourStock Colours

Stock Colours

White Cappuccino MapleNova Oak

Oak

Beech

Beech

Silver

BCH

BCH

WHT CAP MAPNOAK

OAK

Special Finishes are on a 30 day lead time

S

178-179 General & Union (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 14:40

Page 181: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Union Folding

179

tables

Union Folding Tables are a range of conference and meeting furniture which allows instant re-configuration. A sturdy folding frame, with 25mm thick table tops and a choice of five top finishes and two frame finishes. These tables offer great style and affordability.

Trapezoidal

D-End

RectangularCode W x H x D (mm) Silver £ Chrome £UNR127 1200 x 725 x 700 285 303UNR128 1200 x 725 x 800 290 307UNR147 1400 x 725 x 700 308 326UNR148 1400 x 725 x 800 314 331UNR167 1600 x 725 x 700 315 333UNR168 1600 x 725 x 800 321 339

Code W x H x D (mm) Silver £ Chrome £UNTZ147 1400 x 725 x 700 293 311UNTZ168 1600 x 725 x 800 324 341

Code W x H x D (mm) Silver £ Chrome £UNDE147 1400 x 725 x 700 320 338UNDE168 1600 x 725 x 800 327 345

Note: Suffix CR for Chrome Legs or S for Silver Legs

5year

guarantee

Shown in Beech and Chrome

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Special Finishes are on a 30 day lead time

Frame ColoursStock Colours

Nova Oak Beech Silver Chrome

BCH

Special Colours

White Cappuccino Maple

WHT CAP MAP

NOAK S CR

178-179 General & Union (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 14:40

Page 182: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

One Eighty

180

tables

This is our entry level flip-top mobile table. Offered in all the popular shapes, sizes and colours to provide a stylish and affordable meeting and conferencing table choice.

Trapezoidal

D-End

RectangularCode Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

Z180/R127 1200 x 720 x 700 289

Z180/R128 1200 x 720 x 800 293

Z180/R147 1400 x 720 x 700 313

Z180/R148 1400 x 720 x 800 318

Z180/R167 1600 x 720 x 700 319

Z180/R168 1600 x 720 x 800 325

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

Z180/TZ168 1600 x 720 x 800 327

Note: Can be used on the end of two rectangular 800mm wide tables

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

Z180/DE147 1400 x 720 x 700 321

Note: Can be used on the end of two rectangular 700mm wide tables

Z180/DE168 1600 x 720 x 800 329

Note: Can be used on the end of two rectangular 800mm wide tables

5year

guarantee

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Special Finishes are on a 30 day lead time

Special Top Colours (Add 5%)Frame ColourStock Top Colours

White Cappuccino MapleNova Oak Beech Silver

BCH WHT CAP MAPNOAK S

180-181 One Eighty & Gyrate (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 14:45

Page 183: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Gyrate

181

tables

5year

guarantee

The Gyrate is our premium flip-top mobile table. Superior design and engineering has developed this silver leg and mechanism to ensure a high quality movement when reconfiguring. A heavy duty mechanism ensures long life and durability.

D-End

Delta

Rectangular

Trapezoidal

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

ZGYR127 1200 x 720 x 700 412

ZGYR128 1200 x 720 x 800 427

ZGYR147 1400 x 720 x 700 439

ZGYR148 1400 x 720 x 800 455

ZGYR167 1600 x 720 x 700 444

ZGYR168 1600 x 720 x 800 461

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

ZGYTZ147 1400 x 720 x 700 423

ZGYTZ168 1600 x 720 x 800 461

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

ZGYDE147 1400 x 720 x 700 444

ZGYDE168 1600 x 720 x 800 466

Code Dimensions W x H (mm) £

ZGYDL7 700 x 720 442

ZGYDL8 800 x 720 444

High quality heavy duty castors

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Special Finishes are on a 30 day lead time

Special Top Colours (Add 5%)Frame ColourStock Top Colours

White Cappuccino MapleNova Oak Beech Silver

BCH WHT CAP MAPNOAK S

180-181 One Eighty & Gyrate (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 14:45

Page 184: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Domino Flip

182

tables

Domino Flip is a highly functional and attractive range of flip top tables. Featuring an attractive polished chrome frame and a heavy duty castor, the range can be easily re-configured to suit your needs. A heavy duty and easy to use release mechanism make for easy storage.

RectangularCode Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

ZDF1480 1400 x 720 x 800 435

ZDF1680 1600 x 720 x 800 450

ZDF1880 1800 x 720 x 800 4805year

guarantee

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Special Finishes are on a 30 day lead time

Special Top ColoursStock Top Colour Frame Finish

White Cappuccino Maple ChromeNova OakBeech

BCH WHT CAP MAP CRNOAK

182-183 Domino Flip & Modular (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 14:47

Page 185: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Modular

183

tables

Delivered to a room of choice within 15 working days for MFC, 20 working days for Veneer and fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Realising the need for re-configurable meeting facilities this training and conference room furniture fits the bill precisely. A huge range of colours are available in MFC tops to sit on a welded underframe, and 40mm diameter tubular legs.

Trapezoidal

Semi Circular

RectangularCode Dimensions W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

TR8 800 x 725 x 800 (Square) 236 353

TR10 1000 x 725 x 800 246 369

TR12 1200 x 725 x 800 258 386

TR14 1400 x 725 x 800 281 421

TR16 1600 x 725 x 800 302 455

TR18 1800 x 725 x 800 325 489

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

TT14 1400 x 725 x 690 448 675

TT16 1600 x 725 x 690 489 734

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

TSC16 1600 x 725 x 800 489 734

5year

guarantee

MFC Colours

Veneer Colours

Ash

Ash

Beech Silver Autumn Cherry

Walnut Oak

OakWenge White

A/S

A/SV

B/S W/S S/S O/S

O/SV

C/S

WE/S WH/S

182-183 Domino Flip & Modular (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 14:47

Page 186: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Enviro

184

tables

Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Choice of shapes, sizes

& heights

Enviro TablesCode Product Dimensions mm Weight Available Heights £

Description Length x width KG 760mm 710mm 640mm 590mm 530mm 460mm

EN/FA38 Square 750 x 750 12.80 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 203

EN/DB38 Rectangular 1200 x 600 15.30 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 220

EN/CT38 Trapezoidal 1400 x 590 14.20 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 232

EN/CA38 Rectangular 1400 x 750 19.50 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 258

For a truly stylish table, look no further than Enviro. The smart silver anodised table legs and frame, and attractive wipe-clean laminate tops with contrasting ABS edge will fit perfectly in any environment. Available in a choice of sizes, shapes and heights. The lightweight aluminium table frame and honeycomb core to the table top ensures the table is lighter in weight than most tables, while still retaining its strength and durability.

Square EN/FA38 Rectangular EN/DB38 Rectangular EN/CA38 Trapezoidal EN/CT38

1. Select shape and size, 2. Select height, 3. Select top colour, 4. Select edge colour

5year

guarantee

FrameColour Range Edge Range

GP99 GP24 GP58GP57

Clear Maple

Grey Dots Sparta Mid Grey Dusky Blue

Ruby Red SilverJapanese Beech

Light Grey

184-185 Enviro & Conference (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 14:50

Page 187: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Conference

185

tables

Realising the need for stylish environments these tables fit the bill precisely. Practical and affordable, choose from a selection of meeting tables that are the perfect solution for any meeting, conference or training room.

Rectangular Meeting Table

Barrel Shaped Table - Panel Legs

Boardroom Table - Metal Legs

Circular Meeting Table

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

ZFPBD1800 1800 x 730 x 1200 295

ZFPBD2400 2400 x 730 x 1200 382

Code Dimensions Dia x H (mm) £

ZFPCMT10D 1000 x 730 197

ZFPCMT12D 1200 x 730 199

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

ZFPMT1208 1200 x 730 x 800 165

ZFPMT1408 1400 x 730 x 800 185

ZFPMT1608 1600 x 730 x 800 206

ZFPMT1808 1800 x 730 x 800 218

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

ZFPBT2400 2400 x 730 x 1200 361

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Delivery & Installation

Included

2year

guarantee

Frame ColourStock Colours

Nova Oak Beech Silver

BCHNOAK S

184-185 Enviro & Conference (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 14:50

Page 188: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

E Space & Prime

186

tables

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

E Space offers a modern solution to a meeting room or an executive office. Substantially designed with a 36mm finely detailed MFC top, and 50mm leg panels, these tables will provide solid investment.

E Space Circular Meeting Table

Prime Oval Conference Table

E Space Conference Table

Code Dimensions Dia x H (mm) £

ZES609 1200 x 750 382

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

ZWSPM135 1800 x 750 x 900 314

ZWSPM136 2400 x 750 x 1000 413

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) £

ZES608 2200 x 750 x 1000 470

5year

guarantee

E Space MFC Finish

Cappuccino

CAP

5year

guarantee

Prime MFC Finish

Lucida Pear

LP

ZES609

ZES608

ZWSPM135

Prime provides an ideal solution for the meeting room. Featuring table top surfaces at 36mm thick, and a full choice of storage facilities to ensure that all of your requirements can be met from one complete range.

Delivery &installation

included

186-187 Prime E Space & Windsor (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 15:04

Page 189: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Windsor

187

tables

Delivered to a room of choice within 15 working days for MFC, 20 working days for Veneer and fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

The Windsor traditional range of tables gives a distinct appeal to any meeting or boardroom

Perfectly refined quality and the hand finished touch give Windsor an air of grace.

5year

guarantee

MFC Colours Veneer Colours

Ash AshBeech Silver Autumn Cherry

Walnut WalnutOak OakWenge White

A/S A/SVB/S W/S W/SVS/S O/S O/SVC/S WE/S WH/S

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

OVT24 2400 x 725 x 1200 1096 1640

Arrowhead leg base with modesty panel. Seating up to 8 people.

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

DDT24 2400 x 725 x 1200 1096 1640

Arrowhead leg base with modesty panel. Seating up to 8 people.

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

BST24 2400 x 725 x 1200 1096 1640

Arrowhead leg base with modesty panel. Seating up to 8 people.

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

CONF2AL 3400 x 725 x 1200 1560 2340

Arrowhead leg base with modesty panel. Seating up to 10 people.

Supplied in 2 x 1700mm sections.

Double D Ended Conference Table

Double D Ended Conference Table

Oval Conference Table

Barrel Shaped Conference Table

186-187 Prime E Space & Windsor (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 15:04

Page 190: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Aerofoil

188

tables

Delivered to a room of choice within 15 working days for MFC, 20 working days for Veneer and fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

The Aerofoil table offers a beautiful yet practical solution to your meeting room.

Optional power modules can be incorporated where laptops or other electrical equipment is required.

Aerofoil Boardroom TableAerofoil Boardroom Table

Aerofoil Boardroom Table

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

ABT26 2600 x 725 x 1300 1645 2401

Barrel shaped top with elliptical base with silver extruded upright.

Horizontal & vertical cable management. Seating up to 8 people.

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) MFC £ Veneer £

ABT40 4000 x 725 x 1300 2794 3927

Barrel shaped top with elliptical base with silver extruded upright.

Horizontal & vertical cable management. Seating up to 12 people.

Supplied in 2 x 2000mm sections.

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) MFC £

ABT28 2800 x 725 x 1300 1716

Barrel shaped top with elliptical base with silver extruded upright.

Horizontal & vertical cable management. Seating up to 8 people.

Power Module in closed position

Silver with Grey Trim /S(Standard)

Black with Black Trim /B(4 Week Lead Time)

White with Grey Trim /W(4 Week Lead Time)

Power Module Type 1Code £ Code £ Code £

PPM2/S 212 PPM2/B 230 PPM2/W 230

2 x Power sockets, 3.15 Amps individually fused.

Power Module Type 2Code £ Code £ Code £

PPM4/S 303 PPM4/B 361 PPM4/W 361

4 x Power sockets, 3.15 Amps individually fused.

Power & Data Module Type 1Code £ Code £ Code £

PPMD2/S 320 PPMD2/B 367 PPMD2/W 367

2 x Power sockets, 3.15 Amps individually fused & 2 x Cat5e data sockets. Includes 3 metre data cable.

Power & Data Module Type 2Code £ Code £ Code £

PPMD4/S 364 PPMD4/B 413 PPMD4/W 413

4 x Power sockets, 3.15 Amps individually fused & 2 x Cat5e data sockets. Includes 3 metre data cable.

5year

guarantee

MFC Colours Veneer Colours

Ash AshBeech Silver Autumn Cherry

Walnut WalnutOak OakWenge White

A/S A/SVB/S W/S W/SVS/S O/S O/SVC/S WE/S WH/S Mains Cable - Black PlugCode Width £PP3M 3000 21PP5M 5000 28PP7M 7000 32

Excellent Quality and

Value

188-189 Aerofoil & Chiltern (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 09:44

Page 191: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Chiltern

189

tables

The Chiltern collection effortlessly combines style with practicality. Supportive and strong and designed to complement a variety of different environments, this modern table collection is an elegant addition to any meeting or conference workspace.

Chiltern takes the classic aesthetics of real wood veneer tops and melds them with a sleek and highly durable arched metal leg, with an immaculate polished chrome surface.

5year

guarantee

Veneer Colours Leg Finish

Maple Oak Cherry Stained to

Walnut

ChromeCherry Cherry Stained to Rosewood

M O C W RW

Circular Table with Bull Nose Profile

Circular Table with Square Edge Profile

Oval Table with Bull Nose Profile

Rectangular Table with Square Edge Profile

Boat Shaped Table with Square Edge Profile

Code Dimensions Diam x H (mm) Veneer £

CHT 1 1200 x 750 2028

Radial Veneer.

Code Dimensions Diam x H (mm) Veneer £

CHT 5 1200 x 750 1716

Cable Trays (black only) Code CHT CT £84

Note: To prices shown please add +10% for Stain to Sample and +20% for Suiting.

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Veneer £

CHT 2 2500 x 750 x 1100 2288

CHT 3 3000 x 750 x 1100 2392

CHT 4 4000 x 750 x 1100 3692

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Veneer £

CHT 6 2000 x 750 x 1000 1690

CHT 7 2500 x 750 x 1000 1768

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Veneer £

CHT 8 2500 x 750 x 1220 2548

CHT 9 3000 x 750 x 1220 2704

CHT 10 4000 x 750 x 1220 3692

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

188-189 Aerofoil & Chiltern (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 09:44

Page 192: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Premier

190

tables

The Premier table range represents a commitment to providing a range of executive furniture with the highest achievable standards of elegance and quality. Table tops are 40mm thick with solid wood lippings all round and with a Bull nose profile, while the architectural style column leg frames provide perfect grounding for this elegant table solution. A choice of three veneers: Oak, Cherry and Maple and the additional ability to stain to sample ensures that Premier conference tables will enhance any meeting environment.

D Ended Oval Table with Bull Nose Profile

D Ended Oval Table with Bull Nose Profile

Circular Table with Bull Nose Profile

D Ended Oval Table with Bull Nose Profile

Code Dimensions Diam x H (mm) Veneer £

PRE 1 1220 x 720 1560

Radial Veneer

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Veneer £

PRE 2 2500 x 720 x 1100 2080

Seating up to 8 people.

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Veneer £

PRE 3 3000 x 720 x 1100 2288

Seating up to 10 people.

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Veneer £

PRE 4 4000 x 720 x 1100 3432

Seating up to 12 people.

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

5year

guarantee

Veneer Colours Leg Finish

Maple Oak Cherry Stained to

Walnut

GraphiteCherry Cherry Stained to Rosewood

M O C W RW

Note: To prices shown please add +10% for Stain to Sample and +20% for Suiting.

190-191 Premier & Corniche (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 09:48

Page 193: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Corniche

191

tables

The Corniche table range represents a commitment to providing a range of executive furniture with the highest achievable standards of elegance and quality. Table tops are 40mm thick with solid wood lippings all round and with a Bull nose profile. A choice of three veneers: Oak, Cherry and Maple and the additional ability to stain to sample ensures that Corniche conference tables will enhance any meeting environment.

5year

guarantee

Veneer Colours

Maple Oak Cherry Stained to

Walnut

Cherry Cherry Stained to Rosewood

M O C W RW

D Ended Oval Table with Bull Nose Profile

D Ended Oval Table with Bull Nose Profile

Circular Table with Bull Nose Profile

D Ended Oval Table with Bull Nose Profile

Code Dimensions Diam x H (mm) Veneer £

COR 1 1220 x 720 1976

Radial Veneer. Arrowhead leg frame.

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Veneer £

COR 2 2500 x 720 x 1100 2262

Arrowhead leg frames. Seating up to 8 people.

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Veneer £

COR 3 3000 x 720 x 1100 2418

Arrowhead leg frames. Seating up to 10 people.

Code Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Veneer £

COR 4 4000 x 720 x 1100 3718

Arrowhead leg frames. Seating up to 12 people.

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Note: To prices shown please add +10% for Stain to Sample and +20% for Suiting.

190-191 Premier & Corniche (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 09:48

Page 194: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Wooden Coffee Tables

192

tables

Reception coffee tables create a relaxed, informal atmosphere in which visitors will be at ease and made to feel welcome.

Tick Rectangular

Tock Rectangular

Rectangular Coffee Table

Tick Square

Tock Square

Circular Coffee Table

Code W x H x D (mm) £

CFT600 600 x 340 X 600 110

Beech, MDF Laminated

Code W x H x D (mm) £

414 600 x 330 x 600 233

Beech

Code Diam x H (mm) £

CCT750 750 x 400 210

25mm Panel End Cruciform Base

Code W x H x D (mm) £

CFT1200 1200 x 340 x 600 132

Beech, MDF Laminated

Code W x H x D (mm) £

415 1200 x 330 x 600 395

Beech

Code W x H x D (mm) £

RCT900 900 x 400 x 530 264

25mm Panel End Base

Delivered to a room of choice within 15 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

5year

guarantee

CCT750 & RCT900 Colours Tick Colour Tock Colour

Ash Beech BeechBeech Silver Autumn Cherry

Walnut Oak Wenge White

A/S BCH BCHB/S W/S S/S O/S C/S WE/S WH/S

Fantastic Quality &

Value!

CCT750 & RCT900 delivered within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

192-193 Coffee Tables (15).indd 1 04/12/2014 11:14

Page 195: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Glass Coffee Tables

193

tables

Choose from our attractive, yet affordable glass tables to enhance your reception area. Shaped in five different styles and all supported by chrome legs.

5year

guarantee

Rectangular Clear Glass

Circular Frosted

Square Clear

Circular Clear Glass

Kidney Shaped Frosted

Rectangular Clear

Code Diam x H (mm) £

GCT10 500 x 590 241

Silver Legs

Code W x H x D (mm) £

GTKIDNEY 635 x 430 x 1000 655

Code W x H x D (mm) £

GTRECTAN 900 x 350 x 500 265

Code W x H x D (mm) £

GCT9 1200 x 420 x 600 325

Brushed Steel & Silver Rod Design

Code Diam x H (mm) £

GTROUND 600 x 350 396

Code W x H x D (mm) £

GTSQUARE 500 x 350 x 500 206

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

8mm polished toughened glass

10mm polished toughened glass

192-193 Coffee Tables (15).indd 2 04/12/2014 11:14

Page 196: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

194

Bienvenida! Welcome! Benvenuto!

Inspire client and visitor confidence with one of our reception solutions. First impressions count, and with Invite you can create a welcoming, professional and functional reception at a price that suits. Allow us to meet and hear your requirement, design and plan your space.

Coco

The bold Coco collection of benches, sofas and armchairs creates a striking combination of contemporary and retro style on a solid beech frame, it can be found on page 229. Distinctive in shape, comfortable, generous in size, robust yet elegant – this versatile collection builds exciting landscapes that are suitable for reception, lounge and hospitality environments.

Stretch

Stretch is the landscape seating range designed to expand into any area, it can be found on page 228. With eight individual pieces, Stretch can be a simple armchair or a collection of multiple units. Ideal for relaxation or collaboration, Stretch can be configured to define breakout spaces. Each free-standing piece can be fitted with silver, beech or oak legs and two-tone fabric options are available.

Stretch seating unit

Reception Furniture & Soft Seating

2015 Range Highlight

HiveA stylish, flexible modular range of seating and accessories that offers superb spatial fit and functionality, creating Liquid Workspaces and dynamic layouts.

194-195 Reception Info - Contents (15).indd 1 02/12/2014 12:39

Page 197: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

195

reception furniture & soft seating contents

Invi

te

Rece

ptio

n C

offe

e Ta

bles

Soft

Seat

ing

HivePage 230-231

VenaloPage 228

CocoPage 229

Counter TopsPage 198

TockPage 201

Dot & Dash Page 216

JigsawPage 211

Face Page 207

Intro Page 222-223

ShelvingPage 199

Woodframe Page 202

Spirit LitePage 217

WoodframePage 202

SituPage 212

Moonstone Page 208

Elements Page 224-225

HatchPage 199

Forum Page 203

DishyPage 219

TandemPage 209

CascaraPage 226-227

TonicPage 218

SituPage 212-213

CocoPage 229

SolacePage 206

CascaraPage 227

GomezPage 205

Chamfer Page 220

Pigeon HolePage 199

JigsawPage 210-211

EncounterPage 204

StretchPage 228

GomezPage 205

TouchPage 221

DishyPage 219

TickPage 200

Tick - TockPage 200-201

Base Unit Page 196-197

InsitPage 214-215

SolacePage 206

Touch Page 221

194-195 Reception Info - Contents (15).indd 2 02/12/2014 12:39

Page 198: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Invite Modular Reception

196

reception furniture

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Wheelchair Access Base Units Standard 90o Radius Base UnitsCode W x H x D £

PRUT08-8P 800 x 727 x 800 311

PRUT12-8P 1200 x 727 x 800 351

PRUT14-8P 1400 x 727 x 800 370

PRUT16-8P 1600 x 727 x 800 386

PRUT18-8P 1800 x 727 x 800 413

Code Radius x H £

PRUTCR12-8P 1200 x 727 704

Code W x H x D £

PRUT16-8PW 1600 x 727 x 800 386

PRUT18-8PW 1800 x 727 x 800 413

Code Radius x H £

PRUTR9-8P 900 x 727 553

PRUTR12-8P 1200 x 727 704

Rectangular Base Units

Converse 90o Radius Base Units

Invite allows you to individually combine rectangular and curved base units to create a smart, professional yet affordable reception.

Note: These are plain top units. For tops drilled for counter tops or shelves specify at time of ordering and add 10%.

Note: 650mm deep units are available - ask for details

5year

guarantee

Invite MFC Finishes

Light Oak Verade Oak

Autumn Cherry

Apple Ash Walnut GreyMaple Beech Pear White English Oak

Fantastic Quality and

Value

196-197 Invite Reception 1 (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 12:47

Page 199: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Invite Modular Reception

197

reception furniture

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Note: These receptions are delivered built-up. Therefore customers must complete a questionnaire about access.

Note: When situated against a wall, the Lift-up Hatch and Gate unit must be firmly secured to wall. This is the customers responsibility and instructions will be left with the unit.

Standard 45o Radius Base Unit Converse 45o Radius Base UnitCode Radius x H £

PRUTR12-8PW 1200 x 727 704

With wheelchair access

Code W x H x D £

PRUTRP12-8P 1200 x 727 x 1200 704

Available in left or right hand. Right hand shown.

Code Radius x H £

PRUTS9-8P 900 x 727 554

PRUTS12-8P 1200 x 727 704

Code Radius x H £

PRUTCS12-8P 1200 x 727 704

Convex 90o Radius Base Unit

Ripple Base Unit

Note: These are plain top units. For tops drilled for counter tops or shelves specify at time of ordering and add 10%.

Note: 650mm deep units are available - ask for details

196-197 Invite Reception 1 (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 12:47

Page 200: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Invite Modular Reception

198

reception furniture

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Radius 90o Counter Tops Converse 90o Counter TopCode W x H x D £

PRCT08 800 x 465 x 325 182

PRCT12 1200 x 465 x 325 208

PRCT14 1400 x 465 x 325 219

PRCT16 1600 x 465 x 325 233

PRCT18 1800 x 465 x 325 245

Code W x H x D £

PRCTRP12 1200 x 465 x 325 434

Available in left or right hand. Right hand shown.

Code Radius x H x D £

PRCTR9 900 x 465 x 325 342

PRCTR12 1200 x 465 x 325 433

Code Radius x H x D £

PRCTCR12 1200 x 465 x 325 343

Rectangular Counter Tops

Ripple Counter Top

Note: 650mm deep units are available - ask for details

Prices to suit your

budget

First impressions count, and with our exceptional range of reception furniture you can create an open, welcoming, professional and functional reception at the price to suit your budget.

5year

guarantee

Invite MFC Finishes

Light Oak Verade Oak

Autumn Cherry

Apple Ash Walnut GreyMaple Beech Pear White English Oak

This picture shows optional concave shaped base and top units

198-199 Invite Reception 2 (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 12:51

Page 201: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Invite Shelving

199

reception furniture

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Radius 90o Units

Hatch & Gate Module

Converse 90o Unit

Pigeon Hole Unit

Code W x H x D £

PRS8 800 x 305 x 325 172

PRS12 1200 x 305 x 325 189

PRS14 1400 x 305 x 325 199

PRS16 1600 x 305 x 325 208

PRS18 1800 x 305 x 325 216

Code W x H x D £

PRSRP12 1200 x 305 x 325 217

Available in left or right hand. Right hand shown.

Code W x H x D £

PRSR9 900 x 305 x 325 189

PRSR12 1200 x 305 x 325 216

Code W x H x D £

PRHM-8 1000 x 727 x 800 440

Available in left or right hand. Right hand shown.

(See note 2)

Code W x H x D £

PRSCR12 1200 x 305 x 325 189

Code W x H x D £

PRPHU 560 x 439 x 300 195

Rectangular Units

Ripple Unit

Note 1: These Receptions are delivered built-up. Therefore customers must complete a questionnaire about access.

Note 2: When situated against a wall, the Lift-up Hatch and Gate unit must be firmly secured to wall. This is the customers responsibility and instructions will be left with the unit.

Reception shelves are also available in glass, please contact our sales team for price details.

See colours

available on opposite page

Cut-Back Leg Pigeon Hole Option

Lift-Up Hatch and Gate (See Note 2)

198-199 Invite Reception 2 (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 12:51

Page 202: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Tick

200

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Single Armchair

Tick Rectangular Coffee Table

Skid Base ChairCode £

D8 Heavy Duty Low Armchair 210

Seat Width: 520

Overall Width: 570

Seat Height: 440

Overall Height: 750

Seat Depth: 460

Overall Depth: 590

Code £

CFT1200 Beech 132

Width: 1200

Height: 340

Depth: 600

Code £

D9 Heavy Duty Skid Base Chair 178

Seat Width: 520

Overall Width: 570

Seat Height: 440

Overall Height: 750

Seat Depth: 460

Overall Depth: 580

Single Seat

Tick Square Coffee Table

Tick is a range of traditional steel framed low seating. Manufactured with durable 25mm steel coated in epoxy powder. Deep padded seat and back offers comfort for the user. Also available with 2, 3 and 4 seater settees, price upon request.

Fantastic Quality and

Value

Stocked in Blue where indicated, other colours are available on longer lead times, ask sales for details.

Code £

D7 Heavy Duty Low Chair 158

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width: 520

Overall Width: 570

Seat Height: 440

Overall Height: 750

Seat Depth: 460

Overall Depth: 580

Code £

CFT600 Beech 110

Dimensions (mm)

Width: 600

Height: 340

Depth: 600

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

The Single Armchair and the Skid Base Chair are delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days and fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled.

MFC TablesStock Fabric

Blue Beech

5year

guarantee

200-201 Tick & Tock (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 12:55

Page 203: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Tock

201

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Single Armchair

Tock Rectangular Coffee Table

Two Seater ArmchairCode £

455W Upholstered, Wooden Framed 338

Seat Width: 520

Overall Width: 540

Seat Height: 400

Overall Height: 730

Seat Depth: 460

Overall Depth: 560

Code £

415 Beech 395

Width: 1200

Height: 330

Depth: 600

Code £

452W Upholstered, Wooden Framed 708

Seat Width: 1030

Overall Width: 1070

Seat Height: 400

Overall Height: 730

Seat Depth: 460

Overall Depth: 560

Single Seat

Tock Square Coffee Table

The Tock range is an ideal option for staff rooms, student accommodation and reception areas. The classic wooden frame incorporates a heavy duty metal sub-frame for extra strength, a generously upholstered seat and back and complementary coffee tables.

5year

guarantee

Stocked in Blue where indicated, other colours are available on longer lead times, ask sales for details.

Strengthened metal sub-frame

Code £

450W Upholstered, Wooden Framed 276

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width: 520

Overall Width: 540

Seat Height: 400

Overall Height: 730

Seat Depth: 460

Overall Depth: 560

Code £

414 Beech 233

Dimensions (mm)

Width: 600

Height: 330

Depth: 600

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

The Two Seater Armchair is delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days and fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled.

Beech Tock TablesStock Fabric

Blue Beech

5year

guarantee

200-201 Tick & Tock (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 12:55

Page 204: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Woodframe

202

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Low Reception Armchair

Freestanding Coffee Table

Double Seat Low Reception ChairCode £

WR1A2 Beech Woodframe 417

Overall Height: 860

Overall Width: 600

Overall Depth: 520

Code £

WRRF Rectangular 283

Height: 380

Width: 890

Depth: 520

Code £

WR2 Beech Woodframe 451

Overall Height: 860

Overall Width: 1190

Overall Depth: 520

Low Reception Chair

Double Seat Low Reception Armchair

The hard-wearing Woodframe Reception range features a quality Beech frame and unique fabric edge detailing. The popular choice for waiting rooms, the Woodframe’s fully upholstered sculptured seat and back provide assured comfort.

The range includes single and double seats, with and without arms, and a matching wooden table.

Excellent Quality and

Value

Code £

WR1 Beech Woodframe 300

Dimensions (mm)

Overall Height: 860

Overall Width: 600

Overall Depth: 520

Code £

WR2A2 Beech Woodframe 566

Dimensions (mm)

Overall Height: 860

Overall Width: 1190

Overall Depth: 520

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

5year

guarantee

202-203 Woodframe & Fourm (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 13:02

Page 205: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Forum

203

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Unit Chair Right Arm

Unit Chair Concave & Convex Unit Coffee Table

Unit Chair Left ArmCode £

FR1AR Unit Chair R/A 303

Seat Width: 580

Overall Depth: 820

Seat Height: 410

Overall Height: 890

Seat Depth: 550

Overall Width: 680

Code £

FRCONCAVE Concave Segment 200

FRCONVEX Convex Segment 200

Concave Seat Width: 660

Concave Seat Height: 410

Concave Seat Depth: 545

Convex Seat Width: 490

Convex Seat Height: 410

Convex Seat Depth: 545

Code £

FR1AL Unit Chair L/A 303

Seat Width: 580

Overall Depth: 820

Seat Height: 410

Overall Height: 890

Seat Depth: 550

Overall Width: 680

Code £

FRT Unit Table 175

Width: 770

Height: 300

Depth: 770

Upholstered table available with Beech, Maple, Oak or Fabric Top

Unit Chair

Unit Armchair

The Forum is an affordable, flexible and fully modular seating solution.

The range includes full arm and non-arm segments, inner and outer corner sections to provide a multitude of configurations.

The Forum range is priced in a group 1 fabric which includes Ace, Advantage, Plaza and Phoenix. Please contact sales for further pricing.

Code £

FR1 Unit Chair 209

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width: 580

Overall Depth: 820

Seat Height: 410

Overall Height: 890

Seat Depth: 550

Overall Width: 580

Code £

FR1A2 Unit Armchair 396

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width: 580

Overall Depth: 820

Seat Height: 410

Overall Height: 890

Seat Depth: 550

Overall Width: 780 5year

guarantee

202-203 Woodframe & Fourm (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 13:02

Page 206: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Encounter

204

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Sofa Tub SeatCode £

EN4/F/BLUE Blue Fabric, Upholstered 335

EN2/PU/BLK Black Leather Look 335

Overall Width: 1185

Overall Height: 700

Overall Depth: 670

Single Tub Seat

Cost effective and practical, these attractive tub chairs and sofas will enhance any reception, lounge or informal meeting area. Stylish and comfortable, with a choice of fabric or leather finishes.

Perfect for Meeting

Areas

Code £

EN3/F/BLUE Blue Fabric, Upholstered 253

EN1/PU/BLK Black Leather Look 253

Dimensions (mm)

Overall Width: 670

Overall Height: 700

Overall Depth: 6702year

guarantee

Stock Colours

Leather Look

Blue Fabric

204-205 Encounter & Gomez (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 13:05

Page 207: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Gomez

205

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Wood Coffee Table - Metal Legs

Wood Coffee Table - Wooden Legs

Glass Coffee Table - Metal Legs

Glass Coffee Table - Wooden Legs

Code £

ELE-CH720-HPL-WHT-P 369

Height: 350 Width: 720 Depth: 720

Code £

ELE-CH720-HPL-WHT-W 369

Height: 350 Width: 720 Depth: 720

Code £

ELE-CH720-G-P 624

Height: 350 Width: 720 Depth: 720

Code £

ELE-CH720-G-W 624

Height: 350 Width: 720 Depth: 720

Gomez ChairCode £

GOM01 Gomez Single Unit Chair 329

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Height: 400

Overall Height: 760

Overall Width: 500

Overall Depth: 650

5year

guarantee

A chair that can be used singularly or collectively and reconfigured in minutes. A distinctive, sturdy, fully upholstered chair particularly suited to reception environments.

QualitySeating

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Table Options: replace -WHT with: table top beech -BCH £20

204-205 Encounter & Gomez (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 13:05

Page 208: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Solace

206

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Combining a generously proportioned seat with a compact overall footprint, our exclusive Solace range is the versatile seating solution for confined spaces. The exceptional comfort of the stylish tub design is finished with sleek brushed chrome legs.

Square Clear Table Rectangular Clear TableCode £

GTSQUARE 197

Width: 500

Height: 350

Depth: 500

Code £

GTRECTAN 253

Width: 900

Height: 350

Depth: 500

Solace Compact Tub ChairCode £

SL1/CRLEGS Fully Upholstered 403

SL1/LEGS Fully Upholstered 403

Dimensions (mm)

Overall Width: 640

Overall Height: 790

Overall Depth: 630

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Shown with SL1/CRLEGS

5year

guarantee

206-207 Solace & Face (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 14:30

Page 209: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Face

207

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Two Seat Sofa Coffee TableCode £

FA2/BL/BLK Bonded Leather 433

Overall Width: 1220

Overall Height: 430

Overall Depth: 770

Code £

FATAB/BCH Beech Top, Bonded Leather 200

Overall Width: 610

Overall Height: 410

Overall Depth: 610

Single SeatCode £

FA1/BL/BLK Bonded Leather 303

Dimensions (mm)

Overall Width: 775

Overall Height: 430

Overall Depth: 770

2year

guarantee

The Face range is open and inviting. It will be a welcome addition to any reception, breakout or office environment. Simply offered in

bonded leather for a very smart price.

Perfect for Reception

206-207 Solace & Face (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 14:31

Page 210: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Moonstone

208

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

The Moonstone is available in both single or double seat and upholstered in durable bonded leather. It has a robust metal frame with stylish chrome effect side guards.

Ideal for Reception &

MeetingAreas

Double SeatCode £

MS2/DBL/BLK Bonded Leather 757

Seat Width: 1200

Seat Height: 450

Seat Depth: 490

Overall Width: 1480

Overall Height: 795

Overall Depth: 820

Single Tub SeatCode £

MS1/BL/BLK Bonded Leather 557

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width: 595

Seat Height: 450

Seat Depth: 490

Overall Width: 880

Overall Height: 795

Overall Depth: 820

2year

guarantee

208-209 Moonstone & Tandem (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 14:34

Page 211: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Tandem

209

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

LinkCode £

TND02 Silver Satin Finish 175

Upholstered Unit, Steel Feet

Link Width: 430

Link Height: 450

Link Depth: 430

Two Seater BenchCode £

TND01 Silver Satin Finish 222

Upholstered Unit, Steel Feet

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Width: 1230

Seat Height: 450

Seat Depth: 430

Tandem defines and sets the parameters. With its under cut design and central cube the units configure into a multiplicity of shapes and layouts.

Priced in Camira Advantage/Phoenix fabric, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320.

Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Note:Manmade fabrics are not always the best choice for soft seating as it is less flexible and is more likely to pucker around curves.

We recommend natural wool as it upholsters curves more easily and needs less maintenance in high use areas.

Perfect for Breakout

114kg max.weight tolerance

5year

guarantee

TND02TND01

208-209 Moonstone & Tandem (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 14:34

Page 212: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Jigsaw

210

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 21 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Excellent Quality and

Value

Bold, contemporary and re-designed to make an impact. Jigsaw offers a range of angular and circular seating modules that show no foot detail anymore. We have also introduced three new shapes. Nine interlocking shapes create limitless configurations and creative seating landscapes.

Cube Stool

1100 Bench

Round Stool

Wedge Shaped Stool

Code £

JIG2-SQU-55 141

Height: 440 Width: 550 Depth: 550

Code £

JIG2-110 266

Height: 440 Width: 1100 Depth: 550

Code £

JIG2-DIA-55 131

Height: 440 Dia: 550

Code £

JIG2-WED 175

Height: 440 Width: 550 Depth: 550

V Section Bench

1650 Bench

Code £

JIG2-PIECE 425

Overall Dimensions (mm)

Height: 440 Width: 1550 Depth: 770

Code £

JIG2-165 357

Overall Dimensions (mm)

Height: 440 Width: 1650 Depth: 550

210-211 Jigsaw (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 14:38

Page 213: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Jigsaw

211

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 21 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Low Cube Stool

Square Coffee Tables

High Cube StoolCode £

JIG2-SQU-80 248

Height: 350 Width: 800 Depth: 800

Code £

JIG2T-CH-SQU45-HPL-SAT (MFC) 425 Square 450mm Coffee Table, Satin Base

Height: 450 Width: 450 Depth: 450

JIG2T-CH-SQU70-HPL-SAT (MFC) 505 Square 700mm Coffee Table, Satin Base

Height: 450 Width: 700 Depth: 700

Code £

JIG2-SQU-45 234

Height: 600 Width: 450 Depth: 450

Low Round Stool

Round Coffee Tables

Code £

JIG2-DIA-80 228

Overall Dimensions (mm)

Height: 350 Width: 800 Depth: 800

Code £

JIG2T-CH-DIA45-HPL-SAT (MFC) 448 Diameter 450mm Coffee Table, Satin Base

Height: 450 Diameter 450

JIG2T-CH-DIA70-HPL-SAT (MFC) 505 Diameter 700mm Coffee Table, Satin Base

Height: 450 Diameter 700

5year

guarantee

Table Options:

Base Replace (SAT) with (WHT) for white £17

Table Top Colour Replace (SAT) with (RED) for red £17

Note: Dining Tables are available ask for details.

High Pressure Laminate Tops are available.

Standard Features

Fully upholstered modular range for flexibility and multiple configurations.

9 interlocking shapes available.

Lightweight for easy manoeuvrability.

Limitless configurations.

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320.

Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Delivery & Installation

Included

210-211 Jigsaw (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 14:38

Page 214: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Situ

212

reception & breakout

Single Bench Unit with Arm

Double Bench Unit with Arm

Table Unit with Grey Top

Single Bench Unit with Arms

Double Bench Unit with Arms

Mobile Storage Unit with Grey Top

Single Bench Unit

Double Bench Unit

Universal Link Unit

Code £

SB600 270

Dimensions (mm)

Width: 600 Depth: 600 Height: 440

Code £

SB1200 385

Dimensions (mm)

Width: 1200 Depth: 600 Height: 440

Code £

SB90 385

Dimensions (mm)

Width: 1150 Depth: 600 Height: 440

Code £

SB600/A With Universal Arm 407

Dimensions (mm)

Width: 675 Depth: 600 Height: 440

Code £

SB1200/A With Universal Arm 523

Width: 1275 Depth: 600 Height: 440

Code £

SBT600 308

Width: 600 Depth: 600 Height: 440

Code £

SB600/A2 With Arms 545

Dimensions (mm)

Width: 750 Depth: 600 Height: 440

Code £

SB1200/A2 With Arms 660

Width: 1350 Depth: 600 Height: 440

Code £

SBTS600 391

Width: 600 Depth: 600 Height: 440

5year

guarantee

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details.

Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320.

A Compact range of modular chair and bench units that provide posture comfort along with additional table/storage units to provide a simple effective solution for waiting and reception areas with the ability to mix and match fabrics.

Delivery & Installation

Included

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Arm Height:620

Arm Height:620

Arm Height:620

Arm Height:620

212-213 Situ (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 14:41

Page 215: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Situ

213

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Single Chair Unit with Arms

Island Unit

Double Chair UnitCode £

SC600/A2 682

Width: 750 Depth: 600 Height: 440

Back: Width: 520 Height: 480

Code £

SCX90 x 4 2090

Code £

SC1200 660

Width: 1200 Depth: 600 Height: 440

Back (each): Width: 520 Height: 480

Single Chair Unit

Double Chair Unit with Arms

Code £

SC600 407

Dimensions (mm)

Width: 600 Depth: 600 Height: 440

Back: Width: 520 Height: 480

Code £

SC1200/A2 935

Dimensions (mm)

Width:1350 Depth: 600 Height: 440

Back: Width: 520 Height: 480

5year

guarantee

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details.

Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320.

Shaped Backrest for

Great Posture Comfort!

SCX90 x 4

212-213 Situ (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 14:41

Page 216: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Insit

214

reception & breakout

Chair Unit with Single Backrest

Chair Unit with Double Backrest

Chair Unit with Single Backrest

Chair Unit with Double Backrest

Chair Unit with Single Backrest

Armchair Unit with Single Backrest

Code £

IL600 479

Dimensions (mm)

Width: 600 Depth: 550 Height: 830

Code £

IL600/A2 830

Dimensions (mm)

Width: 860 Depth: 550 Height: 830

Code £

IL600/AR Right Hand Arm 655

Width: 730 Depth: 550 Height: 830

Code £

IL1200 743

Width: 1200 Depth: 550 Height: 830

Code £

IL600/AL Left Hand Arm 655

Width: 730 Depth: 550 Height: 830

Code £

IL1200/AR Right Hand Arm 919

Width: 1330 Depth: 550 Height: 830

Sharp and stylish low level modular system which can be used to form large configurations that are ideal for meetings and public spaces.

5year

guarantee

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details.

Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320.

214-215 Insit (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 14:46

Page 217: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Insit

215

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Armchair Unit with Double Backrest

Concave Link Unit

Corner Unit

Coffee Table

Chair Unit with Double Backrest

Convex Link Unit

Code £

IL1200/AL Left Hand Arm 919

Dimensions (mm)

Width: 1330 Depth: 550 Height: 830

Code £

ILX/90 677

Dimensions (mm)

Width: 1180 Depth: 550 Height: 830

Code £

IL1200/A2 1095

Width: 1330 Depth: 550 Height: 830

Code £

ILV/90 952

Width: 1000 Depth: 550 Height: 830

Code £

ILC/90 765

Width: 680 Depth: 950 Height: 830

Code £

SBT600 Right Hand Arm 308

Width: 600 Depth: 600 Height: 415

5year

guarantee

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details.

Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320.Delivery & Installation

Included

214-215 Insit (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 14:46

Page 218: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Dot and Dash

216

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Incorporating a modern, space saving design, Dot & Dash are the stylish compact answer to any contemporary reception, touch down or breakout area. As the names imply, Dot has a tubular design, while its partner Dash is a compact square. Dot & Dash have padded foam seats for exceptional comfort and can be selected with or without legs. Priced in Camira’s Advantage and Phoenix fabrics, for pricing on other fabrics, leathers and vinyls, please contact sales.

Dot Stool

Dash Stool

Dot Stool with Legs

Dash Stool with Legs

Code £

DOT 137

Code £

DASH 144

Code £

DOT/CRLEGS 208

DOT/LEGS 208

Code £

DASH/CRLEGS 215

DASH/LEGS 215

5year

guarantee

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320.

Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Dimensions (mm)

Height: 400

Diameter/Width: 470

Shown with DASH/LEGS

Shown with DOT/CRLEGS

216-217 Dot & Dash Spirit Lite (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 14:49

Page 219: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Spirit Lite

217

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Providing seated comfort with relaxed softness and stylish clear design, Spirit Lite offers many variants by combining fabrics and frame

options. A distinctive range of seating which will compliment a wide variety of environments giving unique character.

Wire Base Chair Chrome Pedestal Base ChairCode £

STL2C Fully Upholstered 426

Chrome Wire Base

Back Height: 370

Seat Height: 440

Seat Depth: 480

Overall Depth: 680

Overall Width: 570

Back Width: 540

Code £

STL3C Fully Upholstered 524

Chrome Pedestal Base Swivel

Back Height: 370

Seat Height: 440

Seat Depth: 480

Overall Depth: 680

Overall Width: 570

Back Width: 540

Swivel Base Chair

Four Leg Stool

Code £

STL1C Fully Upholstered 468

Polished Aluminium 4 Star Base with Glides

Dimensions (mm)

Back Height: 370

Seat Height: 440

Seat Depth: 480

Overall Depth: 680

Overall Width: 570

Back Width: 540

Code £

STS1C Fully Upholstered 403

Four Leg Stool Chrome Frame

Dimensions (mm)

Back Height: 250

Seat Height: 790

Seat Depth: 430

Overall Depth: 490

Overall Width: 490

Back Width: 390

5year

guarantee

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320.

Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Note:Manmade fabrics are not always the best choice for soft seating as it is less flexible and is more likely to pucker around curves.

We recommend natural wool as it upholsters curves more easily and needs less maintenance in high use areas.

216-217 Dot & Dash Spirit Lite (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 14:49

Page 220: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Upholstered Chair Chrome ArmsCode £

TC04 Upholstered Chair 450

Chrome Sled Base

Dimensions (mm)

Overall Height: 850

Overall Depth: 590

Overall Width: 540

Tonic

218

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Detailed stitching enhances the clean lines of Tonic and is further enhanced by an endless arm detail. Swivel or fixed bases are available with a choice of chrome, silver or black finish.

5year

guarantee

Upholstered Chair Chrome Arms Upholstered ChairCode £

TC02 Upholstered Chair 494

Polished Aluminium 4 Star Base Swivel

Overall Height: 850

Overall Depth: 590

Overall Width: 540

Code £

TC03 Upholstered Chair 383

Chrome Sled Base

Overall Height: 850

Overall Depth: 590

Overall Width: 490

Upholstered ChairCode £

TC01 Upholstered Chair 426

Polished Aluminium 4 Star Base Swivel

Dimensions (mm)

Overall Height: 850

Overall Depth: 590

Overall Width: 490

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

218-219 Tonic & Dishy (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 14:55

Page 221: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Dishy

219

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Dishy is a stylish seating solution for corporate or hotel environments. A high and low back chair, with swivel or 4 legged base is

presented with a sofa and matching table range.

Low Back Swivel Frame Chair

Sofa 4 Legged

High Back 4 Legged Frame Chair

Round Coffee Table

Code £

DISHY1/SWIVEL/W White Frame 918

DISHY1/SWIVEL/CR Chrome Frame 1001

Overall Height: 753

Overall Depth: 664

Overall Width: 781

Code £

DISHYSOFA/W White Frame 1110

DISHYSOFA/CR Chrome Frame 1161

Overall Height: 751

Overall Depth: 664

Overall Width: 1600

Code £

DISHY2/4LEG/W White Frame 708

DISHY2/4LEG/CR Chrome Frame 732

Overall Height: 938

Overall Depth: 696

Overall Width: 783

Code £

DISHYCIRC/W White Base 340

DISHYCIRC/CR Chrome Base 402

Height: 365 Diameter: 750

Table Top Options:

White, Oak, Beech, Maple, or Walnut

Low Back 4 Legged Frame Chair

High Back Swivel Frame Chair

Code £

DISHY1/4LEG/W White Frame 686

DISHY1/4LEG/CR Chrome Frame 709

Dimensions (mm)

Overall Height: 756

Overall Depth: 654

Overall Width: 781

Code £

DISHY2/SWIVEL/W White Frame 945

DISHY2/SWIVEL/CR Chrome Frame 1025

Dimensions (mm)

Overall Height: 935

Overall Depth: 696

Overall Width: 783

5year

guarantee

Priced in Band 2 fabrics, as we do not recommend Band 1 for this product, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320. Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Other Coffee Tables Available:

Tube 4 Legged Coffee Tables £

DISHYCOFFEE/W White Legs 226

H365 x D600 x W900

DISHYCOFFEE/CR Chrome Legs 246

H365 x D600 x W900

Long Tube 4 Legged Coffee Tables DISHYCOFFEE/L/W White Legs 262

H365 x D600 x W1200

DISHYCOFFEE/L/CR Chrome Legs 285

H365 x D600 x W1200

DISHYCOFFEE/L/W shown in picture.

218-219 Tonic & Dishy (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 14:55

Page 222: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Chamfer

220

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Two Seat Sofa OptionsCode £

CHAM3 Two Seat Sofa 1124

Overall Height: 830

Overall Width: 1400

Overall Depth: 740

Code £

SQUARE CUSHION 73

Size: 400 x 400

BOLSTER 73

Size: 450 x 150

Base Rail Brushed Chrome as standard.

For White Base Rail please quote W when ordering.

Tub Chair

This stylish tub chair takes its name from its elegant chamfered corners. The Chamfer range offers a chair and matching two-seater sofa. The compact footprint, and option of a swivel-based chair, makes Chamfer the ideal choice for breakout areas and student accommodation. The choice of a white or silver chrome base rail provides the stylish finishing touch to complement fabric choices.

Excellent Quality and

Style

Code £

CHAM1 Tub Chair 740

CHAM2 Tub Chair with Swivel Base 1086

Dimensions (mm)

Overall Height: 830

Overall Width: 750

Overall Depth: 740

5year

guarantee

Priced in Band 2 fabrics, as we do not recommend Band 1 for this product, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320.

Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

220-221 Chamfer & Touch (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 14:58

Page 223: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Touch

221

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Square Connecting Table

4 Point Connecting Table

T Point Connecting Table

Asteroid Circular Table

Code £

TOUCH SQU Chrome Legs 166

Height: 225 Width: 440 Depth: 440

Code £

TOUCH 4STAR Chrome Legs 362

Height: 225 Width: 770 Depth: 770

Code £

TOUCH T Chrome Legs 287

Height: 225 Width: 770 Depth: 605

Code £

ASTTAB With coloured cut-outs 501

Height: 365 Diameter: 750

Bench Unit

3 Point Connecting Table

Code £

TOUCH 1200 Chrome Legs 473

Dimensions (mm)

Height: 450 Width: 1200 Depth: 460

Code £

TOUCH 3STAR Chrome Legs 332

Dimensions (mm)

Height: 225 Width: 895 Depth: 895

5year

guarantee

Upholstery available in fabric, leather and vinyl.

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320.

Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Beautifully simple, the modular design means that Touch looks good as a single bench or as a large configuration to dramatically fill an atrim. Perfectly complemented by the Asteroid table.

Asteroid Table Top Options:

(W) White, (O) Oak, (B) Beech, (M) Maple, (WAL) Walnut

Colour of Asteroid must be specified.

220-221 Chamfer & Touch (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 14:58

Page 224: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Intro

222

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Single Seat

Petal Mobile Table

Single Seat & Left Hand ArmCode £

INT301 368

Back Height: 340

Seat Height: 430

Overall Width: 770

Overall Depth: 770

Code £

PT01 Silver Finish 395

White laminate top and castors

Width: 380

Height: 360

Depth: 480

Code £

INT302 459

Back Height: 340

Seat Height: 430

Overall Width: 770

Overall Depth: 770

Single Bench

Single Seat & Right Hand Arm

A simple, stylish lounge and reception solution, with endless possibilities of configuration; Intro is available with or without backrests and arms. Attractive as a single or modular option, this range comes fully upholstered and with a satin silver skid frame.

Code £

INT300 275

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Height: 430

Overall Width: 770

Overall Depth: 770

Code £

INT303 459

Dimensions (mm)

Back Height: 340

Seat Height: 430

Overall Width: 770

Overall Depth: 7705year

guarantee

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320.

Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Note:Manmade fabrics are not always the best choice for soft seating as it is less flexible and is more likely to pucker around curves.

We recommend natural wool as it upholsters curves more easily and needs less maintenance in high use areas.

222-223 Intro (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 15:02

Page 225: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Intro

223

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Double Seat

Power & Data Module 45 Degree Linking Unit ( No Leg)

Double Seat & Left Hand ArmCode £

INT305 565

Back Height: 340

Seat Height: 430

Overall Width: 1220

Overall Depth: 770

Code £

INT331 803

Seat Height: 570

Overall Depth: 770

Overall Width: 270

2 x 13 Amp Power Sockets, 2 x Data Cable

Ports, Nylon Glides, Aluminium Roll Over Lid

Code £

INT306 652

Back Height: 340

Seat Height: 430

Overall Width: 1520

Overall Depth: 770

Code £

INT308 288

Seat Height: 430

Overall Depth: 770

Overall Width: 570

Double Bench

Double Seat & Right Hand Arm

Code £

INT304 388

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Height: 430

Overall Width: 1220

Overall Depth: 770

Code £

INT307 652

Dimensions (mm)

Back Height: 340

Seat Height: 430

Overall Width: 1520

Overall Depth: 770

5year

guarantee

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320.

Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Note:Manmade fabrics are not always the best choice for soft seating as it is less flexible and is more likely to pucker around curves.

We recommend natural wool as it upholsters curves more easily and needs less maintenance in high use areas.90 Degree Linking Unit

Code £

INT309 Central Leg 354

INT310 Central and End Leg 397

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Height: 430

Overall Depth: 770

Overall Width: 770

222-223 Intro (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 15:02

Page 226: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Elements Core

224

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Single Seat with Back

Double Seat with Back

Wedge

Single Seat with Corner Back

Double Seat with Corner Back

Code £

ELE1-SB-W 346

Seat Height: 420 Seat Width: 720

Seat Depth: 500 Overall Height: 760

Overall Width: 730 Overall Depth: 720

Code £

ELE2-DB-W 538

Seat Height: 420 Seat Width: 1230

Seat Depth: 500 Overall Height: 760

Overall Width: 1230 Overall Depth: 720

Code £ Code £

ELE90-W 380 ELE45-W 272

Overall Height: 420

Overall Width: 725

Overall Depth: 725

Code £

ELE1-CBR-W (R/H) ELE1-CBL-W (L/H) 436

Seat Height: 420 Seat Width: 720

Seat Depth: 500 Overall Height: 760

Overall Width: 940 Overall Depth: 720

Code £

ELE2-CBR-W (R/H) ELE2-CBL-W (L/H) 618

Seat Height: 420 Seat Width: 1220

Seat Depth: 500 Overall Height: 760

Overall Width: 1445 Overall Depth: 720

Single Seat Bench

Double Seat Bench

Two Seat Sofa

Code £

ELE1-W 255

Dimensions (mm)

Overall Height: 420

Overall Width: 720

Overall Depth: 720

Code £

ELE2-W 380

Dimensions (mm)

Overall Height: 420

Overall Width: 1230

Overall Depth: 720

Code £

ELE2-ALR-W Double Seat with Back 1037

Dimensions (mm)

Seat Height: 420 Seat Width: 1440

Seat Depth: 500 Overall Height: 760

Overall Width: 1860 Overall Depth: 7205year

guarantee

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320.

Optional Legs Beech Wood Legs as Standard For Eco Chrome: Replace W with PFor Height Adjustable Echo Chrome: Replace W with L (Eco chrome high gloss silver paint finish with an appearance similar to polished aluminium).

90o Wedge 45o Wedge

With creative use of fabric you can make Elements Core suit any corporate, hospitality or educational environment. Stylish but affordable, simple yet clever, Elements Modular system is easy to link and reconfigure. These units have endless possibilities.

Suggested Uses/Environments•Colleges and Universities•Reception Areas/Break Out Areas•Open Plan/Office•Communal Areas

224-225 Elements (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 15:04

Page 227: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Elements Plus

225

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Plus Panel for Single Seater

Plus Panel for 2 Seat Sofa

Plus Cut Back Finishing Panel

Plus Panel for 2 Seater

Plus Connecting Arm Panel

Power Units/Cushions

Code £

ELE+PAN1AC With Arms 323

Height: 1225 Width: 920 Depth: 50

Code £

ELE+PAN2SC With Arms 391

Height: 1225 Depth: 50

Code £

ELE+PANAZFR (right) Finishing Panel 185

ELE+PANAZFL (left) Finishing Panel 185

Height: 1225 Width: 720 Depth: 50

Code £

ELE+PAN2C No Arms 304

Height: 1225 Width: 720 Depth: 50

Code £

ELE+PANAC For Single & 2 Seater 196

Height: 1225 Width: 720 Depth: 50

Code £ELE-POW42 420 High Power Unit 736 Height: 420 Width: 270 Depth: 720ELE-POW60 600 High Power Unit 770 Height: 600 Width: 270 Depth: 720ELE-CUSH Cushions (Min order 2) 23 Width: 355 Depth: 355

Plus Panel for Single Seater

Plus Panel for 2 Seater

Plus Finishing Arm Panel

Code £

ELE+PAN1C No Arms 289

Dimensions (mm)

Height: 1225 Width: 720 Depth: 50

Code £

ELE+PAN2AC With Arms 339

Dimensions (mm)

Height: 1225 Width: 720 Depth: 50

Code £

ELE+PANAFR (right) For Single & 2 Seater 185

ELE+PANAFL (left) For Single & 2 Seater 185

Dimensions (mm)

Height: 1225 Width: 720 Depth: 50

Element Plus offers retro fitted acoustic panels to create more private areas in open spaces. The panels are connected with zips which makes it easy to install and reconfigure.Clever sewing panels on the high backs allow you to be creative with fabric to suit any corporate, hospitality or educational environment.Suggested Uses/Environments•Colleges and Universities•Reception Areas•Break Out/Open Plan Areas

5year

guarantee

224-225 Elements (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 15:05

Page 228: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Cascara

226

reception & breakout

High Back Swivel Chair

High Back Swivel Chair

Medium Back Swivel Chair

Medium Back Swivel Chair

High Back 4 Leg Frame

High Back 4 Leg Frame

Medium Back 4 Leg Frame

Medium Back 4 Leg Frame

Code £

CASHBSWWH Fabric 850

CASHBSWWH Leather 1060

Moulded Plywood Shell

White Lacquered Outer Shell

CMHR Foam, Protective Feet

Chromed 4 Star Swivel Base

Overall Dimensions (mm)

H1010 W680 D680

Code £

CASHBSWWA Fabric 850

CASHBSWWA Leather 1060

Moulded Plywood Shell

Walnut Veneered Outer Shell

CMHR Foam, Protective Feet

Chromed 4 Star Swivel Base

Overall Dimensions (mm)

H1010 W680 D680

Code £

CASSWWH Fabric 745

CASSWWH Leather 941

Moulded Plywood Shell

White Lacquered Outer Shell

CMHR Foam, Protective Feet

Chromed 4 Star Swivel Base

Overall Dimensions (mm)

H760 W680 D680

Code £

CASSWWA Fabric 745

CASSWWA Leather 941

Moulded Plywood Shell

Walnut Veneered Outer Shell

CMHR Foam, Protective Feet

Chromed 4 Star Swivel Base

Overall Dimensions (mm)

H760 W680 D680

Code £

CASHBWLWH Fabric 850

CASHBWLWH Leather 1060

Moulded Plywood Shell

White Lacquered Outer Shell

CMHR Foam, Protective Felt Pads

Wooden 4 Legged Frame

Overall Dimensions (mm)

H1020 W630 D600

Code £

CASHBWLWA Fabric 850

CASHBWLWA Leather 1060

Moulded Plywood Shell

Walnut Veneered Outer Shell

CMHR Foam, Protective Felt Pads

Wooden 4 Legged Frame

Overall Dimensions (mm)

H1020 W630 D600

Code £

CASWLWH Fabric 745

CASWLWH Leather 941

Moulded Plywood Shell

White Lacquered Outer Shell

CMHR Foam, Protective Felt Pads

Wooden 4 Legged Frame

Overall Dimensions (mm)

H770 W630 D600

Code £

CASWLWA Fabric 745

CASWLWA Leather 941

Moulded Plywood Shell

Walnut Veneered Outer Shell

CMHR Foam, Protective Felt Pads

Wooden 4 Legged Frame

Overall Dimensions (mm)

H770 W630 D600

New for 2015 is our Cascara visitor and lounge chair range of fully upholstered seating consisting of medium or high back styles in swivel or four legged versions.

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

226-227 Cascara (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 15:12

Page 229: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Cascara

227

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details.

Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320.

5year

guarantee

High Back Swivel Chair

Circular Coffee Table

Medium Back Swivel Chair

Squircle Coffee Table

High Back 4 Leg Frame Medium Back 4 Leg FrameCode £

CASHBSWFU Fabric 734

CASHBSWFU Leather 1154

Moulded Plywood Shell

Fully Upholstered

CMHR Foam, Protective Feet

Chromed 4 Star Swivel Base

Overall Dimensions (mm)

H1010 W680 D680

Code £

CASCCT 398

700mm Diameter 25mm MFC

Circular Top

Stylish Chrome 4 Star Base

Protective Feet

Overall Dimensions (mm)

H425 W700 D700

Code £

CASSWFU Fabric 661

CASSWFU Leather 1017

Moulded Plywood Shell

Fully Upholstered

CMHR Foam, Protective Feet

Chromed 4 Star Swivel Base

Overall Dimensions (mm)

H760 W680 D680

Code £

CASSCT 398

600 x 600 25mm MFC

Squircle Top

Stylish Chrome 4 Star Base

Protective Feet

Overall Dimensions (mm)

H425 W600 D600

Code £

CASHBWLFU Fabric 745

CASHBWLFU Leather 1165

Moulded Plywood Shell

Fully Upholstered

CMHR Foam, Protective Feet

Wooden 4 Legged Frame

Overall Dimensions (mm)

H1020 W630 D600

Code £

CASWLFU Fabric 671

CASWLFU Leather 1028

Moulded Plywood Shell

Fully Upholstered

CMHR Foam, Protective Feet

Wooden 4 Legged Frame

Overall Dimensions (mm)

H770 W630 D600

Coffee Table MFC Finishes

Ash Beech Silver WalnutAutumn Cherry

Oak Wenge White

A/S B/S C/S S/S O/S W/S WE/S WH/S

226-227 Cascara (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 15:13

Page 230: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Stretch

228

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

With eight pieces, Stretch can be a simple armchair or a collection of multiple units. Silver, Beech or Oak legs and two-tone fabric options are available.

5year

guarantee

Armchair

2 Seat with Left Arm Only

Venalo Coffee Table

2 Seat with Arms

2 Seat with Right Arm Only

3 Seat with Arms

3 Seat with Left Arm Only

Corner Unit

3 Seat with Right Arm Only

Code £

STRETCH1 Fabric 982

Overall Dimensions (mm)

H770 W1000 D800

Code £

STRETCH2/L Fabric 1392

Overall Dimensions (mm)

H770 W1470 D800

Code £

VENALO/TC 466

Overall Dimensions (mm)

H400 D600

Code £

STRETCH2 Fabric 1549

H770 W1750 D800

Code £

STRETCH2/R Fabric 1392

H770 W1470 D800

Code £

STRETCH3 Fabric 1898

H770 W2340 D800

Code £

STRETCH3/L Fabric 1709

H770 W2070 D800

Code £

STRETCHCO Fabric 1048

H770 W800 D800

Code £

STRETCH3/R Fabric 1709

H770 W2070 D800

Priced in Band 2 fabrics, as we do not recommend Band 1 for this seating product, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320.

Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.

Options Leg optionsSquare Cushion £70 SIF Silver (400mm x 400mm) B Beech

Bolster £70 O Oak (450mm x 150mm)

Chrome Trumpet Base, Glass Top Coffee Table.

Other sizes of Venalo Tables are available, please ask sales for details.

228-229 Stretch & Coco (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 15:21

Page 231: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Coco

229

reception & breakout

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Single Seat Bench with Straight Back

Two Seat Bench with Straight Back

Armchair with Straight Back

Two Seat Sofa with Straight Back

Code £

COCO1-SB-BCH Beech Frame 997

Height: 770 Width: 1000 Depth: 800

Code £

COCO2-SB-BCH Beech Frame 1552

Height: 770 Width: 1775 Depth: 800

Code £

COCO1A-SB-BCH Beech Frame 1116

Height: 770 Width: 1000 Depth: 800

Code £

COCO2A-SB-BCH Beech Frame 1671

Height: 770 Width: 1775 Depth: 800

Single Seat Bench

Two Seat Bench

Glass Top Coffee Table

Code £

COCO1-BCH Beech Frame 788

Overall Dimensions (mm)

Height: 420 Width: 1000 Depth: 800

Code £

COCO2-BCH Beech Frame 1320

Overall Dimensions (mm)

Height: 420 Width: 1775 Depth: 800

Code £

COCOT-CH-100x60-BCH Solid Beech 1331

Dimensions (mm)

Height: 350 Width: 1000 Depth: 600

5year

guarantee

Priced in Band 1 fabrics, for other fabric pricing please ask sales for details. Additionally, see our fabric information on page 320.

Buttons on back cushion are in the fabric as the back cushions. For other specifications prices on application.

Please add a choice of fabric and colour to your order.Seating frame colour options Table colour options replace -BCH with: replace -BCH with:

oak -OAK add £46 oak -OAK add £314 walnut -WAL add £46 walnut -WAL add £408 cherry -CHE add £46 stain to match -MAT add £64

The bold Coco collection of benches, sofas and armchairs creates a striking combination of contemporary and retro style on a solid beech frame. Distinctive in shape, comfortable, generous in size, robust yet elegant – this versatile collection builds exciting landscapes that are suitable for reception, lounge and hospitality environments. Coco has been designed with sustainability in mind, using an environmental friendly wood construction, recyclable and recycled foam from 100% FSC controlled sources.

Shown in Walnut

228-229 Stretch & Coco (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 15:21

Page 232: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Hive is a stylish, flexible modular range of seating and accessories that offers superb spatial fit and functionality, creating Liquid Workspaces and dynamic layouts.

Whether creating a totally new workspace or integrating with existing furniture, Hive creates multi-functional spaces that allow people to work in the way that is most stimulating and productive for them.

Hive’s modular system is available with or without legs, making it easy to design flexible spaces in a variety of environments, offices, universities and libraries, plus airports and transport stations.

Rarely does one solution fit all, that’s why Hive can be configured to provide seating and work tables for open spaces, semi- private and private spaces in an infinite number of situations.

Flexible furniture for productive people• Numerous configuration possibilities• Establish different zones with no need to build walls• Supports diverse working styles• Creates inspiring environments to attract and retain the best talent• Enables bespoke design of activity based settings• Allows visual, territorial and acoustic privacy for individuals and groups

If this range interests you please contact our sales team for more details.

Focus.

Hive

230

reception & breakout

2600

5300

1200

2400

4800

3876

4300

2000

230-231 Hive (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 15:40

Page 233: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Collaborate.

Connect.Socialise.

Hive

231

reception & breakout

230-231 Hive (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 15:40

Page 234: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

232

Contemporary and classic design styles are apparent throughout this section. The seating is bright and comfortable, the tables sturdy yet stylish.

The consistently popular Gloss tables returns for 2015. The striking design of the ‘squarial’ Gloss table on page 244 combines the shape of a square with the softness of a circle.

The Retro brings a breath of fresh air to any cafe or breakout space. Available in 5 bright and cheerful colours with matching tables made from solid wood and polypropylene, these are sure to be very popular in 2015.

Cafe & Dining

2015 Range Highlight

The ever popular Artist and Stork seating ranges return this year to provide unbeatable value for money. When complimented by our new table ranges Orlando, Forza and Ramiro, these products create perfect dining situations where style is needed on a lower budget.

This is boosted by the products coming direct from stock on our 10 day rapid delivery service.

232-233 Cafe Intro - Contents (15).indd 1 02/12/2014 12:30

Page 235: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

cafe & dining contents

Tables Page 234

Tables & Benches Page 236

ChairPage 235

Tables Page 239

Chairs Page 241

Tables Page 244

Tables Page 234

Folding Tables Page 237

ChairsPage 240

BenchesPage 239

ChairsPage 242

ChairsPage 245

TablesPage 245

Tables Page 235

Chairs Page 234-235

Chair Page 234

Chairs Page 241

Chairs Page 243

Orla

ndo

Con

tour

Plu

s

Stor

k

Envi

ro

Moc

haG

loss

Tab

les

Forz

aPo

lyfo

ld

Banq

uet

Xpre

sso

1

Retro

Ram

iroSt

rata

Artis

tVe

ntIc

e &

Zes

t

233

Various Page 238

Din

ing

Tabl

es

232-233 Cafe Intro - Contents (15).indd 2 02/12/2014 12:31

Page 236: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Forza Dining Table Dimensions (mm)

Height: 755 Width: 700 Depth: 700

Forza Poseur Table Dimensions (mm)

Height: 1075 Dia: 700

DiningThe Orlando is one of the markets’ most popular due to its competitive price and “anti spin“ solid construction. Made from top grade cast iron, with a powder coated finish. Adjustable feet are also included for versatility in any environment. The chrome version brings a touch of class with its high quality chrome plated column. Perfect for situations where style is needed on a lower budget.

The Forza is an affordable and simple base in a slimline design. Made from high grade cast iron with a powder coated finish.

Code £

ZORLDRB7 Round Top - Black Column 158

ZORLDRC7 Round Top - Chrome Column 170

ZORLDSB77 Square Top - Black Column 135

ZORLDSC77 Square Top - Chrome Column 147

Artist Chair/ Square dining table with 25mm beech MFC top

Code £

ZORLPRB7 Round Top - Black Column 163

ZORLPRC7 Round Top - Chrome Column 178

Mocha Beech Bar Stool/ Round Poseur table with 25mm beech MFC top

Code £

ZFORDRB7 Round Base & Top 199

ZFORDSB77 Square Base & Top 176

Strata Polypropylene Chair/ Square dining table with 25mm white MFC top

Code £

ZFORPRB7 Round Base & Top 207

Chair Stacks 4 High

Chair Stacks 4 High

Orlando Dining - Black or Chrome Round Column Orlando Poseur - Black or Chrome Round Column

Forza Dining - Black Column

Strata Polypropylene Chair Vent Bar Stool

Forza Poseur - Black Column

New for 2015

cafe & dining

2year

guarantee

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.234

White BeechBeech

BCHBCH WHT3year

guarantee

3year

guarantee

Strata Polypropylene Chair Please add relevant colour code to STR. e.g. STRGRN

Stork Tall Beech Bar Stool & Artist Beechwood Chair Table Top

Black GreenBlue Red White

Code: STR Seat Height: 450 80 Code: GVN1A Height: 760 Depth: 435 272

Code: ART0514BCH Seat Height: 480 91 Code: GM01A Height: 760 Width: 490 Depth: 435 195

Artist Polished Beechwood Chair Mocha Beech Bar Stool

See page 241 for further information on the Vent Bar Stool

See page 241 for further information on the Mocha Beech Bar Stool

(30 day delivery)

(30 day delivery)

Orlando Dining Table Dimensions (mm)

Height: 755 Width: 700 Depth: 700

Orlando Poseur Table Dimensions (mm)

Height: 1075 Dia: 700

Vent Bar Stool/ Round poseur table with 25mm white MFC top

BLK BLUE GRN RED WHT

234-235 Dining Stock Range (15).indd 1 28/11/2014 15:44

Page 237: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Ramiro is a stylish trumpet table base finished in chrome plating. This is one of the most versatile trumpet bases available due to its adjustable feet and dual pin interlocking construction.

Code £

ZRAMPR7 Round Top & Base 250

Stork Tall Beech Bar Stool/ Round Poseur table with 25mm beech MFC top

Code £

ZRAMDR7 Round Top & Base 242

Strata Polypropylene Chair/ Round Dining table with 25mm white MFC top

Ramiro Dining Table Dimensions (mm)

Height: 755 Width: 700 Dia: 700

Ramiro Poseur Table Dimensions (mm)

Height: 1075 Width: 700 Dia: 700

Ramiro Poseur - Chrome Column with Trumpet BaseRamiro Dining - Chrome Column with Trumpet Base

Dining

235Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Stork Stool only available on a 20 day delivery

cafe & dining

Strata Polypropylene Chair Stork Tall Beech Bar StoolCode: STR Seat Height: 450 80 Code: CH0670SPBE Seat Height: 580-805 166

234-235 Dining Stock Range (15).indd 2 28/11/2014 15:44

Page 238: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Folding Tables & Benches

236

cafe & dining

Contour PlusThe difference that sets this product apart is the strengthened aluminium clad steel tube in the table legs. This adds a mere 1.75kgs to the overall weight of the table but offers significantly improved stability. Aluminium frame & laminate top folds flat for storage and can easily be carried. Strengthened legs give extra stability.

5year

guarantee

Colour Options

Contour Plus Folding Tables

Contour Stacking Benches

Code Weight W x D mm £CP/DC5 8.50kg 610 x 915 156CP/DB5 9.00kg 685 x 915 160CP/DA5 9.50kg 760 x 915 165CP/CC5 9.75kg 610 x 1220 179CP/CB5 10.00kg 685 x 1220 183CP/CA5 11.25kg 760 x 1220 190CP/BC5 11.50kg 610 x 1520 195CP/BB5 12.00kg 685 x 1520 199CP/BA5 13.00kg 760 x 1520 207CP/AD5 12.75kg 480 x 1830 199CP/AC5 13.00kg 610 x 1830 218CP/AB5 13.75kg 685 x 1830 219CP/AA5 14.80kg 760 x 1830 229Choose from 2 table heights: Buffet 760, Adult 698Note: 915mm Table Length not available in A Buffet 760mm height.

Code Weight W x D mm £C/CF2 5.00kg 254 x 1220 110C/BF2 5.75kg 254 x 1520 124C/AF2 6.75kg 254 x 1830 133Choose from 3 table heights: Buffet 483, Adult 432, Junior 381

Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Shown inJapanese Beech

Signal Red Paradiso Lime GreenYellow Heather

GP13 GP54 GP23 GP33 GP55 GP25

Campanula Sparta Maple Saxon Oak

Auburn Teak

Japanese Beech

Ailsa Grey Grey Dots White

GP21 GP57 GP99 GP16 GP07 GP58 GP05 GP24 GP15

Suggested height matches for tables & benches 760mm high table - 483mm high bench698mm high table - 432mm high bench635mm high table - 381mm high bench

Shown inHeather

Shown in Campanula

ContourContour tables and benches are the most popular style of folding furniture to be found. Constructed from aluminium with a wipe-clean laminated surface. The table weight ranges from just 6.7kg upto 13.00kg, far lighter than its rivals.Ideal for - canteens, schools, community halls, lightweight and versatile, folds flat for storage and can be easily carried.

Contour Folding Tables

Accessories

Code Weight W x D mm £C/DC2 6.75kg 610 x 915 144C/DB2 7.25kg 685 x 915 147C/DA2 7.75kg 760 x 915 153C/CC2 6.75kg 610 x 1220 165C/CB2 7.25kg 685 x 1220 169C/CA2 7.75kg 760 x 1220 175C/BC2 9.75kg 610 x 1520 177C/BB2 10.25kg 685 x 1520 188C/BA2 11.25kg 760 x 1520 194C/AD2 11.00kg 480 x 1830 186C/AC2 11.50kg 610 x 1830 205C/AB2 12.00kg 685 x 1830 209C/AA2 13.00kg 760 x 1830 216Choose from 6 table heights: Buffet 760, Adult 698, Junior 635, Infant 584, Pre School 546, Nursery 508

Code Description W x D x H mm £A2501 Large Table Trolley (14 tables) 745 x 1675 x 1127 557A3001 Small Table Trolley (7 tables) 745 x 875 x 1127 390A5001 Bench Skake Set 136A9001 Fast Fold - speedy folding tool 26

236-237 Contour Plus & Polyfold (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 16:19

Page 239: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Folding Tables

237

cafe & dining

Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Polyfold Height Adjustable Folding Tables•1220mmlengthtableadjuststothreedifferentheights, 640, 690 & 740mm•Choosefromtwotablelengthsizes1220mm&1830mm•1830mmlengthtableadjuststofivedifferentheights, 650, 690, 730, 770 and 810mm•Allweatherconstructionforindoor/outdooruse•Hygienic,wipe-cleanonepiecemouldedtop•Lightweightandsimpletouse,foldsflatforeasystorage

Polyfold Lightweight Tables•Availableinathreerectangularandtwocircularsizes

•Hygienic,wipe-cleanonepiecemouldedallweather polyethylene top for indoor/outdoor use

•Lightweight, stronger & more durable than wooden tables

•Universaltabletrolleyforstorageandtransport

•Foldsflatforeasystorage•1yearwarrantytrolley

2year

guarantee

XO 40010

Adjustable height table L1830mm shown at H810mm

Polyfold Lightweight

Polyfold Adjustable Height

Code Description Size Weight £TF 41376 Rectangular Table 1220mm x 600mm 12kg 93TE 40017 Rectangular Table 1530mm x 760mm 15kg 111TF 41378 Rectangular Table 1830mm x 760mm 17kg 117TF 41370 Circular Table 1220mm Dia 16kg 143TF 41371 Circular Table 1530mm Dia 21kg 195XO40005 UniversalTableTrolley 780CF 40015 Storage Strap with alloy buckle (5m) 33XO 40010 Expandable Table Trolley 537

Code Description Size Weight £TF 41385 Rectangular Table 1220mm x 600mm 12kg 138TF 41386 Rectangular Table 1830mm x 760mm 17kg 159CN 40011 Polyfold Folding Chair Seat Height: 440mm x Overall Height 850mm x Length 480mm x Width 470mm £ (Price per single chair, supplied in boxes of 4 chairs) 54

1830mm table with eight 2000 folding chairs

153cm table diameter with pictured with 2600 folding chairs

Beige DarkBronze

Top Colour Frame Colour

The table top colour may vary slightly from batch to batch.

UNIVERSAL TABLE TROLLEYThis trolley is suitable for all Polyfold tables. Will hold up to 12 Rectangular tables or 8 Circular tables. Length 1850mm, Width 850mm, Height 1550mm

STORAGE STRAPSWrap around straps secure the load. We recommend two per trolley. Each storage strap is 5m in length.

Adjustable height table L1220mm shown at H740mm

Polyfold Folding Chair

Simple height adjustmentfor all uses

236-237 Contour Plus & Polyfold (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 16:19

Page 240: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Dining Tables

238

cafe & dining

Tilt TopTilt Top tables are just the job for regular and occasional use such as in dining rooms. They are easy to open and close then wheel away. All are supplied with Duraform Speckled Light Grey paint as standard. Supplied with 4 locking castors.

5year

guarantee

Fantastic Quality &

Value!

Octagonal Table Rectangular Tables

Circular TableCode Edge Dia mm £TILT-CIRC-MD MDF Edge 1200 Diam 428TILT-CIRC-PS Spray PU Edge 1200 Diam 459

Code Edge W x D mm £TILT-EQOCT-MD MDF Edge 1200 x 1200 447TILT-OCT-MD MDF Edge 1380 x 1000 437TILT-EQOCT-PS Spray PU Edge 1200 x 1200 476TILT-OCT-PS Spray PU Edge 1380 x 1000 478

Code Weight W x D mm £TILT-RECT-129-MD MDF Edge 1200 x 900 390TILT-RECT-159-MD MDF Edge 1500 x 900 475TILT-RECT-129-PS Spray PU Edge 1200 x 900 416TILT-RECT-159-PS Spray PU Edge 1500 x 900 505

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 30 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Table Top Colours

Beech Maple Grey AilsaOak Red Blue Green Yellow

Table Heights Size 3 590mm Age 6-8 yearsSize 4 640mm Age 8-11 yearsSize 5 710mm Age 11-14 yearsSize 6 760mm Age 14-AdultNote: Size 3 not available on circular options

MDF Bullnosed Edge Polished and lacquered.

Spray PU Edge Extremely hardwearing and resilient edge which has a textured finish. Choose from Charcoal, Light Grey, Blue. If none specified, charcoal will be supplied.

Edge Options

MDF PU

Frame Colour

Duraform Speckled Light Grey

238-239 Dining & Enviro Tables (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 16:23

Page 241: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Enviro Dining

239

cafe & dining

Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Enviro Dining Benches - 1. Select shape and size, 2. Select height, 3. Select top colour, 4. Select edge colour

Code Product Dimensions mm Weight Available Heights £ Description Length x width KG 460mm 430mm 380mm 350mm 310mm 260mm

EN/AF35 Enviro Bench 1600 x 330 12.00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 183EN/CF35 Enviro Bench 1200 x 330 10.00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 157EN/DF35 Enviro Bench 1000 x 330 8.00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 141

Enviro Dining Tables - 1. Select shape and size, 2. Select height, 3. Select top colour, 4. Select edge colour

Code Product Dimensions mm Weight Available Heights £ Description Length x width KG 760mm 710mm 640mm 590mm 530mm 460mm

EN/AA35 Enviro Table 1800 x 750 25.00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 288EN/CA35 Enviro Table 1400 x 750 19.50 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 258EN/DA35 Enviro Table 1200 x 750 17.50 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 227EN/BD35 Enviro Table 1500 Shield 28.00 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 377EN/DD35 Enviro Table 1200 Round 20.80 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 307EN/ED35 Enviro Table 900 Round 12.50 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 250EN/FF35 Enviro Table 750 x 750 12.50 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 203

Dining Tables and Benches•Anodisedsilverframe•Strongandstable•Idealforeducation•Sociableshapesfordining

5year

guarantee

FrameColour Range Edge Colour

GP33 GP58GP21 GP05GP32 GP30GP57 GP31

Lime Japanese Beech

Campanula Ailsa GreySparta Wenge Strand

Mid Grey Dusky Blue

BlackGreen Ruby Red Anodised Silver

Clementine Dog Bone Light Grey

Enviro benches fit neatly under table

Benches are delivered flat pack and require simple assembly using an allen key

Shield Table Round Table Square Table

238-239 Dining & Enviro Tables (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 16:23

Page 242: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Banquet Chairs

240

cafe & dining

Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Fabric Colours

Blue Red

2year

guarantee

Lightweight and comfortable upholstered chairs with a deep cushioned, high density foam seat and back (seat cushion depth 60mm). Strong black steel frame has a useful hand-hold and side rails for added strength. Chairs stacks up to 8 high with stacking buffers and protective feet. Tested BSEN1022:2005 & BS15373:2007

Fantastic Quality &

Value!

Mayfair Chair

Grosvenor Chair

Code Fabric Colour W x D x H (mm) £CU40080 Red 440 x 540 x 890 72CU40081 Blue 440 x 540 x 890 72Seat Height 480mm

Code Fabric Colour W x D x H (mm) £CU40082 Red 445 x 560 x 880 72CU40083 Blue 445 x 560 x 880 72Seat Height 480mm

240-241 Banquet & Mocha & Vent (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 16:26

Page 243: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Mocha & Vent

241

cafe & dining

Mocha is a great looking, extremely versatile stacking cafe furniture. Simply constructed offering value with style. Contoured seat with silver or chrome frame. Available as chair or bar stool.

Vent is stylish and functional. This wooden chair and stool range has simple elegant lines designed to enhance any café and breakout environment.

Vent Colours Mocha Colours

Beech BeechOak BlackWenge

AX BCHBX CX DX 5year

guarantee

Vent Dining Armchair - Chrome Frame

Mocha Bar Stool - Silver Frame

Vent Bar Stool - Chrome FrameCode W x H x D £

MVN2A 570 x 445 x 435 285

Code W x H x D £

GM01A 435 x 760 x 490 195

Code W x H x D £

GVN1A 490 x 760 x 435 272

Vent Dining Chair - Chrome Frame

Mocha Dining Chair - Silver Frame

Code W x H x D £

MVN1A 490 x 445 x 435 234

Code W x H x D £

MM01A 435 x 445 x 490 152

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Shown with Beech finish

Shown with Beech finish

Shown with Wenge finish

240-241 Banquet & Mocha & Vent (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 16:26

Page 244: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Xpresso 1

242

cafe & dining

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Xpresso 1 is designed to provide a practical and stylish solution for a range of environments including educational establishments, cafes, auditoria, conference facilities and meeting rooms. They can be linked together an the optional linking strip. Polypropylene seat and back, tubular chrome steel frame, nylon glides. Chair available with or without black arms.

5year

guarantee

New for 2015

Code £

MXP1A 130

Dimensions (mm)

Width: 580 Height: 830 Depth: 490

Plastic Seat & Back

Linking Feet Code LXP FOC

Options£

Trolley - Holds 45 Code MXP 516

High Plastic Seat & BackCode £

MXP1C - With black arms 211

Dimensions (mm)

Width: 595 Height: 830 Depth: 490 Width: 600 Height: 1070 Depth: 490

Seat Height: 720

Code £

GXP1A 168

Plastic Seat & Back

MXP

Xpresso Seat Colours

Black Grey White

Purple Light Blue Green

YellowRed Stone

242-243 Xpresso 1 & Ice Zest (15).indd 1 04/12/2014 11:16

Page 245: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Ice & Zest

243

cafe & dining

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Ice is a chrome 4 leg range of stacking café chairs and bar stools, available in a choice of 4 outer shell colours, red, blue, green and black.

The Zest is a truly versatile dining chair which can be used outside or inside. Available in single or dual colours, UV resistant and 100% recyclable.

Ice Outer Shell Colours Zest 4 Leg Outer Shell Colours

When ordering please add the code for your colour required to the code above.

Zest Wire Frame Outer Shell Colours

Red Lime Green Lime GreenBlackBlue Stone StoneGreen Graphite Graphite

IceStackable Frame

AA BA BCAB CA CCAC DA DCAD

Ice Café Chair

Zest 4 Leg Chair

Zest Wire Frame Chair

Zest Chair - 4 Leg Zest Chair - Wire FrameCode W x H x D £

MJU2/ 612 x 885 x 535 248

Seat Height 480 Weight 6kg

Dual colour shell 4 leg café chair

Code W x H x D £

MJU2/ 612 x 885 x 535 298

Seat Height 480 Weight 6kg

Dual colour shell wire frame café chair

Ice Café/Breakout ChairCode W x H x D mm £

MNO1 500 x 870 x 560 170

Seat Height 470 Weight 6kg

Chrome 4 leg stacking café chair

5year

guarantee

242-243 Xpresso 1 & Ice Zest (15).indd 2 04/12/2014 11:16

Page 246: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Gloss Tables

244

cafe & dining

The Gloss tables are coffee, dining and poser tables with a variety of finishes with a silver column and a four star aluminium base. Perfect for corporate breakout, hotel and restaurant dining.

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Colour Options

Walnut & Silver White & Silver Glass & Silver

1year

guarantee

Gloss Dining Table Gloss Coffee TableCode W x H x D £

Squarial 750 x 720 x 750

TGLD/SQL0750WHM White MFC 323

TGLD/SQL0750WAM Walnut MFC 323

Round 900 Dia x 720

TGLD/RND0900WHM White MFC 302

TGLD/RND0900WAM Walnut MFC 302

Glass 800 Dia x 720

TGLD/RND0800GLX 10mm Frosted 522

Safety Glass

Code W x H x D £

Squarial 750 x 400 x 750

TGLC/SQL0750WHM White MFC 309

TGLC/SQL0750WAM Walnut MFC 309

Round 600 Dia x 400

TGLC/RND0660WHM White MFC 280

TGLC/RND0660WAM Walnut MFC 280

Glass 600 Dia x 400

TGLC/RND0660GLX 10mm Frosted 467

Safety Glass

Gloss Poser TableCode W x H x D £

Squarial 750 x 1060 x 750

TGLP/SQL0750WHM White MFC 342

TGLP/SQL0750WAM Walnut MFC 342

Round 750 Dia x 1060

TGLP/RND0750WHM White MFC 335

TGLP/RND0750WAM Walnut MFC 335

Glass 660 Dia x 1060

TGLP/RND0660GLX 10mm Frosted 478

Safety Glass

244-245 Gloss Tables & Retro (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 16:55

Page 247: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Retro

245

cafe & dining

Available in 5 colours, these bright and cheerful chairs will bring a breath of fresh air to any cafe or breakout space.The matching Dining Tables are made from solid wood and have a polypropylene top which is available in a choice of colours.

5year

guarantee

Retro Square Dining Table

Retro Round Dining Table

Retro Square Dining Table

Retro Wood Bar Stool

Retro Wood Café ChairCode Top Colour W x H x D mm £TRT5/A White 800 x 740 x 800 940TRT5/C Anthracite 800 x 740 x 800 940Beech Wood Legs

Code Top Colour H x Dia mm £TRT3/A White 740 x 700 551TRT3/B Sand 740 x 700 551TRT3/C Anthracite 740 x 700 551Beech Wood Leg with star base

Code Top Colour W x H x D mm £TRT1/A White 730 x 740 x 730 588TRT1/B Sand 730 x 740 x 730 588TRT1/C Anthracite 730 x 740 x 730 588Beech Wood Leg with star base

Code Seat Height W x H x D £GRT1 756 401 x 1069 x 533 488Solid beech frame chair with polypropylene seat and backrest

Code Seat Height W x H x D £MRT1 458 401 x 802 x 494 310Solid beech frame chair with polypropylene seat and backrest

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

TRT5/A TRT3/A TRT1/A

GRT1 MRT1

Seat & Backrest Colours

Retro Dining Table Top Colours

White

White

Light Grey

Red

Sand

Green

Anthracite

Yellow

A

D

B

E F

244-245 Gloss Tables & Retro (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 16:55

Page 248: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

246

Storage and FilingYou will find the best solution for your workplace storage requirements over the following pages. Whether you need to store boxes or file documents, our Filing Cabinets, Cupboards and Side Opening Tambours will work for you. Tailor a cabinet with internal fitments to suspend your files, or shelves to hold your folders. You may wish to consider space saving tambour doors or, a narrower filing cabinet. The Contract option represents great value in office storage over a modest range of colours and sizes. Where as the Classic option has a more premium feel with ultra smooth openings and an increased choice of fitments. Please ask our sales team for further details. Whichever filing cabinet you opt for, rest assured that all come with guarantees of between 5 and 10 years, and are rigorously tested and approved.

2015 Range Highlights

MultimediaGot more than just files and folders to store? Our colourful range of Multidrawer and Media Storage cabinets from pages 259-260 should provide the solution.

LockersChoose from a large variety of bright and stylish lockers and storage cabinets.

The SystemFile™ Lodge can provide a multitude of solutions, with a vast choice of internals and accessories for further customisation, whilst maintaining design and quality.

Sliding DoorsEconomy sliding door cupboards, a flexible storage solution for a variety of file formats offering a breadth of height & width configurations.

SafesProtect your business from fire, with a variety of unrivalled fire resistant cabinets for the storage of documents and media.

246-247 Storage Filing Info - Contents (15).indd 1 04/12/2014 11:20

Page 249: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

247

storage and filing contents

Sliding Door Cupboards Page 253

Classic Cupboards Page 256

Classic FilingPage 254

Side FilersPage 255

Contract TamboursPage 251

Contract Filing Page 248

Premier Filing Page 249

Filin

g C

abin

ets

Tam

bour

sC

upbo

ards

Syst

emFi

le

Lodg

es

Mul

tidra

wer

s

F Se

ries

Med

ia C

abin

et

Lock

ers

Plan

Che

sts

Safe

s

Contract Cupboards Page 250

SystemFile Page 258

Various Page 259

Filing Page 260

Storage Page 260

Fastrack Page 261

Steel Framed Page 267

VariousPage 268-269

Euro Tambours Page 252

StandardPage 262-263

Classic TambourPage 257

Contract FitmentsPage 251

Dangerous SubstancePage 265

Various PPE Page 266

Euro Fitments Page 252

Multi-purposePage 264

246-247 Storage Filing Info - Contents (15).indd 2 04/12/2014 11:20

Page 250: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Contract FilingHigh quality filing cabinets at economical prices, manufactured to meet British Standards for strength and stability. Fitted with recessed handles, drawer label holders, central locking and anti-tilt to prevent more than one drawer being opened at a time.

248

4 Drawer 3 Drawer 2 DrawerCode W x H x D (mm) £

AOC4 470 x 1321 x 622 296

Code W x H x D (mm) £

AOC3 470 x 1016 x 622 286

Code W x H x D (mm) £

AOC2 470 x 711 x 622 238

storage and filing

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Stock Colours

Goose Grey

Black Coffee Cream

C/CBLKG/G5year

guarantee

BestSeller

Note: Each drawer can hold up to 35kg of hanging suspension files.

For use with suspension files only.

Filing cabinet draw loads are for hanging files only. Drawer bottoms are not load bearing.

248-249 Contract FC - Premier Filing (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 11:51

Page 251: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

3 Drawer Filing Cabinet 4 Drawer Filing CabinetCode W x H x D (mm) £

PSF2 470 x 711 x 622 274

Code W x H x D (mm) £

PSF3 470 x 1016 x 622 298

Code W x H x D (mm) £

PSF4 470 x 1321 x 622 312

2 Drawer Filing Cabinet

249

Premier FilingUnassuming in design, the PSF filing cabinet blends into the background and keeps the filing at bay. It boasts 100% drawer extension, smooth, resistance-free slides and an anti-tilt operation for safe, ultimate ease of use. Two, three and four-drawer versions are available.

storage and filing

Note: Each drawer can hold up to 40kg of hanging suspension files.

For use with suspension files only.

Filing cabinet draw loads are for hanging files only. Drawer bottoms are not load bearing.

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Stock Colours

Goose Grey

Black Coffee Cream

Oxford Blue

C/CBLKG/G BLUE

5year

guarantee

Stocked in 4

colours

40kg drawer

load

248-249 Contract FC - Premier Filing (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 11:51

Page 252: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Contract CupboardsEconomy stationery cupboards are designed for a maximum storage capacity yet are efficient on space. Supplied with black dual purpose shelving which accommodates under-shelf filing. (330mm Centre)

250

Contract CupboardsCode W x H x D (mm) £

E402AO1 914 x 1000 x 400 262

1 Shelf

E722AO3 914 x 1806 x 400 343

3 Shelf

E782AO4 914 x 1950 x 400 397

4 Shelf

E198P1/BLK (Black Only) 26

Extra Dual Purpose Shelf

storage and filing

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Stock Colours

Goose Grey

Coffee Cream

C/CG/G5year

guarantee

Note: Please note colour samples may be altered slightly by the printing process and should only be used as an approximate guide. For full details of colour options available please contact our Sales Office.

Note: Stationery cupboards will only accommodate the Black dual purpose shelf E198P1.

250-251 Contract Cupboards - Contract Tambours (15).indd 1 04/12/2014 11:25

Page 253: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Contract Tamboursstorage and filing

The tambour cupboard represents great value and flexibility for office storage. Tambour doors open into the steel carcass saving on valuable office space. These tambour cupboards are supplied empty ready to accept internal fitments.

5year

guarantee

251Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Medium

Slotted Shelf

Low

Roll-out Suspension Filing Frame

Code Finish £

IME191SOTO/S Oak/Silver 702

IME191SOTB/S Beech/Silver 702

IME191SOTG/G Goose Grey 584

Code Description £

BBSP1 Grey as standard 37

Allow 25mm for the shelf plus clearance

height for items to be stored on the shelf.

W1000 H1968 D470W1000 H1651 D470

Dimensions (mm)

W1000 H1016 D470

Code Finish £

IME161SOTO/S Oak/Silver 665

IME161SOTB/S Beech/Silver 665

IME161SOTG/G Goose Grey 552

Code Description £

BSSPDP1 Slotted shelf 53

SHDV85P5PS Pack of 5 dividers 57

Allow 175mm for shelf and dividers plus

clearance for the items to be stored.

Code Finish £

IME101SOTO/S Oak/Silver 571

IME101SOTB/S Beech/Silver 571

IME101SOTG/G Goose Grey 451

Code Description £

ROSFF Single pack 138

Allow 258mm when used with standard

suspension files. Safety Note: Will only fit in

lower half of storage unit.

High

Standard Shelf

Stock Colours

Oak & Silver

Beech & Silver

Goose Grey

B/S

G/G

O/S

Lateral Filing Rail - Allow 285mm

Code Description £

ROSH Single pack 120

Code Description £

BUR Adjustment lateral file 48

Roll-out Shelf - Allow 60mm for shelf

250-251 Contract Cupboards - Contract Tambours (15).indd 2 04/12/2014 11:25

Page 254: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

252 Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Stock Colours

Beech Doors

Silver Doors

Silver Shell

5year

guarantee

Note: Storage fitments will not be installed into any units on delivery but will be left on site with instructions for self assembly.

Fitments available in black only.

Euro Tambours & Internal FitmentsDesigned specifically to a European format, Eurotambours provide optimum filing capacity to A4 size media. An expansive range of cabinet sizes and internal fittings enables efficient storage for selected filing applications.

storage and filing

EuroTambour - Silver

EuroTambour - Beech/ Silver

EuroTambour - Beech/ Silver

Standard Shelf

EuroTambour - Silver

Roll-out Frame

Code H x W x D (mm) £

ET410/102SIL 1030x1000x430 463

Complete with 2 shelves

Code H x W x D (mm) £

ET410/194SILBCH 1980x1000x430 663

Complete with 4 shelves

Code H x W x D (mm) £

ET410/102SILBCH 1030x1000x430 463

Complete with 2 shelves

Code Description £

ET410SHPS With undershelf filing 26

ET4SHDVCLIPONP3 Clip on shelf dividers 40

(pack of 3)

Code H x W x D (mm) £

ET410/194SIL 1980x1000x430 663

Complete with 4 shelves

Code Description £

ET410RFPS Roll out filing frame for A4 99

Roll-out Shelf Roll-out Drawer Lateral Filing RailCode Description £

ET410RSPS Roll out shelf 91Code Description £

ET410RD4PS 100mm roll out drawer 135

ET4DW4DP3PS Drawer dividers (pack of 3) 29

Code Description £

ET410LRPS Adjustment lateral file 28

252-253 Euro Tambours Fittings - Economy Sliding Door Cupboards (15).indd 1 04/12/2014 11:28

Page 255: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

253

storage and filing

A perfect complement to our Eurotambours™ range, and offering a breadth of height and width configurations, Economy Sliding Door Cupboards provide a flexible storage solution for a variety of file formats.

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Sliding Door Cupboards

Colours

Chalk

Light Grey

Silver

BlackGoose Grey

5year

guarantee

Top Box

Sliding Doors Cupboard

Sliding Doors Cupboard

Sliding Doors Cupboard

Code W x H x D (mm) £

SD412/08/1S 1200 x 839 x 430 392

Supplied with 1 shelf.

Code W x H x D (mm) £

SD412/19/4S 1200 x 1980 x 430 560

Supplied with 4 shelves.

Code W x H x D (mm) £

SD412/TB 1200 x 495 x 430 321

Supplied empty.

Code W x H x D (mm) £

SD412/17/3S 1200 x 1637 x 430 523

Supplied with 3 shelves.

Code W x H x D (mm) £

SD408/06/1S 800 x 695 x 430 321

Supplied with 1 shelf.

Code W x H x D (mm) £

SD412/11/2S 1200 x 1181 x 430 448

Supplied with 2 shelves

Sliding Doors Cupboard

Sliding Doors Cupboard

252-253 Euro Tambours Fittings - Economy Sliding Door Cupboards (15).indd 2 04/12/2014 11:29

Page 256: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Classic FilingWith a 10 year guarantee Bisley filing cabinets are built to last and feature a fully welded construction and double skin drawer fronts. The range includes two, three, four and five drawer versions. All cabinets listed are for foolscap filing; A4 cabinets (excluding 5 drawer version) are available for the same price but are not stock items so please allow 28 working days for delivery.

254

storage and filing

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

3 Drawer

5 Drawer

Code W x H x D (mm) £

BS2E 470 x 711 x 622 293

Code W x H x D (mm) £

BS4E 470 x 1321 x 622 395

Code W x H x D (mm) £

BS3E 470 x 1016 x 622 352

Code W x H x D (mm) £

BS5E 470 x 1511 x 622 498

2 Drawer

4 Drawer

Stock Colours

Goose Grey

Oxford Blue

Black

Chalk

Coffee Cream

C/CBLK

CHK

G/G

BLUE10

year guarantee

Note: Each drawer can hold up to 45kg of hanging suspension files.For use with suspension files only.Filing cabinet draw loads are for hanging files only. Drawer bottoms are not load bearing.

45kgdraw

loading

254-255 Classic Filing - Side Filers (15).indd 1 04/12/2014 11:32

Page 257: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

storage and filing

255

Side FilersBisley side filers are ideal where floor space is limited. The range incorporates all the design features of classic filing cabinets but with 30% greater capacity. The drawers, each supported by heavy duty slides enable 100% extension and accommodate one row of foolscap suspension files facing sideways or two rows of A4 files facing forwards. Label holders, height adjustment, anti-tilt and cross rails complete the standard features.

Stock Colour

Goose Grey

G/G5year

guarantee Note: Side filing cabinets are priced in Goose Grey only. For other available finishes and price details please contact Sales.

3 DrawerCode W x H x D £

08SF2 800 x 693 - 717 x 470 657

Code W x H x D £

08SF3 800 x 997 - 1021 x 470 844

Code W x H x D £

08SF4 800 x 1301 - 1325 x 470 1026

2 Drawer4 Drawer

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

254-255 Classic Filing - Side Filers (15).indd 2 04/12/2014 11:32

Page 258: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Classic Cupboard

256

storage and filing

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Stock Colour

Goose Grey

G/G5year

guaranteeNote: Please note colour samples may be altered slightly by the printing process and should only be used as an approximate guide. For prices and full details of colour options available please contact our sales office.

Standard Features Magnetic door catches and locks.

These all-purpose cupboards are available in three heights and are suitable for general storage and filing. Except for the A402W11 the units are supplied empty ready to accept storage fitments, which can be found on page 251.

Classic Cupboard Classic CupboardCode W x H x D £

A782W00 914 x 1968 x 457 441

Supplied empty

Code W x H x D £

A722W00 914 x 1806 x 457 352

Supplied empty

Code W x H x D £

A402W11 914 x 1016 x 457 317

Supplied with 1 shelf

Classic Cupboard

Seepage 251

for internalfittings

256-257 Classic Cupboard- Classic Tambour (15).indd 1 04/12/2014 11:35

Page 259: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Classic Tambour

Classic Tambour

Classic Tambour

Code W x H x D (mm) £

AST87WG/G 1000 x 2229 x 470 881

Code W x H x D (mm) £

AST78WG/G 1000 x 1968 x 470 774

Code W x H x D (mm) £

AST40WG/G 1000 x 1016 x 470 560

257

Classic TambourBisley’s versatile side opening tambour cupboards have been designed to maximise storage capacity and make the most of valuable office space; because tambour doors retract into the cupboard side, they use up less space. A comprehensive range of internal fittings enables efficient storage for every application.

storage and filing

Stock Colour

Goose Grey

G/G10

year guarantee

Note: Please note colour samples may be altered slightly by the printing process and should only be used as an approximate guide. For prices and full details of colour options available please contact our sales office.

Supplied Empty

Supplied Empty

Supplied Empty

Standard Features Fitted locksSee

page 251for internalfittings

256-257 Classic Cupboard- Classic Tambour (15).indd 2 04/12/2014 11:35

Page 260: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

258

SystemFile™ Lodge storage and filing

Colours

Bisley SystemFile™ can provide a multitude of solutions, with a vast choice of internals and accessories for further customisation, all the while maintaining consistency of design and quality, crucial to the modern office. Designed as a high-density storage option for personal use, the 1000mm wide carcase can accommodate three rows of lockers and each compartment can be locked independently. The ergonomic swan-neck handle is just one example of how SystemFile™ lodges have been designed to integrate seamlessly with all other products within the range.

SystemFile™ Lodge SystemFile™ Lodge SystemFile™ LodgeCode £

SYL1034LTA2B 1014

3 x 12” plus 6 x 13.5” doors

1000 x 1301-1325 x 470 1000 x 1947-1971 x 470

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

1000 x 1149-1173 x 470

Code £

SYL1040LT3JA 1130

9 x 10.5” plus 3 x 12” doors

Code £

SYL1060LS5B 1098

5 pairs 13.5” doors

Illustrated are our best selling options, many other door configurations are available. Please call for details.

SystemFile™ Lodge SystemFile™ LodgeCode £

SYL1060LT5B 1392

15 x 13.5” doors

1000 x 1643-1667 x 470

Dimensions W x H x D (mm)

1000 x 1947-1971 x 470

Code £

SYL1050LS3J2A 1031

6 x 10.5” plus 4 x 12” doors

10year

guarantee

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Light Red Orange

BlackOxford Blue

New Blue

PinkGreenYellowCoffeeCreamBeigeChalkEdinburghGraphiteGoose Grey

Light Grey

Silver

258-259 SystemFile Lodge - Multidrawers (15).indd 1 04/12/2014 11:37

Page 261: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

storage and filing

Lower heights and simpler configurations, these Bisley multidrawers provide great value storage. Choose from five units and a choice of bases and clever insert trays which help to keep drawers tidy.

259

Multidrawers

10 Drawer5 DrawerCode W x H x D (mm) Drawer Height £

H296NL 279 x 590 x 380 87 148

Code W x H x D (mm) Drawer Height £

H2910NL 279 x 590 x 380 51 148

Code W x H x D (mm) Drawer Height £

H12/5NL 279 x 325 x 380 51 85

6 Drawer

Optional Plinth Base Optional Castor Base

Prices shown are for Standard Colours. Add 10% for Graphite, Silver or Oxford Blue. Add 15% for Pink, Light Red Orange, New Blue, Green or Yellow.

9 DrawerCode W x H x D (mm) Drawer Height £

H39/15NL 279 x 860 x 380 51 207

Code Description £

HMDPLNTH Plinth Base, Single 18

CB5 Castor Base, Single 55

Code W x H x D (mm) £

A4, 4 Compartment Tray, Single

227P5/1 215 x 51 x 340 13

A4, 9 Compartment Tray, Single

226P5/1 215 x 51 x 340 13

A4, 16 Compartment Tray, Single

225P5/1 215 x 51 x 340 13

A4, 24 Compartment Tray, Single

224P5/1 215 x 51 x 340 13

Code W x H x D (mm) £

A4, 4 Compartment Tray, Pk of 5

227P5 215 x 51 x 340 65

A4, 9 Compartment Tray, Pk of 5

226P5 215 x 51 x 340 65

A4, 16 Compartment Tray, Pk of 5

225P5 215 x 51 x 340 65

A4, 24 Compartment Tray, Pk of 5

224P5 215 x 51 x 340 65

Code W x H x D (mm) Drawer Height £

H39/9NL 279 x 860 x 380 87 207

15 Drawer Base Options

Stock Colour Special Order Colours

Goose Grey

Black Green Silver Graphite New Blue Coffee Cream

Light Red Orange

Oxford Blue

Pink Yellow Doulton Blue

White

G/G BLK GRN SIL GRP NBL C/C RED BLUEPNK YE D/B WHT

5year

guarantee

Optional Compartment Trays

Stock colours delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days and fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Special colours are delivered within 30 working days.*

258-259 SystemFile Lodge - Multidrawers (15).indd 2 04/12/2014 11:37

Page 262: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

F SeriesF Series Filing cabinets provide complete flexibility for storing both A4 and Foolscap suspension files. 2 filing-drawers, 6 personal-drawers, 1 filing and 3 personal-drawer versions are available.

Media CabinetBisley media storage cabinets are specifically designed to store CDs, DVDs and videos. Each drawer can be divided into three rows to accommodate up to 120 CDs, 54 DVDs or 26 videos.

260 Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

5year

guarantee

Standard Features All drawers are fitted with anti-tilt safety devices and ball bearing slides for smooth opening. The design

also enables the plinth to be replaced with either castors or adjustable height levellers.

Prices shown are for Standard Colours.Add 10% for Graphite, Silver or Oxford Blue.

Add 15% for Pink, Light Red Orange, New Blue, Green, Yellow or White. Refer to page 259 for palette.

Code W x H x D £

MS4E 498 x 711 x 470 436

Castor Base For Media Cabinet

CB4 - Please specify as factory fitted 57

Video Pack - 4 Dividers 8 Compressor Plates

MSVP 35

CD Pack - 8 Dividers 12 Compressor Plates

MSCDP 56

Dividers - Pack of 4

MSDP4 16

Media Cabinet - 4 Drawers

Optional Castor Base DividersInsert Tray

2 Filing Drawers

Castor Base For F Series

Code W x H x D £

1F3E 470 x 711 x 470 294

Code W x H x D £

2FE 470 x 711 x 470 313

Code W x H x D £

F6E 470 x 711 x 470 287

1 Filing & 3 Storage Drawers 6 Storage Drawers

Code £

CB1 (Please specify as factory fitted) 50

Pack of 5 Compartment Plastic Insert TraysCode £

PIT522P5 Fits Storage Drawers 116

F Series Filing & Media Cabinet storage and filing

260-261 F Series Filing - Fasttrack Lockers (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 14:04

Page 263: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Fastrack LockersFastrack lockers are available in two sizes to cater for the demands of any requirement. Single door lockers are supplied with a shelf and hook (305mm) or rail (457mm), while two door lockers are supplied with one hanging hook per compartment. All lockers are guaranteed for 5 years and fully approved to BS EN 14073: Parts 2&3 and BS EN 14074.

261

storage and filing

Delivered to a room of choice within 10 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

5year

guarantee

1 Door Locker

4 Door Locker

2 Door Locker

6 Door Locker

Code W x H x D Colour £

CLK121G/G 305 x 1802 x 305 Goose Grey 120

CLK181G/G 305 x 1802 x 457 Goose Grey 146

CLK121G/B 305 x 1802 x 305 Blue/ Grey 120

CLK181G/B 305 x 1802 x 457 Blue/ Grey 146

Code W x H x D Colour £

CLK124G/G 305 x 1802 x 305 Goose Grey 187

CLK184G/G 305 x 1802 x 457 Goose Grey 203

CLK124G/B 305 x 1802 x 305 Blue/ Grey 187

CLK184G/B 305 x 1802 x 457 Blue/ Grey 203

Code W x H x D Colour £

CLK122G/G 305 x 1802 x 305 Goose Grey 143

CLK182G/G 305 x 1802 x 457 Goose Grey 174

CLK122G/B 305 x 1802 x 305 Blue/ Grey 143

CLK182G/B 305 x 1802 x 457 Blue/ Grey 174

Code W x H x D Colour £

CLK126G/G 305 x 1802 x 305 Goose Grey 226

CLK186G/G 305 x 1802 x 457 Goose Grey 248

CLK126G/B 305 x 1802 x 305 Blue/ Grey 226

CLK186G/B 305 x 1802 x 457 Blue/ Grey 248

Standard Features Flush surface, no protruding fixtures. Inset card holder. Camlock fitted, supplied with 2 keys. Ventilation holes in top & bottom for air circulation. Knock-outs provided for bolting together.

Pack of 5 Compartment Plastic Insert Trays

260-261 F Series Filing - Fasttrack Lockers (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 14:04

Page 264: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Standard LockersLockers have officially gone green on our selected range of Storage Lockers that contain Abbeysteel™ sustainably sourced steel lockers contain between 11-44% steel off-cut from the automotive industry reducing their CO2 footprint. The storage lockers also contain an anti-bacterial powder coating and are UK manufactured.

262

storage and filing

Delivered to a room of choice within 17 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

1year

guarantee

Two Door Locker

Four Door Locker

Single Door Locker

Three Door Locker

Sloping Top

Code W x H x D Single £ Nest of 2 £ Nest of 3 £

1830302 300 x 1800 x 300 124 244 398

1830452 300 x 1800 x 450 137 268 399

1845452 450 x 1800 x 450 159 NA NA

Code W x H x D Single £ Nest of 2 £ Nest of 3 £

1830304 300 x 1800 x 300 149 294 439

1830454 300 x 1800 x 450 166 326 487

1845454 450 x 1800 x 450 192 NA NA

Code W x H x D Single £ Nest of 2 £ Nest of 3 £

183030S 300 x 1800 x 300 99 192 286

183045S 300 x 1800 x 450 119 231 345

184545S 450 x 1800 x 450 142 NA NA

Code W x H x D Single £ Nest of 2 £ Nest of 3 £

1830303 300 x 1800 x 300 136 265 397

1830453 300 x 1800 x 450 154 300 451

Code W x D £

ST3030 300 x 300 14

ST3045 300 x 450 16

ST4545 450 x 450 18

Supplied with a top shelf and double coat hook.

Supplied with no internal fittings

Must be ordered with lockers, and only available on single door and nest of 2 lockers. Locker stands available on request, please ask for details.

Supplied with no internal fittings

Supplied with a double coat hook in each compartment

Door Colour Options. All Carcasses are Grey

Pastel Blue

Green

Dark Blue

Red

Grey

Yellow Maroon

262-263 Standard Lockers (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 13:03

Page 265: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Standard Lockers

263

storage and filing

Five Door Locker Six Door Locker

Eight Door Locker

Code W x H x D Single £ Nest of 2 £ Nest of 3 £

1830305 300 x 1800 x 300 169 332 494

1830455 300 x 1800 x 450 183 362 537

Code W x H x D Single £

1830306 300 x 1800 x 300 182

1830456 300 x 1800 x 450 195

Code W x H x D Single £

1830308 300 x 1800 x 300 232

1830458 300 x 1800 x 450 255

Supplied with no internal fittings. Choice of two sizes available. 550mm deep lockers available, please ask for details. Nesting option not available

Supplied with no internal fittings

Supplied with no internal fittings

Fitting for Padlock (Specify at time of order) FOC

Master Key 30

Hanging Rail 11

Number Plate and Key Fob 9

£1 Coin Return or Token Return Lock 39

Additional Keys 9

Electronic Combination Lock POA

4 Digit Combination Lock with Master Key POA

Options£

Nest of ThreeNest of TwoSingle Locker

4 Digit Mechanical Combination Lock with Master Key

Numbered Key Fob and Plate

Additional KeysMaster Key Electronic Combination Lock

Hanging Rail £1 Coin Return or Token Return Lock

Fitting for Padlock

262-263 Standard Lockers (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 13:03

Page 266: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Multi-purpose LockersIdeal for the storage of personal clothing and equipment. These lockers come with a mix of vertical hanging compartment and smaller storage compartments.

264

storage and filing

Delivered to a room of choice within 17 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

1year

guarantee

Clean & Dirty Locker

Twin Locker

Combi Locker

Two Person Locker

Code W x H x D £

1845CD 450 x 1800 x 450 160

Two vertical hanging compartments to separate workwear and

daywear. Integral seat and stands are available along with a sloping

top and lock options. Supplied with a grey carcass.

Code W x H x D £

1845TW 450 x 1800 x 450 189

This space saving unit accommodates two users each having a slim

vertical storage compartment with shelf and double coat hook. A

sloping top option available. Supplied with a grey carcass.

Code W x H x D £

1845N 450 x 1800 x 450 182

Ideal for the storage of personal clothing and equipment. The locker

comes with a vertical hanging compartment and smaller storage

compartments. Supplied with a grey carcass.

Code W x H x D £

1845TP 450 x 1800 x 450 210

A space saving unit for two users. Each user would have a vertical

hanging and a personal possession compartment. Supplied with a

grey carcass.

Door Colour Options

GreyYellow Maroon Dark Blue

Red Pastel Blue

Green

264-265 Multi Purpose Lockers - Dangerous (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 14:06

Page 267: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

These robust cabinets have been designed to offer good structural stability and safely contain spillages within the cabinets leak proof sump. Designed to provide safe and secure storage of chemicals, paints and hazardous substances as defined by COSHH guidelines. All cabinets conform to Health & Safety Executive Guide HSG51 & DSEAR 2002.

Delivered to a room of choice within 17 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

1year

guarantee

Dangerous Substance Safety Cabinets

265

storage and filing

Mini Dangerous Substance Cabinets

Sloping Top Add On Stands with Adjustable Feet

Code W x H x D No. of Sump Sloping 3 Point £ Shelves Capacity Top Locking

243618CSC 915 x 610 x 457 1 30Ltr Option Yes 311

243615CSC 915 x 610 x 381 1 15Ltr - Yes 306

301818CSC 457 x 760 x 457 1 10Ltr - - 261

281812CSC 457 x 710 x 305 1 10Ltr - - 240

281412CSC 355 x 710 x 305 1 5Ltr - - 232

241818CSC 457 x 610 x 457 1 10Ltr - - 250

181812CSC 457 x 457 x 305 1 5Ltr - - 229

Heavy duty construction. Powder coated paint finish. Reinforced doors. Leak-proof cabinet base.

Code W x H x D £

3618STUCSC 915 x 150 x 457 84

Code W x H x D £

3618STCSC 915 x 533 x 457 112

1818STCSC 457 x 533 x 457 105

• GHS labelling, fully enforceable June 2015 • Chrome door handle • Powder coated paint finish, hi-vis yellow • Reinforced doors • Leak proof sump • 3 point locking

IMPORTANT NOTICE: In accordance with HSE guidelines and regulations, before these cabinets are placed into operational use, it is the responsibility of the user to ensure that the signage to be displayed is appropriate to the hazards associated with those chemicals or products to be stored within.

New GHS labelling will be supplied on dangerous substance cabinets, the primary label is the Flame meaning ‘Flammable’...

Additional alternative labelling supplied loose includes ‘Oxidizing’ and ‘Explosive’...

Labels are easy peel type to allow switching of the primary label. Additional GHS signage and chemical information segregation chart supplied within each cabinet.

Dangerous Substance CabinetsCode W x H x D No. of Sump Sloping 3 Point £ Shelves Capacity Top Locking

723618CSC 915 x 1830 x 457 3 36Ltr Option Yes 511

603618CSC 915 x 1525 x 457 2 36Ltr Option Yes 480

393618CSC 915 x 1000 x 457 1 30Ltr Option Yes 350

361818CSC 457 x 910 x 457 1 15Ltr - - 268

283618CSC 915 x 710 x 457 1 30Ltr Option Yes 320

Heavy duty construction. Powder coated paint finish. Reinforced doors.

Leak-proof cabinet base. 3 point locking.

264-265 Multi Purpose Lockers - Dangerous (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 14:06

Page 268: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

PPE Lockers & CabinetsLockersThis robust design is ideal for industrial environments, these locker compartment doors are individually labelled with a “Personal Protective Equipment” mandatory label and incorporate a number plate holder. Product codes prefixed PPE will be supplied with a grey carcass and dark blue doors.

CabinetsExtra strength cabinets manufactured with a welded frame and reinforced doors. Each comes with 3 point security locking, and ‘Personal Protective Equipment’ labelling as standard.

266

storage and filing

Delivered to a room of choice within 17 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

1year

guarantee

PPE Lockers Standard Features Hardwearing powder coated finish. Key cam lock or padlock option.Welded frame design. Seat & stand options available. Sloping top option.

Cabinet Labelling

Code £

PPE183030S 104

W.300 x H.1800 x D.300

PPE183045S 128

W.300 x H.1800 x D.450

Supplied with a shelf & double

coat hook.

Code £

PPE723618W 371

W.915 x H.1830 x D.457

Supplied with an adjustable

hanging rail shelf.

Code £

PPE1830302 132

W.300 x H.1800 x D.300

PPE1830452 144

W.300 x H.1800 x D.450

Supplied with double coat hook to

each compartment.

Code £

PPE723618C 381

W.915 x H.1830 x D.457

Supplied with 3 adjustable

shelves.

Code £

PPE1830304 163

W.300 x H.1800 x D.300

PPE1830454 182

W.300 x H.1800 x D.450

Supplied without internal Fittings.

Code £

PPE723618CE 425

W.915 x H.1830 x D.457

Supplied with a vertical hanging

compartment & individual storage.

Code £

PPE1830306 201

W.300 x H.1800 x D.300

PPE1830456 212

W.300 x H.1800 x D.450

Supplied without internal Fittings.

Code £

PPE393618C 292

W.915 x H.1000 x D.457

Complete with one adjustable shelf.

Code £

PPE361818C 187

W.457 x H.910 x D.457

Complete with two adjustable shelves.

Single Door Locker

Wardrobe

Two Door Locker

General Storage

Four Door Locker

Clothing & Equipment

Six Door Locker

Double Door Cabinet

Single Door Cabinet

266-267 PPE - Plan Chests (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 14:09

Page 269: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

A0 Square Frame Plan ChestsCode W x H x D Description £

PC8 A1 992 x 830 x 707 8 Drawers 612

PC6 A1 992 x 830 x 707 6 Drawers 467

PC3 A1 992 x 830 x 707 3 Drawers 351

PC1 A1 992 x 830 x 707 1 Drawer 320

Will accommodate paper size 841mm x 594mm

Code W x H x D Description £

PC8 A0 1340 x 830 x 960 8 Drawers 837

PC6 A0 1340 x 830 x 960 6 Drawers 640

PC3 A0 1340 x 830 x 960 3 Drawers 422

PC1 A0 1340 x 830 x 960 1 Drawer 371

Will accommodate paper size 1189mm x 841mm

A1 Square Frame Plan Chests

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

5year

guarantee

267

MFC Colours

Oak Beech Silver Metalwork

Top Panel: 18mm with 2mm edge

Leg Frame: 25mm Square Tubing

B/S SO/S

A1 & A0 Plan Chests. With 1, 3, 6 and 8 drawer options. Using quality materials to build budget and cost effective furniture.

storage and filing Plan Chests

25mm square

legs

266-267 PPE - Plan Chests (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 14:09

Page 270: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Code W x H x D (mm) Drawers Weight £

FS2252K 530 x 805 x 675 2 145kg 1178

FS2252E 530 x 805 x 675 2 145kg 1308

FS2254K 530 x 1495 x 675 4 266kg 1730

FS2254E 530 x 1495 x 675 4 266kg 1863

FSDPI08 Data Protection Insert 19kg 351

Electronic Locking (E), Key Locking (K). 90 Minutes fire protection for paper records & data when FSDPI08 is used. Water resistant seals prevent damage to contents against sprinkler systems. Able to accommodate Foolscap, A4 & A5 files using width adjustable rails. Independent drawer locking allows any combinations of open or locked drawers.

Insert for FS1512K/E, FS1513K/E, FS1902E & FS1903E £

FSDPIO3 311

Code W x H x D (mm) Litres Weight £

FS1511K 600 x 1220 x 520 230 71kg 935

FS1511E 600 x 1220 x 520 230 71kg 1023

FS1512K 930 x 1220 x 520 359 90kg 1203

FS1512E 930 x 1220 x 520 359 90kg 1290

FS1513K 930 x 1950 x 520 615 142kg 1500

FS1513E 930 x 1950 x 520 615 142kg 1580

FS1514K 1250x1950x520 815 210kg 1870

FS1514E 1250x1950x520 815 210kg 1963

Electronic Locking (E), Key Locking (K). 30 Minutes fire protection for paper records. High security VDS Class 1 key lock or electronic locking with LED display. Recommended for £1,500 overnight cash cover or £15,000 for valuables. Height adjustable shelves that also include hanging rails for lateral files.

Code W x H x D (mm) Litres Weight £

FS1271E 410 x 308 x 342 16 26kg 239

FS1272E 352 x 420 x 433 25 36kg 280

FS1273E 404 x 522 x 440 36 53kg 343

60 Minutes fire protection for paper records & digital media, DVD’s & USB sticks. Recommended for £2,000 overnight cash cover or £20,000 for valuables. High security electronic lock with LED display, alarm, dual control & hidden code. Drop tested from 9.1 meters & suitable for base fixing (bolts supplied).

Code W x H x D (mm) Litres Weight £

FS1901E 655 x 1250 x 560 163 228kg 1510

FS1902E 775 x 1715 x 650 380 388kg 2413

FS1903E 1124 x 1770 x 700 699 548kg 3678

120 Minutes fire protection for paper records & 60 minutes for digital media. Recommended for £2,500 overnight cash cover or £25,000 for valuables. Large capacity storage with height adjustable shelves & lockable drawer unit. High security electronic lock with LED display, alarm, dual control & hidden code.

World Class Vertical Fire File FS2250K/E Series

Data Protection

Fire Ranger FS1510K/E Series

Titan II FS1270E

Fire Commander FS1900E Series

268

Fire Resistant Safes storage and filing

Protect your business from fire, with a variety of unrivalled fire resistant cabinets for the storage of documents and media. All our safes are independently tested to European standards.

Prices quoted are 1-3 day (door to door) delivery left in packaging. For above ground floor (via lift or stairs) P.O.A. Refer to page 2 for further information.

Prices quoted are for ground floor delivery & position (no steps) in 3-7 days. For above ground floor (via lift or stairs) P.O.A. Refer to page 2 for further information.

All fire safes are covered by a 2 year manufacturers warranty & free lifetime after fire replacement warranty.

FS2254E FS2252K FSDPI08

FS1902E FS1903E

Shown with optional data protection insert FSDPI03

FS1901E

£2.5K

FSDPI03

FS1271E FS1273E FS1272E

£1.5K

£2K

Fantastic Value

FS1511E FS1513K FS1514K/E FS1512K

268-269 Safes (15).indd 1 26/11/2014 14:14

Page 271: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

2year

guarantee

Code W x H x D (mm) Litres Weight £

SS0721E 240 x 180 x 170 5 3.5kg 72

SS0722E 310 x 200 x 200 8.5 6kg 82

SS0723E 350 x 250 x 250 18 8kg 99

SS0724E 450 x 250 x 365 33.8 16kg 137

Recommended for £1,000 overnight cash cover or £10,000 for valuables. High quality electronic locking with override key lock (2 keys supplied). Twin locking bolts and concealed hinges for increased security. Ready prepared for floor or wall fixing (bolts supplied).

Code W x H x D (mm) Litres Weight £

SS0935E 350 x 250 x 250 14 13kg 152

SS0936E 437 x 190 x 380 22 15kg 172

SS0937E 370 x 560 x 445 75 30kg 274

Recommended for £1,500 overnight cash cover or £15,000 for valuables. High security electronic and credit card swipe lock with LED display. Twin motorized locking bolts and concealed hinges for increased security. Ready prepared for floor or wall fixing (bolts supplied).

Code Description Colour £

SC1001KB Price shown for Pack of 16 Cases Black 736

SC1001KW Price shown for Pack of 16 Cases White 736

Recommended for £1,500 overnight cash cover or £15,000 for valuables. High security electronic and credit card swipe lock with LED display. Twin motorized locking bolts and concealed hinges for increased security. Ready prepared for floor or wall fixing (bolts supplied).

(46 each)

(46 each)

Code W x H x D (mm) Litres Weight £

SS1181K 350 x 220 x 170 8 20kg 229

SS1181E 350 x 220 x 300 8 20kg 467

SS1182K 450 x 350 x 350 28 38kg 335

SS1182E 450 x 350 x 350 28 38kg 575

SS1183K 450 x 550 x 350 43 54kg 433

SS1183E 450 x 550 x 350 43 54kg 673

ECB.S Certified & AiS (Association of Insurance Surveyors) Approved

Electronic Locking (E), Key Locking (K). Tested to European S2 Security Standard (EN14450) providing £4,000 cash cover and £40,000 valuable cover. Anti drill plates for added security. High security VDS Class 1 double bitted key lock or electronic lock & time delay. Ready prepared for floor fixing (bolts supplied for concrete).

Code W x H x D (mm) Litres Weight £

KS0031E 300 x 280 x 100 30 5kg 117

KS0032E 300 x 365 x 100 48 9kg 124

KS0033E 430 x 660 x 130 144 19kg 204

High quality electronic locking with override key lock (2 keys supplied). Suitable for 30, 48 & 144 keys. Coloured key rings & tags supplied. Key deposit slot allows keys to be deposited without opening the safe. Ready prepared for floor or wall fixing (bolts supplied).

Compact Home/Office SS0720E Series

Saracen SS0935E Series

iPad Security Case SC1000K Series

Fortress II SS1180K/E Series

Electronic Key Safes KS0030E Series

storage and filing

269

Safes

Prices quoted are 1-3 day (door to door) delivery left in packaging. For above ground floor (via lift or stairs) P.O.A. Refer to page 2 for further information.

Ideal for Education

KS0032E

Key Deposit Slot

KS0033E KS0031E

SS0935E SS0936ESS0937E

SS1181K SS1182E SS1183K/E

SC1001KB SC1001KW

Key

Recommended Insurance Rating

Water Resistant

Fitted with Electronic Lock

CE Certified

Fire Resistant for CD/DVD/USB

Fire Resistant for Data

Provides Fire Protection for paper

Fitted with Alarm

Fitted with Keylock

Drop Test Approved

Optional Fingerprint Lock

Suitable for 17” Laptop

SS0723E

SS0724E

SS0722E

SS0721E

268-269 Safes (15).indd 2 26/11/2014 14:14

Page 272: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

270

Whilst most existing school furniture will pass BS EN 1729 part 2, the fundamental changes to compliant furniture design are in BS EN 1729 part 1. This relates to the appropriate size, shape and ergonomic design of classroom furniture in maintaining good posture and reducing RSI and back pain in school children.

To help you select furniture that complies to British and European standards, the Sizemark table indicates which fixed seat and table heights are suitable for the child’s age and size.To ensure you purchase the most accurate height furniture for the individual child in compliance with the standards, we recommend that you measure the Stature and Popliteal height of the child.

This year we have maintained the wide variety of educational products, with all the information you require detailed clearly.

Whether you require a chair, stool or bench the choices provided in the following pages will allow you to choose from plastics to fabrics, the correct size and a suitable colour.

The tables are available in a range of shapes, sizes and colours with differing heights for differing applications, such as classrooms or canteens. Choose from hardwearing tops, foldaway frames or ones that stack for ease of storage.

1 2 3 4 5 6SIZE MARK

3 - 4 4 - 6 6 - 8 8 - 11 11 - 14 14 - AdultAGE RANGE

POHEIG 250 - 280 280 - 315 315 - 355 355 - 405 405 - 435 435 - 485PLITEAL

HT RANGE

930 - 1150 1080 - 1210 1190 - 1420 1330 - 1590 1460 - 1765 590 - 1880STATURE RANGE

590 710 760 900 1000 1000STANDING TABLE HEIGHT

460 530 590 640 710 760TABLE HEIGHT

260 310 350 380 430 460CHAIR HEIGHT

COLOUR CODE

ORANGE FEET

VIOLET FEET

YELLOW FEET

RED FEET

GREEN FEET

BLUE FEET

StandingWorkHeight

Guide to furniture sizingTo assist with purchasing the correct size of table in relation to the user, and the correct chair in relation to the table, we have provided the Sizemark guide.

All products sold over the following pages are in compliance with British and European Standards for “Chairs and tables for educational institutions” that were approved in 2007.The latest additions are:BSEN 1729 part 1 - Functional dimensionsBSEN 1729 part 2 - Safety requirements and test methods

Popliteal HeightDefines the correct seat height. The measurement is taken from the floor to the back of the knee when seated, with thighs horizontal and lower leg vertical with feet flat to the floor.

StatureIs from floor to the top of the head.

Sitting Work HeightDefines the correct table height. The measurement is determined by sitting elbow height, which is the distance from the floor to the underside of the elbow whilst sitting with the upper arm vertical and the lower arm horizontal.

Standing Work HeightDefines the correct standing table height. The measurement is determined by standing elbow height, which is the distance from the floor to the underside of the elbow of a standing person with the upper arm vertical and lower arm horizontal.

Education

270-271 Education Intro - Contents (15).indd 1 02/12/2014 12:22

Page 273: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

education contents

271

Cla

ssro

om C

hairs

Cla

ssro

om

Tabl

esSt

orag

eC

loak

room

Cla

ssro

om S

ets

Bench SeatingPage 319

PosturaPage 284

Computer TrolleysPage 301

Mobile BookPage 308-309

LockersPage 316-317

Crush Bent & Fully Welded - VariousPage 294-295

Cloakroom SeatingPage 319

Crush Bent & Fully Welded - VariousPage 292-293

TitanPage 282-283

EnviroPage 300

Jumbo/ Extra Deep TrayPage 307

Paper StoragePage 315

Low Height LockersPage 318

Copenhagen RangePage 275

Premium NurseryTables

Page 291

ST ChairPage 280-281

High Chairs Page 287

EquationPage 299

Variety TrayPage 306

Nexus CurvePage 314

Siena RangePage 274

Chair 2000 Page 279

WSM Stools Page 287

Equation Leaf Page 298

Nexus Library UnitPage 313

Standard NurseryTables

Page 290

Tub TablesPage 288

Stacking PolyPage 276-277

Geo PolyPage 285

Craft TablesPage 296

BudgetPage 302-303

Curve Storage & Seating

Page 310-311

Shaped Range Page 272

Bergen RangePage 273

NPPage 278

StoolsPage 286

Exam TablesPage 297

Shallow &Combination Tray

Page 304-305

Nexus BookcasesPage 312

Enviro Early YearsPage 289

270-271 Education Intro - Contents (15).indd 2 02/12/2014 12:22

Page 274: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Shaped Tables

272

classroom tables & chairs

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 15 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Create an interesting environment with these fun shaped, solid beech tables with hygienilac lacquer and safe rounded edges. The unique table shapes are ideal for group activities.

Colour

Tables

Beech Stacking Chairs

Beech Stacking Chairs

Code Description (H x W x D) £

TS48020 Helicopter 460/530 x 1500 x 1500 813

TS48021 Flower 460/530 x 1200 x 1200 717

TS48022 Horseshoe 460/530 x 1600 x 1500 1005

TS48023 Squiggle 460/530 x 1500 x 1500 957

Code Age (approx) Seat Height (mm) £

CK40255 3-4 years 260 62

CK40256 4-6 years 310 64

Code Description Seat Height (mm) £

CS43019 Chair 260 75

CS43024 Chair 310 81

Helicopter

Flower

Horseshoe

Squiggle

CSS43019

2year

guarantee

3year

guarantee

3year

guarantee

CK40255

SafeRounded Edges!

Beech

272-273 Beech Shaped Bergen (15).indd 1 04/12/2014 11:41

Page 275: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Bergen

273

classroom tables & chairs

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 15 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Bergen chairs and tables bring a fresh and exciting addition to any nursery. The chairs have a solid beech frame with laminated beech seats and backs.The tables have wipe clean scuff-resistant beech laminate tops and lacquered rounded edges. An extremely smart and practical long-lasting solution. Available in three chair heights: 26, 31 and 35cm plus a full size teacher’s chair at SH46cm, making this range even suitable for primary schools. Three table shapes, rectangular, trapezoidal and circular in three heights to match the chairs, 46, 53 and 59cm. Simple self-assembly required. Please specify your table height with your order.

Code Description Seat Height (mm) £

CS43019 Chair 260 75

CS43024 Chair 310 81

CS43025 Chair 350 84

CS43026 Chair 380 87

CS43023 Teacher’s Chair 460 108

Code Description (W x D) £

TS48000 Rectangular Table 1200 x 600 230

TS48001 Trapezoidal Table 1200 x 600 243

TS48002 Circular Table Dia 105cm 278

TablesChairs

Matching Heights (mm)Chair Seat Table260 460310 530350 590380 640

3year

guarantee

272-273 Beech Shaped Bergen (15).indd 2 04/12/2014 11:41

Page 276: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Siena Range

274

classroom tables & chairs

Siena Colours

Siena ChairsCode Description £FU07007 Red - 21cm 44FU07008 Royal Blue - 21cm 44FU07006 Green - 21cm 44FU07010 Red - 26cm 47FU07011 Royal Blue - 26cm 47FU07009 Green - 26cm 47FU07013 Red - 31cm 49FU07014 Royal Blue - 31cm 49FU07012 Green - 31cm 49FU07016 Red - 35cm 51FU07017 Royal Blue - 35cm 51FU07015 Green - 35cm 51FU07019 Red - 38cm 53FU07020 Royal Blue - 38cm 53FU07018 Green - 38cm 53FU07022 Red - 46 cm 65FU07023 Royal Blue - 46cm 65FU07021 Green - 46cm 65

21cm 26cm 31cm 35cm 38cm 46cm

1year

guarantee

Chairs from only

£44

FU07047

Siena ChairsRobust, practical and attractive this chair will easily withstand the daily rigours of the classroom. The plastic moulded one piece seat & back have been designed to promote the correct sitting posture. Chairs are delivered fully assembled. In minimum quantities of 4.

• Chunky 38mm tubular metal coloured legs.• Quality one-piece moulded contemporary seat.• Fitted with anti-scuff feet.

Siena TablesCode Description £FU07040 Rectangular 4 seater - Red 90 x 60cm 231FU07041 Rectangular 4 seater - Royal Blue 90 x 60cm 231FU07039 Rectangular 4 seater - Green 90 x 60cm 231FU07045 Rectangular 6 seater - Red 120 x 60cm 305FU07046 Rectangular 6 seater - Royal Blue 120 x 60cm 305FU07044 Rectangular 6 seater - Green 120 x 60cm 305FU07037 Rectangular 8 seater - Red 150 x 60cm 336FU07038 Rectangular 8 seater - Royal Blue 150 x 60cm 336FU07031 Flower 6 seater - Red 120cm dia. 420FU07032 Flower 6 seater - Royal Blue 120cm dia. 420FU07030 Flower 6 seater - Green 120cm dia. 420FU07049 Round - 4 seater - Red 120cm dia. 326FU07048 Round - 4 seater - Royal Blue 120cm dia. 326FU07047 Round - 4 seater - Green 120cm dia. 326

Siena TablesTables have height adjustable legs between 37-62cm. Extremely sturdy 45mm diameter metal tube legs. Edges have a hard-wearing vinyl and T-moulded colour co-ordinated banding. Legs have a durable powder coated paint finish and 30mm mdf wood veneered top. Non-scuff floor protection cups to bottom of table legs.

FU07044

Green

Royal Blue

Red

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 20 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

274-275 Siena & Copenhagen (15).indd 1 04/12/2014 11:42

Page 277: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Copenhagen Range

275

classroom tables & chairs

Code Description £

FU07058 Red - 21cm 51

FU07057 Blue - 21cm 51

FU07060 Red - 26cm 53

FU07059 Blue - 26cm 53

FU07062 Red - 31cm 55

FU07061 Blue - 31cm 55

FU07064 Red - 35cm 57

FU07063 Blue - 35cm 57

FU07066 Red - 38cm 76

FU07065 Blue - 38cm 76

FU07067 Blue - 46cm 76

FU07068 Red - 46cm 76

Code Description £

FU07074 Group - 6 seater Red 180 x 120cm 630

FU07073 Group - 6 seater Blue 180 x 120cm 630

FU07072 Flower - 6 seater Red 120cm dia. 420

FU07071 Flower - 6 seater Blue 120cm dia. 420

FU07082 Round - 4 seater Red 90cm dia. 357

FU07081 Round - 4 seater Blue 90cm dia. 357

FU07080 Rectangular - 4 seater Red 90 x 60cm 273

FU07079 Rectangular - 4 seater Blue 90 x 60cm 273

FU07076 Rectangular - 6 seater Red 120 x 60cm 336

FU07075 Rectangular - 6 seater Blue 120 x 60cm 336

FU07078 Rectangular - 8 seater Red 150 x 60cm 368

FU07077 Rectangular - 8 seater Blue 150 x 60cm 368

Copenhagen TablesCopenhagen Chairs

1year

guarantee

FU7078

Copenhagen ChairsThese chairs are designed to be both robust and sturdy, and able to withstand the busy classroom environment. Chairs are delivered fully assembled in minimum orders of four.

• 1cm thick solid wooden plywood seat base & back support.• Fully stackable.• Double bars beneath seat ensures extra rigidity to the design.

Chairs from only

£51

Copenhagen TablesThese sturdy, chunky tables have been designed to be both practical and attractive. Tables are delivered flat packed for easy self assembly. They feature height adjustable legs which extend from 37-62cm. Matching colour co-ordinating chairs and storage solutions are available within the range.

• Sturdy 3.4cm metal powder coated legs.• Quality sealed, pinned & drilled vinyl edging strip.• Fitted with rubber and anti-scuff low noise feet.

200kg max.weight tolerance

21cm 26cm 31cm 35cm 38cm 46cm

FU07073

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 20 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

274-275 Siena & Copenhagen (15).indd 2 04/12/2014 11:42

Page 278: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Poly Chairs

276

classroom tables & chairs

Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

The lightly textured Polypropylene chairs are produced at the highest quality and are also supplied in a number of colours.

They are moulded to the shape of a comfortable sitting position giving you the correct body posture.

This chair meets EN1729 parts 1 and 2 requirements and can be stacked with great stability up to 20 seats high.

Poly ChairsCode Size Seat Height Age £

ACE 5 430mm 9-13 31

ACF 6 460mm 14-Adult 32

Can be stacked with great stability

Seat Colours

Frame Colours

5year

guarantee

Stock Economy Poly ChairsCode Size Frame Colour Seat Height Age £

AC3/BLK 5 Black Frame 430mm 14-Adult 27

AC3/BLUE 5 Black Frame 430mm 14-Adult 27

Seat Colours FramePetrol Blue

Black Black 1year

guarantee

Options - ACF and ACE chairs only

Lecture Tablet

Top Bar

Seat & Back Pad

Tubular

Seat Pad

Code £

Lecture Tablet: ACF L Add 33

Lecture Tablet: ACE L Add 33

Seat & Back Pad: ACF SBP Add 38

Seat & Back Pad: ACE SBP Add 38

Seat Pad: ACF SP Add 19

Seat Pad: ACE SP Add 19

Top Bar: TBL Add 8

Tubular: TL Add 7

Stock economy chairs are delivered within 15 working days. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Red

Light Grey

Purple

Black Dark Grey Light Grey Smooth Silver

Green

Brown

Petrol Blue

Black

Burgundy

Orange

Charcoal

Hi Green

Beige

Hi Blue

White

Yellow

276-277 Poly Chairs (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 10:01

Page 279: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Advanced Poly Chairs

277

classroom tables & chairs

Delivered to a room of choice within 25 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Classic educational polypropylene chair with the distinctive hand hole for easy handlingThis range comes in a number of sizes and colours to meet the needs of all educational requirements.

They are moulded to the shape of a comfortable sitting position giving you the correct body posture.

These chairs meet the EN1729 parts 1 and 2 requirements and can be stacked with great stability up to 10 high.

This range of chairs can also be supplied linked.

•Availableinawidechoiceofframeandseat colours.

•Sturdysteelframeandeasystacking.

Classroom Chairs from

only £27

Colours

Frame Colours

5year

guarantee

Code Size Seat Height Age £

ACA 1 260mm 2-3 27

ACB 2 310mm 3-5 28

ACC 3 350mm 5-7 29

ACD 4 380mm 7-9 30

Advanced Poly Chairs

Hi Red

Black

Hi Green

Dark Grey

Hi Blue

Light Grey

Yellow

Smooth Silver

Charcoal

276-277 Poly Chairs (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 10:01

Page 280: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

NP Chairs

278

classroom tables & chairs

Upholstered Seat Pad only

Upholstered Seat & Back Pad

For added comfort our seat and back pads are available in a variety of hardwearing and attractive fabrics.

Options Available Code £

Upholstered Seat Pad only: SP Add 21

Upholstered Seat & Back Pad: SBP Add 41

One of our Best Sellers

Frame Colour

Duraform Speckled Light Grey

In daily use in thousands of UK schools, the NP represents value for moneyAvailable in six sizes and 10 colour options, the NP is particularly comfortable with its well defined lumbar support back.• Available in a wide choice of vibrant seat colours.• Available in six European standard size marks.• Robust frame and easily stackable upto 8 high.

Supplied in Duraform Speckled Light Grey as standard. Other frame colours

available on request.

Options only available with 430mm & 460mm (age 11+) chairs

Seat Colours

Fabric Colours

5year

guarantee

Red

Purple

Deep Blue

Spring Leaf

Tangerine

Blue

Lilac

Carnation Mineral

Green Charcoal Tangy Green Yellow Orange

Soft Blue

Slate Lupin Midas

Chairs from only

£34

NP Classroom ChairsCode Size Seat Height Age £NP1 1 260mm 3-4 34NP2 2 310mm 4-6 34NP3 3 350mm 6-8 40NP4 4 380mm 8-11 42NP5 5 430mm 11-14 43NP6 6 460mm 14-Adult 45

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 30 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

278-279 NP & 2000 Chairs (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 10:06

Page 281: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Chair 2000

279

classroom tables & chairs

With classic looks this is one of our top sellers for schoolsIt is a top-of-range classroom chair designed by cfg, the UK’s leading designer of school furniture. Chair 2000 has a classic look and feel with simple lines which support posture across all ages. The chair is extremely strong and durable and provides excellent value for money, with a range of accessories to suit any applications.Chair 2000 is also available as a stylish height adjustable swivel chair. The gas lift system is well balanced for use by teenagers to adults.

Stylish Height

Adjustable Chair

Code Size Seat Height Age £2017 1 260mm 3-4 482018 2 310mm 4-6 482019 3 350mm 6-8 492015 4 380mm 8-11 512020 5 430mm 11-14 562021 6 460mm 14-Adult 59

Code Seat Height Age £2077 430-560mm 14-Adult 205

Code Size Seat Height Age £2040 5 430mm 11-14 702041 6 460mm 14-Adult 71

Chair 2000

Height Adjustable Swivel Chair

Skid Base Chair

OptionsDescription Code £

Upholstered Seat SPB Add 41

Pad & Back Pad: (430, 460mm & Swivel)

2077with Castors

Stackable upto 8 high

Seat Colours

Fabric Colours

Red

Purple

Deep Blue

Spring Leaf

Tangerine

Blue

Lilac

Carnation Mineral

Green Charcoal Tangy Green Yellow Orange

Soft Blue

Slate Lupin Midas

Frame Colour

Duraform Speckled Light Grey

5year

guarantee

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 30 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

278-279 NP & 2000 Chairs (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 10:06

Page 282: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

ST Chair

280

classroom tables & chairs

ST ChairsCode Size Seat Height Age £ST1 1 260mm 3-4 40ST2 2 310mm 4-6 41ST3 3 350mm 6-8 47ST4 4 380mm 8-11 47ST5 5 430mm 11-14 61ST6 6 460mm 14-Adult 62

Smooth lines give a clean shape which is both comfortable and supportive across all age ranges. This chair has no separate underframe so boasts an excellent 15 year guarantee. The ST represents style, durability and value - and it’s a great stacker too!

•Thestylishovaltubelegsaresuppliedin Duraform Speckled Light Grey as standard.

•15yearguarantee.

•FullycomplywithallelementsofBS/EN1729 Parts 1 & 2.

Extrastrongunder carriage for long-life and durability

Excellent 15 year

guarantee

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 30 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

280-281 ST Chair (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 10:11

Page 283: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

ST Chair

281

classroom tables & chairs

Features• ‘S’ shaped back for correct lumbar support.

• Safe and stable stacking when not in use.

• Long life anti-slip feet.

• Ergonomicallydesignedforcorrectposture.

• Strength and durability - no separate under-frame.

• Smooth curves with no sharp edges for safety.

• Super Stacker upto 10 high.

Options Available Code £

Linking Device: LD Add 12

Upholstered Seat Pad: SP Add 21

Linking Device Joins chairs together as required in public performance situations.

Options only available with 430mm & 460mm (age 11+) chairs

Upholstered Seat Pad Available in a variety of fabrics.

Seat Colours

FabricColours

Red

Purple

DeepBlue

Spring Leaf

Tangerine

Blue

Lilac

Carnation Mineral

Green Charcoal Tangy Green Yellow Orange

SoftBlue

Slate Lupin Midas

FrameColour

Duraform Speckled Light Grey

15year

guarantee

Fantastic Quality &

Value!

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 30 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

280-281 ST Chair (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 10:11

Page 284: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Titan Chairs

282

classroom tables & chairs

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Manufactured to a European Standard (EN 1729 Part 1) that first and foremost sets out to encourage good posture for our children. EN 1729 Part 1 is the standard which sets chair dimensions, heights, angles and back support contact points for every age group.

Good posture not only means children will be healthier - it also means that they should be more comfortable and therefore more attentive in class.

• Sizes 5 & 6 now tested to 25 stone weight allowance. • See opposite page for options.

Titan One Piece Polypropylene Chairs

Titan+ Antibacterial Polypropylene Chairs

Code Size Seat Height Age £T2 2 310mm 3-5 years 32T3 3 350mm 5-7 years 38T4 4 380mm 7-9 years 40T5 5 430mm 9-13 years 46T6 6 460mm 13 + years 47

Code Size Seat Height Age £T1A 1 260mm 1-2 years 46T2A 2 310mm 3-5 years 49T3A 3 350mm 5-7 years 52T4A 4 380mm 7-9 years 56T5A 5 430mm 9-13 years 57T6A 6 460mm 13 + years 59

Built for the toughest classrooms

Seat Colours for sizes 1-4 Seat Colours for sizes 5 & 6

That’s it...I’m off to another school

this one has Titan+

That’s it...I’m off to another school

this one has Titan+

Black Fully Recycled

Titan Antibacterial Classroom Chairs • The Titan+ antibacterial chair will kill 99.9% of bacteria including MRSA and E-coli on touch.

• Protection is guaranteed for 10 years.

• 100% safe to humans, subject to independent antibacterial lab testing.

• The Titan+ is highly recommended not only for use within the classroom but also in eating areas canteen and refectories.

• Prevents fungal growth.

Our Achievements+ The Titan+ will help to safeguard the health of your students and school community.

+ Titan have carried out extensive research to bring you the chair of the future today.

+ Give parents the peace of mind knowing that the Titan+ is the chair that their children will be using in the classroom.

Note: Green, Yellow, Red, Blue, Purple, Lime, Sky & Orange - All Sizes Grey, Burgundy & Black - Sizes T5 & T6 only Charcoal - Sizes T6, T5, T4 & T3 onlyNon stock colours available to order.

Titan Seat Colours

15year

guarantee

10year

guarantee

Charcoal Green Grey PurpleYellow Blue Burgundy Lime GreenRed Sky Orange Black

Lime Sky Blue Orange Yellow Blue Charcoal

282-283 Titan Chairs (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 10:20

Page 285: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Titan Chairs

283

classroom tables & chairs

Delivered to a room of choice within 30 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Titan 4 Leg• The super strong Titan 4 Leg chair is available in 11 shell colours and 4 seat heights - the ultimate 4 leg classroom chair.• Moulded from a one piece high impact polypropylene shell, bolted to a super strong oval tube steel frame makes the chair almost unbreakable.

Titan Skid Base• The Titan Skid Base chair is available in 11 shell colours and 4 seat heights - the ultimate skid base classroom chair.• Shells are available in 11 vibrant colours with the frames epoxy coated in a modern silver finish.

Titan Reverse Cantilever• Incredibly strong the Titan Reverse Cantilever Chair is available in 4 seat heights. This ultimate cantilever classroom chair is designed to withstand heavy day to day use.

Titan Swivel• The Titan Swivel chair with solid polished chrome bases and a choice of either glides or castors. • Titan gas lifts are guaranteed to withstand users up to 25 stone and offer simple seat height adjustment.

Titan Folding Exam DeskThe Titan exam desk has been developed with a textured high impact injection moulded polypropylene top, making them not only stable but also graffiti proof. The tops are manufactured from a one-piece recyclable injected moulded polypropylene, with black support legs as standard.A desk trolley is available - ask for details.

Code Size Seat Height Age £T13 3 350mm 5-7 years 35T14 4 380mm 7-9 years 35T15 5 430mm 9-13 years 39T16 6 460mm 13+ years 40

Note: Green, Yellow, Red, Blue, Purple, Lime, Sky & Orange - All Sizes

Charcoal, Grey, Burgundy & Black - Sizes T15 & T16 Only

Code Size Seat Height Age £T23 3 350mm 5-7 years 39T24 4 380mm 7-9 years 40T25 5 430mm 9-13 years 42T26 6 460mm 13+ years 43

Note: Green, Yellow, Red, Blue, Purple, Lime, Sky & Orange - All Sizes

Charcoal, Grey, Burgundy & Black - Sizes T25 & T26 Only

Code Seat Height Age £T80 350mm 5-7 years 75T81 380mm 7-9 years 75T82 430mm 9-13 years 80T83 460mm 13+ years 82

Note: Green, Yellow, Red, Blue, Purple, Lime, Sky & Orange - All Sizes

Charcoal, Grey, Burgundy & Black - Sizes T82 & T83 Only

Code Description Seat Height Adjustment Age £T30 Junior Shell 355mm-420mm 5-11 years 105T35 Junior Shell 460mm-600mm 11+ years 108

Note: All colours available for adult sizes

Green, Yellow, Red, Blue, Purple, Lime, Sky & Orange - Junior Size

Code W x H x D Colour £T10B 600 x 710 x 600mm Blue 64T10C 600 x 710 x 600mm Charcoal 64

Code Seat Height £T90 445mm 66T91 560mm 66T92 610mm 70T93 685mm 70Not available in Sky, Orange, Lime Green, Yellow or Burgundy.

Not advised for use on ultra grip flooring.

Titan 4 Leg

Titan Skid Base

Titan Reverse Cantilever

Titan Swivel

Titan Folding Exam Desk

Titan Ultimate Stool

Options Available Code £

Chair Trolley: T40 285

Linking Clip: T7 4

Seat Pad: TSP 33

Seat Colours

10year

guarantee

Chair TrolleyAllows chairs to be moved easily.

Linking ClipFor linking chairs together.

Seat PadUpholstered pad available in Camira fabric or vinyl.

Charcoal

Sky

Green

Orange

Yellow

Grey

Blue

Lime Green

Red

Burgundy

Black

Purple

282-283 Titan Chairs (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 10:21

Page 286: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Postura Plus Chair

284

classroom tables & chairs

A practical choice for your classroom, made from polypropylene, available in a choice of colours and heights. The Postura Plus chairs are anti-static and stain resistant. The ergonomic design helps children concentrate for longer periods. 100% recyclable.

Stacks up to 12 high

Anti-static and stain resistant Postura Chairs

Code W x D Seat Height £CS43400 280 x 250mm 260mm 40CS43401 280 x 250mm 310mm 41CS43402 340 x 315mm 350mm 42CS43403 435 x 460mm 380mm 44CS43405 470 x 515mm 430mm 49CS43406 510 x 550mm 460mm 53

Seat Colours

Poppy Red

Powder Blue

Sun Yellow

Grape Crush

Ink Blue Iron Grey

Ash Grey Aqua Blue*

Forest Green

Lime Zest

Slate Grey Orange Burst*

Pink Candy*

Almond White*10

year guarantee

*Available in certain seat heights, with an extended lead time. Contact us for details.

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 15 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

284-285 Postura Geo Poly (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 10:32

Page 287: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Geo Poly

285

classroom tables & chairs

6year

guarantee

The Geo range of chairs, a modern, ergonomic and robust addition to our poly range. The Geo is available in 9 vibrant shell colours and 3 legged options with ICT Swivel to complete the family. Fully EN1729 (NEW) part 1 and 2 compliant the Geo has been designed and manufactured in the UK for the educational and contract markets.

Superb QualityChairs

Code Description £

GE05 Reverse Cantilever Chair - 460mm 101

GE06 Reverse Cantilever Chair - 430mm 101

Code Description £

GE01 Four Legged Stacking Chair - 460mm 65

GE02 Four Legged Stacking Chair - 430mm 65

Geo Poly Four Legged Stacking ChairGeo Poly Reverse Cantilever Chair

Seat Colours

Yellow (Lemon)

Green (Lime)

Blue (Ocean)

Mulberry Grey (Slate)

Red Black (Onyx)

Brown (Mocha)

Orange (Flame)

Frame Colours

Black Grey Chrome Silver

Options Code £Seat Pad: SP Add 33Top Bar: TBL Add 8Tubular: TL Add 7

Code Description £

GE010 Skid Base Chair - 460mm 78

GE011 Skid Base Chair - 430mm 78

Code Description £

GE015 ICT Gas Lift Poly Chair 137

Geo Poly ICT Gas Lift ChairGeo Poly Skid Base Chair

Top Bar Tubular

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 20 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

284-285 Postura Geo Poly (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 10:32

Page 288: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Stools

286

classroom tables & chairs

Poly Top•ThePolyTopstoolisdesignedwithaflatseatwhich allowsforeasystacking.•Designedtostack10high.•The22mmdiameterfourleggedsteelframes arecoatedinanEpoxyPowdercoatfinishtogive maximumlife.

Heavy Duty Wooden Top•Manufacturedusing25mmsquarecrushedrobustframe.•A19mmdiameterbracing-barhasalsobeenaddedtogive extrastrengthtotheheavydutyframe.

Poly Top StoolsCode Depth Width SeatHeight £AS1 295 335 445mm 43AS2 295 335 560mm 44AS3 295 335 610mm 45AS4 295 335 685mm 46AS5 295 335 755mm 47

Heavy Duty Wooden StoolsCode Depth Width SeatHeight £HDS1 300 300 445mm 62HDS2 300 300 510mm 63HDS3 300 300 560mm 64HDS4 300 300 610mm 65HDS5 300 300 685mm 66 Stools

from only £43

BracingBar

Topscomewithholesonrequest

PolyTopFrameColours

5year

guarantee

PolyTopSeatColours

WoodenTop&HeavyDutyWoodenTopFrameColours

5year

guarantee

WoodenTop&HeavyDutyWoodenTopSeatColours

Wooden Top•Liftedwitheaseviatheusefulhandhole.•The22mmdiameterfourleggedsteelframesarecoated inanEpoxyPowdercoatfinish.•A19mmdiameterbracing-barhasalsobeenaddedto giveextrastrengthtothehighframe.

Wooden Top StoolsCode Depth Width SeatHeight £

DGW1 535 300 445mm 46

DGW2 535 300 560mm 47

DGW3 535 300 610mm 48

DGW4 535 300 685mm 55

Beech

Black TexturedBlack LightGrey SmoothSilver

Red Green Blue Ply Yellow

Yellow Red Green Blue Charcoal Beige

TexturedBlack DarkGrey LightGrey TexturedSilverSmoothSilver

Deliveredtoaroomofchoicewithin25workingdaysfullyassembled.Packagingremovedandrecycled.Certainexceptionsseepage2.

286-287 WSM Stools High Chairs (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 10:53

Page 289: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

WSMStools&HighChairs

287

classroom tables & chairs

WSM Skid BaseCode SeatHeight £

Skid Base StoolWSM1SKID 395mm 77WSM2SKID 445mm 77WSM3SKID 560mm 77WSM4SKID 610mm 77WSM5SKID 685mm 77

WSM Four LeggedCode SeatHeight £

Four Legged StoolWSM1 395mm 67WSM2 445mm 67WSM3 560mm 67WSM4 610mm 67WSM5 685mm 67

Stool&HighChairSeatColours

5year

guarantee

If you are looking for the UK’s best stool, look no furtherOurWSMstoolsarespecifiedformajorprojectscountrywidebecauseoftheiruniqueseatshapewithintegrallumbarsupport.

Addtothisarobuststeelframewithawellpositionedfootrestandwehaveawinningcombination.Choosefromafourleggedorskidbasedesign.•Skidbasefeaturesnon-tiltframeandprotectsfloorinhighwearsituations.

Integral LumbarSupport

BS High Chair Chair 2000Code Size SeatHeight £NP5ST4 4 610mm 67NP5ST5 5 685mm 69

Code Size SeatHeight £MS127 1 640mm 80MS128 2 670mm 84

Code SeatHeight Age £2104 620mm 13 802105 670mm 14-Adult 89

NP High Chair

Essentialwherehighlyabrasivenon-slipflooringisused.

CodeSF Add£5

SteelFeetOption

Red Blue Green Charcoal SoftBlue Yellow Orange Purple Lilac TangyGreen

NP•PerfectforuseinICT,craftandscienceenvironments

BS•Adesignthat’sstronger,sturdierandsleeker

Chair 2000•Robuststeelback&integratedlumbarsupport

FrameColours:SuppliedinDuraformSpeckledLightGrey.Otherframecoloursavailableonrequest.

Allproductsonthispagearepricedtobedeliveredwithin30workingdaystogroundfloor,nearestundercoverpoint.Certainexceptionsseepage2.

286-287 WSM Stools High Chairs (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 10:53

Page 290: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Tub Tables

288

classroom tables & chairs

Fantastic Value!

Tub TablesCode Description Table Approx A B C D Unit Price Length Width Weight (kg) Junior Infant Pre-school £

ATCA6 Tub Table 1220mm 760mm (30”) 9.0 635mm(25”) 546mm(21.5”) 508mm (20”) 216 Includes 3 x Square plastic tub

ATAA6 Tub Table 1830mm 760mm (30”) 12.5 635mm(25”) 546mm(21.5”) 508mm (20”) 274 Includes 4 x Square plastic tubs

Tub Tables1. Select table length stating product code, 2. Select Height, 3. Select laminate colour

Choose fromtwo table lengths

Play then storeThese Contour folding tables are supplied with clear plastic tubs, including lids. Place small play items into the tubs such as Lego®, pens, crayons, plasticine, cars and Knex® and drop them into the table top. Once your activity is complete, just remove the tubs and store them away. The table can then be folded down and stored in the minimum of space. Each table is supplied with three holes in the top in which to place the tubs.

• Two lengths, three junior heights & four primary colours.

Colours

GP13 GP54 GP55GP235year

guarantee

Signal Red Paradiso Yellow Green

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 25 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

288-289 Tub Tables Enviro (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 10:57

Page 291: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Enviro Early Years

289

classroom tables & chairs

Enviro Early Years TablesCode Table Dimensions mm Weight Available Heights £

Shape Length x width KG 640mm 590mm 530mm 460mm

EN/DB37/S Rectangular 1200 x 600 15.3 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 220

EN/CK37/S Bean 1400 x 750 16.3 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 232

EN/CT37/S Trapezoidal 1400 x 590 14.20 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 232

EN/DD37/S Round 1200 diameter 20.80 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 307

EN/DS37/S Daisy 1200 x 1200 19.45 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 319

Bright and vibrant colours - for stimulating learning environmentsStimulating shapes and colours from the new Enviro Early Years range are perfect for playgroups, nurseries and reception classes.

Choose from a range of primary colours with contrasting ABS edging to brighten up the learning environment for young children. Enviro products are truly child friendly.

1. Select table length product code, 2. Select height, 3. Select laminate colour

5year

guarantee

Edge Colours FrameColour RangeGP33 GP21 GP23 GP24GP25 GP 58 GP13 GP54

Lime Campanula Heather Yellow Grey Dots Red Paradiso Light Grey Ruby Red Dusky Blue Green SilverJapanese Beech

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 25 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

288-289 Tub Tables Enviro (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 10:57

Page 292: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Nursery Tables

290

classroom tables & chairs

StandardThese bright and attractive tables are designed to nest easily, and have round tubular legs with an 18mm MDF bullnose edged top.

Supplied with matching top and frame colour.

CircularCode Dia x H (mm) Age £RTSS11C46 1100 diameter x 460 3-4 years 212RTSS11C53 1100 diameter x 530 4-6 years 212RTSS11C59 1100 diameter x 590 6-8 years 212

RectangularCode Dia x H (mm) Age £RTSS11546 1100 x 550 x 460 3-4 years 127RTSS11553 1100 x 550 x 530 4-6 years 127RTSS11559 1100 x 550 x 590 6-8 years 127

*Supplied in Duraform Speckled Light Grey.

Frames match top colours.

Colours

Nursery Tables From

£127

TrapezoidalCode W x 3 Shortest Edges x H (mm) Age £RTSS11LE46 1100 x 550 x 460 3-4 years 131RTSS11LE53 1100 x 550 x 530 4-6 years 131RTSS11LE59 1100 x 550 x 590 6-8 years 131

Colours

5year

guarantee

*Beech Red Blue Green Yellow

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 30 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

290-291 Nursery Standard Premium (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 11:00

Page 293: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Nursery Tables

291

classroom tables & chairs

PremiumOur highest quality fully welded tables with stylish, chunky tubular legs. Standard 18mm MDF tops with a hardwearing laminate. The top choice for early years classrooms. Supplied with matching top and frame colour, in a variety of shapes and sizes to create a lively classroom environment.

• Stylish • Durable • Value for money • 10 year guarantee

Code W x 3 Shortest Edges x H (mm) Age £NURS11LE46 1100 x 550 x 460 3-4 years 185NURS11LE53 1100 x 550 x 530 4-6 years 185NURS11LE59 1100 x 550 x 590 6-8 years 185

Trapezoidal

Code W x D x H (mm) Age £NURS11546 1100 x 550 x 460 3-4 years 177NURS11553 1100 x 550 x 530 4-6 years 177NURS11559 1100 x 550 x 590 6-8 years 177

Rectangular

Code Dia x H (mm) Age £NURS11C46 1100 x 460 3-4 years 268NURS11C53 1100 x 530 4-6 years 268NURS11C59 1100 x 590 6-8 years 268

Circular

*Supplied in Duraform Speckled Light Grey.

Frames match top colours.

Colours

Premium Tables From

£177

Colours

10year

guarantee

*Beech Red Blue Green Yellow

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 30 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

290-291 Nursery Standard Premium (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 11:00

Page 294: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Crush Bent & Fully Welded

292

classroom tables & chairs

Our Slide/Stacking tables are created with a robust crushed metal frame and a 25mm square leg system that is longer on one side enabling you to stack with ease.The frames are manufactured out of 1.5mm gauge steel and can be powder coated in a black or grey Epoxy Powder coat finish to give maximum life.We supply a wide range of work top finishes in Laminated MDF the edges can either be clear lacquered or 2mm PVC finish. 18mm thick top supplied as standard.

Rectangular Crush Bent

Rectangular Fully Welded

Code Description W x D £M01-MDF MDF Edge 1100 x 550 101M02-MDF MDF Edge 1200 x 600 103M01-PVC PVC Edge 1100 x 550 104M02-PVC PVC Edge 1200 x 600 106M01-PU PU Edge 1100 x 550 114M02-PU PU Edge 1200 x 600 116

Code Description W x D £ST1150-MDF MDF Edge 1100 x 550 101ST4-MDF MDF Edge 1200 x 600 103ST5-MDF MDF Edge 1500 x 600 179ST1150-PVC PVC Edge 1100 x 550 104ST4-PVC PVC Edge 1200 x 600 106ST5-PVC PVC Edge 1500 x 600 182ST1150-PU PU Edge 1100 x 550 114ST4-PU PU Edge 1200 x 600 116ST5-PU PU Edge 1500 x 600 192

5year

guarantee

Square Crush Bent

Square Fully Welded

Code Description W x D £MS1-MDF MDF Edge 600 x 600 86MS1-PVC PVC Edge 600 x 600 89MS1-PU PU Edge 600 x 600 98

Code Description W x D £ST1-MDF MDF Edge 600 x 600 86ST2-MDF MDF Edge 760 x 760 130ST3-MDF MDF Edge 900 x 900 147ST1-PVC PVC Edge 600 x 600 89ST2-PVC PVC Edge 760 x 760 133ST3-PVC PVC Edge 900 x 900 150ST1-PU PU Edge 600 x 600 99ST2-PU PU Edge 760 x 760 143ST3-PU PU Edge 900 x 900 160

MDF Standard Bullnosed (rounded) Edge. Polished and lacquered.

PVC 2mm (Shrink to Fit) A thick band of plastic which seals and protects the table edge.

PU edge A high impact and resilient textured spray PU edge. Table Heights Available Size 1 460mm Age 2-3 yearsSize 2 530mm Age 3-5 yearsSize 3 590mm Age 5-7 yearsSize 4 640mm Age 7-9 yearsSize 5 710mm Age 9-13 yearsSize 6 760mm Age 13-Adult

Edge OptionsMDF

Crush-BentStackable Frame

PVC PU

Quality Tables From

£86

Frame ColoursTop Colours

Maple Oak Beech Red Blue Green Yellow Light Grey Dark Grey Black Textured Black

Light Grey Textured Dark Grey

Textured Silver

Smooth Silver

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 20 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

292-293 Crush Bent Fully Welded 1 (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 11:06

Page 295: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Crush Bent & Fully Welded

293

classroom tables & chairs

These tables are available in a wide range of work top finishes such as laminated MDF, Beech, Blue, Red, Green and Yellow. We also offer a selection of table edge finishes. These tables can be made in many different shapes and sizes and still offer the Spiral Stacking System.The 25mm (square section) four legged frames can be powder coated in a black or grey Epoxy Powder coat finish to give maximum life.

Code Description W x D £TRZTM-MDF MDF Edge 1100 x 550 101TRZTM1-MDF MDF Edge 1200 x 600 103TRZTM-PVC PVC Edge 1100 x 550 104TRZTM1-PVC PVC Edge 1200 x 600 106TRZTM-PU PU Edge 1100 x 550 114TRZTM1-PU PU Edge 1200 x 600 116

Code Description W x D £TRZT1-MDF MDF Edge 1100 x 550 101TRZT-MDF MDF Edge 1200 x 600 103TRZT1-PVC PVC Edge 1100 x 550 104TRZT-PVC PVC Edge 1200 x 600 106TRZT1-PU PU Edge 1100 x 550 114TRZT-PU PU Edge 1200 x 600 116

Code Description Dia £CT1-MDF MDF Edge 600 140CTS10-MDF MDF Edge 1000 182CT1-PVC PVC Edge 600 143CTS10-PVC PVC Edge 1000 186CT1-PU PU Edge 600 153CTS10-PU PU Edge 1000 195

Code Description W x D £SCTRP-MDF MDF Edge 1100 x 550 101SCT12-MDF MDF Edge 1200 x 600 103SCTRP-PVC PVC Edge 1100 x 550 104SCT12-PVC PVC Edge 1200 x 600 106SCTRP-PU PU Edge 1100 x 550 114SCT12-PU PU Edge 1200 x 600 116

Circular Fully Welded

Semi Circular Fully Welded

Wide choice of colours

See opposite for frame & top colours.

Trapezoidal Crush Bent

Trapezoidal Fully Welded

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 20 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

292-293 Crush Bent Fully Welded 1 (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 11:06

Page 296: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Crush Bent & Fully Welded

294

classroom tables & chairs

The UK’s first choice for classroom tables, available in a wide choice of shapes and colours. All tables comply with BS EN 1729.

• Frames are supplied in Duraform speckled light grey paint as standard.

• Strong multipurpose tables available in 6 european standard sizes.

• Available with 10 top colours and 2 edge styles.

Rectangular Crush Bent (Stacking)Code Description W x D £CBSQ-115-MD MDF Edge 1100 x 550 107CBSQ-126-MD MDF Edge 1200 x 600 107CBSQ-115-PS Duraform Edge 1100 x 550 138CBSQ-126-PS Duraform Edge 1200 x 600 138

Rectangular Fully Welded (Stacking)Code Description W x D £SQSS-115-MD MDF Edge 1100 x 550 107SQSS-126-MD MDF Edge 1200 x 600 107SQSS-115-PS Duraform Edge 1100 x 550 138SQSS-126-PS Duraform Edge 1200 x 600 138

Classroom Tables From

£97

Square Crush Bent (Stacking)Code Description W x D £CBSQ-66-MD MDF Edge 600 x 600 97CBSQ-66-PS Duraform Edge 600 x 600 111

Square Fully WeldedCode Description W x D £SQSS-66-MD MDF Edge 600 x 600 102SQSS-66-PS Duraform Edge 600 x 600 122

MDF Standard Bullnosed (rounded) Edge. Polished and lacquered.

Duraform PU edge A high impact and resilient textured spray PU edge.

Note: Table will have rounded corners.Choose from Charcoal, Blue and Light Grey.If not specified, charcoal will be supplied.

Edge OptionsMDF Duraform

Top Colours

SquareRectangular

Red

Yellow

Blue

Light Grey

Green

Oak

White

Maple

Ailsa

Beech

Images shown are of fully welded option.

Frame Colour

Duraform Speckled Light Grey

5year

guarantee

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 30 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

294-295 Crush Bent Fully Welded 2 (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 11:29

Page 297: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Crush Bent & Fully Welded

295

classroom tables & chairs

Code Description W x D £CBSQ-11LE-MD MDF Edge 1100 x 550 107CBSQ-12LE-MD MDF Edge 1200 x 600 107CBSQ-11LE-PS Duraform Edge 1100 x 550 138CBSQ-12LE-PS Duraform Edge 1200 x 600 138(550/600 refers to 3 shortest edges)

Code Description W x D £SQSS-11LE-MD MDF Edge 1100 x 550 107SQSS-12LE-MD MDF Edge 1200 x 600 107SQSS-11LE-PS Duraform Edge 1100 x 550 138SQSS-12LE-PS Duraform Edge 1200 x 600 138(550/600 refers to 3 shortest edges)

Code Description Dia £CBSQ-10C-MD MDF Edge 1000 203CBSQ-10C-PS Duraform Edge 1000 228

Code Description Dia £SQSS-10C-MD MDF Edge 1000 169SQSS-11C-MD MDF Edge 1100 247SQSS-12C-MD MDF Edge 1200 254SQSS-10C-PS Duraform Edge 1000 205SQSS-11C-PS Duraform Edge 1100 270SQSS-12C-PS Duraform Edge 1200 284

Code Description Dia £SQSS-11SC-MD MDF Edge 1100 138SQSS-12SC-MD MDF Edge 1200 142SQSS-11SC-PS Duraform Edge 1100 160SQSS-12SC-PS Duraform Edge 1200 165

Circular Crush Bent (Stacking)

Circular Fully Welded

Semi Circular Fully Welded

Designed for ease of stacking

Table Heights Available Size 1 460mm Age 3-4 yearsSize 2 530mm Age 4-6 yearsSize 3 590mm Age 6-8 yearsSize 4 640mm Age 8-11 yearsSize 5 710mm Age 11-14 yearsSize 6 760mm Age 14-Adult

See opposite for frame & top colours.Crush-Bent Stackable Frame Fully Stackable Frame

Trapezoidal Circular

Semi Circular

Trapezoidal Crush Bent (Stacking)

Trapezoidal Fully Welded

Images shown are of fully welded option.

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 30 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

294-295 Crush Bent Fully Welded 2 (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 11:29

Page 298: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

TablesCode Description W x D £

PRCRAFT-126-MD MDF Edge 1200 x 600 332

PRCRAFT-157-MD MDF Edge 1500 x 750 494

PRCRAFT-126-PS Duraform Edge 1200 x 600 356

PRCRAFT-157-PS Duraform Edge 1500 x 750 530

PPRCRAFT-126-TRESPA TRESPA Edge 1200 x 600 750

PRCRAFT-157-TRESPA TRESPA Edge 1500 x 750 932

Craft Tables

296

classroom tables & chairs

Table Top Finishes - Laminate Table Top Finishes - Trespa

5year

guarantee

10year

guarantee

Available Table Heights: 760mm, 800mm, 850mm, 900mm, 1000mm

TablesCode Description W x D £

CRAFT-126-MD MDF Edge 1200 x 600 228

CRAFT-127-MD MDF Edge 1200 x 750 269

CRAFT-157-MD MDF Edge 1500 x 750 422

CRAFT-126-PS Duraform Edge 1200 x 600 250

CRAFT-127-PS Duraform Edge 1200 x 750 293

CRAFT-157-PS Duraform Edge 1500 x 750 460

CRAFT-126-TRESPA TRESPA Edge 1200 x 750 587

CRAFT-157-TRESPA TRESPA Edge 1500 x 750 834

This versatile range of tables are ideal for use throughout the school where extra strength, stability or height is required. In two different styles you will find the perfect design for your Art Room, Science Lab, Craft/Technology Studio.

Fully Welded FrameMade with 25mm square steel tubing to give a traditional feel to your classroom.

Premium FrameThis chunky 45mm round tube frame gives a bespoke designer feel and will give your classroom style and practicality in one.

Table Edges

MDF Duraform Trespa

Frame FinishSupplied in Duraform Speckled Light Grey paint as standard.

Beech Oak Ailsa Blue White Speckled Icey Blue

Speckled White

Speckled Pastel Grey

Speckled Powder Blue

Light Grey

Note: Trespa Tops are finished with an extra hard-wearing top for environments where heat, water and chemical resistance is essential.

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 30 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

296-297 Craft & Exam Tables (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 11:36

Page 299: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Exam Tables

297

classroom tables & chairs

Our ‘X’ Frame design enables you to fold the table after use and store away with ease. The slim body allows you to store in the narrowest of places. A folding exam table trolley is also available.

•22mmclearlacquerorPVCedges

•Plywoodtopsavailableonrequest

•Suppliedwithpengroove

•Allexamdesksarestackable

5year

guarantee

Folds Flat

Code W x D x H (mm) £EXS1 600 x 600 x 710 82

Code W x D x H (mm) £EXHD1 600 x 600 x 710 91

Nesting Table

Heavy Duty Cantilever Table

Code W x D x H (mm) £EXF1 600 x 525 x 710 52EXF2 600 x 600 x 710 52EXF3 600 x 450 x 710 52

Code Description £ET Exam Trolley (Holds 25 Folding Exam Desks) 309

Folding ‘X’ Frame Exam Desk

Folding Exam Desk Trolley

A favourite throughout

schools

Our Nesting Table is designed using 1.5mm gauge steel frame and a hard wearing work top. It is shaped to get stacked with ease and also perform as a comfortable table.•Thesetablescanbestacked5high

Our Heavy Duty Cantilever Table has a ‘Crush Bent’ steel frame design which allows you to slide them on top of each other when stacking. With a 25 x 25mm upper leg frame and 50 x 25mm lower/feet frame this makes this table a very strong and durable to use.•Thesetablescanbestacked5high

Laminate Table Top Colours

Maple

Yellow Laminate

Oak

Light Grey

Beech

Dark Grey

Red Laminate

Blue Laminate

Green Laminate Frame Colours

Black Textured Black

Light Grey Textured Dark Grey

Textured Silver

Smooth Silver

Table Heights AvailableSize Height Age1 460mm 2-3 yrs2 530mm 3-5 yrs3 590mm 5-7 yrs

Size Height Age4 640mm 7-9 yrs5 710mm 9-13 yrs6 760mm 13+ yrs

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 15-20 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

296-297 Craft & Exam Tables (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 11:36

Page 300: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Equation Leaf

298

classroom tables & chairs

Equation LeafCode Size £

LEAF-PS 1220mm x 875mm 342

1750mm diameter when 4 are put together to create a circular shape. This will seat 8 people comfortably.

Frame

10year

guarantee

The exciting Leaf table adds another dimension to the modular table range. The modern 32mm frame and 25mm top make this is a truly unique solution. Not only can this work brilliantly as a set of four to create a circular shaped table that brings students together, but the tables can be separated to allow individual or small group work. The Leaf can also be arranged in a set of four giving a fanned out effect which allows more students to sit round the table but still disperse into smaller groups. This stunning classroom table really does combine style, functionality and versatility. Each table is individually sold and comes with our Duraform PU edging as standard for extra long life cycle.

Edge Detail

Duraform

DuraformSpeckled Grey

A versatile range ideal for

education

Extremely hardwearing and resilient edge which has a textured finish. Note: Table will have rounded corners.Choose from Charcoal and Light Grey. Charcoal as standard.

Table Heights Available Size 1 460mm Age 3-4 yearsSize 2 530mm Age 4-6 yearsSize 3 590mm Age 6-8 yearsSize 4 640mm Age 8-11 yearsSize 5 710mm Age 11-14 yearsSize 6 760mm Age 14-Adult

Top Colours

Soft Lime Soft Blue Beech Biscuit Grey Speckle

Orange Flame

Canary Yellow

Tangy Green

Summer Blue

Maple Lilac Turquoise Purple White

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 30 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

298-299 Equation Leaf (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 11:39

Page 301: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Equation

299

classroom tables & chairs

This stylish 32mm frame is supplied with a resilient 25mm top which is finished with Duraform edging. Various shapes and colours are available to really brighten up your classroom! Other benefits include height adjustable feet so you can ensure that these tables never wobble, tamper proof screw fixings, and the addition of castors for manoeuvrability. Duraform light grey speckle frame paint as standard.

10year

guarantee

Square ArcCode Size (mm) £

EQUPR-11LE-PS 1100 x 550 181

EQUPR-12LE-PS 1200 x 600 185

Code Size (mm) £

EQUPR-66-PS 600 x 600 132

Code Size (mm) £

EQUPR-ARCV2-PS 1490 x 600 359

Trapezoidal

Semi Circular CircularCode Size (mm) £

EQUPR-115-PS 1100 x 550 193

EQUPR-126-PS 1200 x 600 197

Code Size (mm) £

EQUPR-12SC-PS 1200 Diameter 193

Code Size (mm) £

EQUPR-11C-PS 1100 Diameter 351

Rectangular

Edge DetailExtremely hardwearing and resilient edge which has a textured finish. Note: Table will have rounded corners.Choose from Charcoal, Light Grey and Blue. Charcoal as standard.

For table heights available see page opposite.

Top Colours

Soft Lime Soft Blue Beech Biscuit Grey Speckle

Orange Flame

Canary Yellow

Tangy Green

Summer Blue

Maple Lilac Purple White

Frame Colour

Duraform Speckled Light Grey

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 30 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

298-299 Equation Leaf (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 11:39

Page 302: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Enviro

300

classroom tables & chairs

Choice of shapes, sizes

& heights

Enviro Classroom TablesCode Product Dimensions mm Weight Available Heights £

Description Length x width KG 760mm 710mm 640mm 590mm 530mm 460mm

EN/FA38 Square 750 x 750 12.80 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 203

EN/DB38 Rectangular 1200 x 600 15.30 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 220

EN/CT38 Trapezoidal 1400 x 590 14.20 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 232

EN/CA38 Rectangular 1400 x 750 19.50 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ 258

For a truly stylish classroom, look no further than Enviro. The smart silver anodised table legs and frame, and attractive wipe-clean laminate tops with contrasting ABS edge will fit perfectly in any classroom environment. Available in a choice of sizes, shapes and heights to suit all age groups from reception through to Sixth Form. The lightweight aluminium table frame and honeycomb core to the table top ensures the table is lighter in weight than most classroom tables, while still retaining its strength and durability.

Square EN/FA38 Rectangular EN/DB38 Rectangular EN/CA38 Trapezoidal EN/CT38

1. Select shape and size, 2. Select height, 3. Select top colour, 4. Select edge colour

5year

guarantee

FrameColour Range Edge Range

GP99 GP24 GP58GP57

Clear Maple

Grey Dots Sparta Mid Grey Dusky Blue

Ruby Red SilverJapanese Beech

Light Grey

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 25 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

300-301 Enviro & Computer Trolleys (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 12:01

Page 303: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Computer Trolleys

301

classroom tables & chairs

Our computer trolleys are the simple solution for any school, office, factory or community centre. All items are delivered flat pack.

A simple solution for

schools

Optional keyboard shelf available on all models

Code: EF8057

ADD £61

EF8057

Code W x D x H (mm) £CF7038 675 x 660 x 725 204

Small Budget Workstation

Code W x D x H (mm) £EF8049 1000 x 650 x 500-750 489Fixed Height - choose between 500-750mm (in 50mm increments from floor to main work surface)

Single Tier Fixed Height

Code W x D x H (mm) £CF7049 850 x 506 x 840 225

Code W x D x H (mm) £EF8046 1000 x 650 x 500-750 505Fixed Height - choose between 500-750mm (in 50mm increments from floor to main work surface)

Tower Workstation

Two Tier Fixed Height

Fixed Height Trolleys:These are non-returnable

Frame Colours Top Colours

Blue Grey BeechRed5year

guarantee

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 20 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

300-301 Enviro & Computer Trolleys (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 12:01

Page 304: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Budget Storage

302

classroom storage

Delivered to a room of choice within 15 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

1 Bay, 6 & 8 Tray

6 Tray Unit Shown

12 Tray Unit Shown

Practical, affordable and available within 15 days, these strongly constructed storage units come complete with your choice of coloured trays and castors.

•Stronglyconstructedstorageunitswithachoiceof coloured trays.

•Unitssuppliedcompletewithtrays.

•Beechcarcassonly

•Unitsaresuppliedcompletewithcastorsasstandard.

2 Bay, 12 & 16 Tray

3 Bay, 18 Tray

3 Bay, 24 Tray

1 Bay, 6 & 8 Tray Beech CarcassCode Description W x D x H (mm) £

WETS6BCH 6 Tray Unit 366 x 468 x 613 92

WETS8BCH 8 Tray Unit 366 x 468 x 783 97

3 Bay, 18 Tray Beech CarcassCode Description W x D x H (mm) £

WETS18BCH 18 Tray Unit 1054 x 468 x 613 197

Multi-Deep Tray Storage UnitsCode Description W x D x H (mm) £

WETS12BCH 12 Tray Unit 710 x 468 x 613 143

WETS16BCH 16 Tray Unit 710 x 468 x 783 144

3 Bay, 24 Tray Beech CarcassCode Description W x D x H (mm) £

WETS24BCH 24 Tray Unit 1054 x 468 x 783 230

Tray Colours Available

BCH5year

guarantee

Red Yellow Blue Green Beech Carcass

302-303 Budget Storage (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 12:05

Page 305: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Budget Storage

303

classroom storage

Delivered to a room of choice within 15 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Manufactured from 18mm beech MFC complete with castors (2 locking) trays. Trays are available in any colour combination. All units delivered fully assembled.

A simple solution for

schools

Code Description W x D x H (mm) £

ST006 6 Deep Tray Unit 622 x 453 x 789 276

ST008 8 Deep Tray Unit 622 x 453 x 1026 302

ST009 9 Deep Tray Unit 922 x 453 x 789 351

ST012 12 Deep Tray Unit 1222 x 453 x 789 422

ST016 16 Deep Tray Unit 1222 x 453 x 1026 533

Code Description W x D x H (mm) £

STOPENSM Small 1180 x 380 x 560 224

STOPENMED Medium 1180 x 380 x 760 257

STOPENLGE Large 1180 x 380 x 910 289

Code Description W x D x H (mm) £

ST0403 4 Shallow & 3 Deep Tray Unit 622 x 453 x 789 283

ST0806 8 Shallow & 6 Deep Tray Unit 1222 x 453 x 789 458

Code Description W x D x H (mm) £

ST321RH Right Hand 1015 x 470 x 875 442

ST321LH Left Hand 1015 x 470 x 875 442

Multi-Deep Tray Storage Units

Tiered Access Units with 6 Trays

Tray Colours Available

T BCH5year

guarantee

Deep Tray Storage Units

Small, Medium & Large Display Units

Tiered Access Units with 6 trays (Left & Right hand)

Multi-Deep Tray Storage Units

STOPENLGE

ST012

ST0806

ST321RH

Deep Tray Storage Units

Small, Medium & Large Display Units

Blue Red Yellow Clear Beech Carcass

302-303 Budget Storage (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 12:05

Page 306: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Shallow Tray Storage

304

classroom storage

A comprehensive range of strongly constructed storage units with a large choice of coloured trays. Units are supplied complete with coloured or clear trays, castors and in beech with optional coloured tops.

1 Bay

2 Bay

Code Description W x D x H (mm) £

MEQ1W 6 Tray Unit 360 x 453 x 617 143

MEQ8H 8 Tray Unit 360 x 453 x 789 255With Coloured Top

MEQ1WCOLTOP 6 Tray Unit 360 x 453 x 617 Add 17

MEQ8HCOLTOP 8 Tray Unit 360 x 453 x 789 Add 17

Code Description W x D x H (mm) £

MEQ2W 12 Tray Unit 700 x 453 x 617 239

MEQ16 16 Tray Unit 700 x 453 x 789 372With Coloured Top

MEQ2WCOLTOP 12 Tray Unit 700 x 453 x 617 Add 17

MEQ16COLTOP 16 Tray Unit 700 x 453 x 789 Add 17

3 BayCode Description W x D x H (mm) £

MEQ3W 18 Tray Unit 1030 x 453 x 617 288

MEQ21 21 Tray Unit 1030 x 453 x 703 402

MEQ4W 24 Tray Unit 1030 x 453 x 789 347

With Coloured Top

MEQ3WCOLTOP 18 Tray Unit 1030 x 453 x 617 Add 17

MEQ21COLTOP 21 Tray Unit 1030 x 453 x 703 Add 17

MEQ4WCOLTOP 24 Tray Unit 1030 x 453 x 789 Add 17

OptionsCode Description £

MEQ1001 Lockable Doors per pair 107

EF8820 Clip on Lid for Tray 7

1 Bay

3 Bay

MEQ1W Shownwith Clear Trays

2 Bay

Lockable Doors Pair of doors for any wooden storage units.

Clip on Lids

5year

guarantee

Tray Colours

Top ColoursCarcassTray ColoursBCH

Shallow & deep only

Red

Lemon Jelly Strawberry Jelly

Grey Beech Red GreenYellow Blue

Yellow Blue Green Clear Purple Lime Cyan Pink Tangerine Kiwi Jelly Grape Jelly Blueberry Jelly

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 15 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

304-305 Shallow & Combi Storage (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 12:08

Page 307: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Combination Tray Storage

305

classroom storage

Mix and match between deep or shallow trays to create the combination to meet your requirement.

Code Description £

EF8820 Clip on Lid for Tray 7Code Description W x D x H (mm) £

MEQ4012 12 Deep 1358 x 453 x 707 519

MEQ4016 16 Deep 1358 x 453 x 835 622

MEQ4018 18 Deep 1030 x 453 x 1210 673

Combination Tray StorageOptions

18 Deep or 36 Shallow

16 Deep or 32 Shallow

12 Deep or 24 Shallow

Clip on Lids

5year

guarantee

Tray Colours

CarcassTray ColoursBCH

Shallow & deep only

Red

Lemon Jelly Strawberry Jelly

Grey Beech

Yellow Blue Green Clear Purple Lime Cyan Pink Tangerine Kiwi Jelly Grape Jelly Blueberry Jelly

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 15 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

304-305 Shallow & Combi Storage (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 12:08

Page 308: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Variety Tray Storage

306

classroom storage

This range provides differing sizes of trays to meet a changeable storage requirement. The range comes with a choice of 14 different tray colours. Coloured tops available.

Variety Tray StorageCode Description W x D x H (mm) £

MEQ1108 8 Tray Unit 700 x 453 x 967 425

MEQ1112 12 Tray Unit 1030 x 453 x 967 535

MEQ1031 12 Tray Unit 1358 x 453 x 707 612

MEQ1116 16 Tray Unit 1358 x 453 x 967 676

OptionsCode Description £

EF8820 Clip on Lid for Tray 7

Clip on Lids

Shown withClear Trays

16 Tray

12 Tray

8 Tray Unit

12 Tray

MEQ1108

MEQ1031

MEQ1116

MEQ1112

5year

guarantee

Tray Colours

CarcassTray ColoursBCH

Shallow & deep only

Red

Lemon Jelly

Strawberry Jelly

Grey Beech

Yellow Blue Green Clear Purple Lime Cyan Pink Tangerine Kiwi Jelly Grape Jelly Blueberry Jelly

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 15 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

306-307 Variety & Extra Deep Storage (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 12:10

Page 309: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Extra Deep Tray Storage

307

classroom storage

Code Description W x D x H (mm) £

MEQ1015 12 Jumbo Tray Unit 1358 x 453 x 1067 629

MEQ1062 6 Jumbo Tray Unit 1030 x 453 x 739 566

MEQ1021 8 Jumbo Tray Unit 1358 x 453 x 739 492

MEQ1061 9 Jumbo Tray Unit 1030 x 453 x 1067 599

MEQ1011 6 Jumbo Tray Unit 700 x 453 x 1067 432

Jumbo Tray Storage

Jumbo Tray Storage

MEQ1061

MEQ1011

See opposite page for colour options & clip on lids

MEQ1021

MEQ1062

MEQ1015

MEQ3116

Extra Deep StorageA comprehensive range of strongly constructed storage units with a wide variety of coloured or clear trays to brighten up your classroom.

Code Description W x D x H (mm) £

MEQ3106 6 Extra Deep Tray Unit 700 x 453 x 857 328

MEQ3112 12 Extra Deep Tray Unit 1358 x 453 x 857 572

MEQ3116 16 Extra Deep Tray Unit 1358 x 453 x 1115 713

Extra Deep Tray Storage

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 20 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

306-307 Variety & Extra Deep Storage (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 12:10

Page 310: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Mobile Book Storage

308

classroom storage

All units come assembled with castors.

•Stronglyconstructedunitswithachoiceofcolouredtrays.

•Beechcarcassonly

3 Straight ShelvesCode W x D x H (mm) £

MEQ3BS 1040 x 502 x 883 285

2 Angled, 1 Flat ShelfCode W x D x H (mm) £

MEQ2LU 1040 x 502 x 883 285

3 Angled & 3 Straight Shelves

3 Angled Shelves Each Side

Mobile 6 Slot Big Book Holder

Code W x D x H (mm) £

MEQ3AS 3SS 1040 x 502 x 883 285

Code W x D x H (mm) £

MEQ3LU 1040 x 502 x 883 285

Code W x D x H (mm) £

MEQBBH 695 x 504 x 760 331

•3angledshelvesonesideand3straightshelves on the other side

•3angledshelveseachside

•Mobile6slotbigbookholder

•3straightshelvesbothsides

•2angled1flatshelfbothsides

Allproductsonthispagearepricedtobedeliveredwithin15workingdaystogroundfloor,nearestundercoverpoint.Certainexceptionsseepage2.

308-309 Mobile Book Storage (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 12:12

Page 311: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Mobile Book Storage

309

classroom storage

Code W x D x H (mm) £

MEQ4000 690 x 453 x 600 315

Code W x D x H (mm) £

MEQ4002 1015 x 450 x 820 411

Code W x D x H (mm) £

MEQ4001 1022 x 453 x 600 449

Art/Book Storage

Book/Art Storage

Art Storage

•8shallowor4deeptrayswith 4 Kinderboxes

• Doublesided6bayKinderboxwith1fixedshelf either side

All units come complete

with trays & castors

OptionsCode Description £

EF8820 CliponLidforTray 7

5year

guarantee

TrayColours

CarcassTrayColoursBCH

Shallow & deeponly

Clip on Lids

Red

Lemon Jelly

StrawberryJelly

Grey Beech

Yellow Blue Green Clear Purple Lime Cyan Pink Tangerine KiwiJelly Grape Jelly

BlueberryJelly

Allproductsonthispagearepricedtobedeliveredwithin25workingdaystogroundfloor,nearestundercoverpoint.Certainexceptionsseepage2.

308-309 Mobile Book Storage (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 12:12

Page 312: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

5year

guarantee

Colours Available Carcass Finishes

Curve Storage & Seating

310

classroom storage

•Unitscomewithoutcushionsasstandard

•Cushionsareavailableatextracost

•Unitsareavailableasstaticonly

•Sturdy18mmconstruction

•Includestrays,anddeliveredfullyassembled

Book and Seat Storage IslandCode Description Height £

C300CT11 1TrayHigh 660mm 985

C400CT11 2TrayHigh 840mm 1264

C550CT11 3TrayHigh 1020mm 1537

Curve Console Island

Half Moon Storage

Code Description Height £

C300CT9 1TrayHigh 266mm 1214

C400CT9 2TrayHigh 463mm 1709

C550CT9 3TrayHigh 661mm 2171

Code Description Height £

C300CT2 1TrayHigh 266mm 287

C400CT2 2TrayHigh 463mm 415

C550CT2 3TrayHigh 661mm 536Red Yellow Blue Green Beech Maple Oak

Allproductsonthispagearepricedtobedeliveredwithin20workingdaystogroundfloor,nearestundercoverpoint.Certainexceptionsseepage2.

310-311 Curve Storage & Seating (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 12:15

Page 313: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Curve Storage & Seating

311

classroom storage

Code Description Height £

LeftHand

C300CT6L 1TrayHigh 266mm 307

C400CT6L 2TrayHigh 463mm 429

C550CT6L 3TrayHigh 661mm 550

RightHand

C300CT6R 1TrayHigh 266mm 307

C400CT6R 2TrayHigh 463mm 429

C550CT6R 3TrayHigh 661mm 550

Single Corner Units

Code Description Height £

C300CT10 1TrayHigh 266mm 550

C400CT10 2TrayHigh 463mm 654

C550CT10 3TrayHigh 661mm 769

Book Seat Storage

Code Description Height £

LeftHand

C300CT7L 1TrayHigh 266mm 405

C400CT7L 2TrayHigh 463mm 536

C550CT7L 3TrayHigh 661mm 708

RightHand

C300CT7R 1TrayHigh 266mm 405

C400CT7R 2TrayHigh 463mm 536

C550CT7R 3TrayHigh 661mm 708

Double Corner Units

W413 x D413mm

Double:W372xD1217mm

Single:W372xD462mm

Double: W1157xD463mm

Single:W785xD463mm

Double:W1157

LeftHand

RightHand

Code Description Height £

C300CT1 1TrayHigh 266mm 203

C400CT1 2TrayHigh 463mm 267

C550CT1 3TrayHigh 661mm 327

Code Description Height £

C300CT3 1TrayHigh 266mm 223

C400CT3 2TrayHigh 463mm 277

C550CT3 3TrayHigh 661mm 337

Quarter Corner Storage

Column Storage

Allproductsonthispagearepricedtobedeliveredwithin20workingdaystogroundfloor,nearestundercoverpoint.Certainexceptionsseepage2.

310-311 Curve Storage & Seating (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 12:15

Page 314: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

5year

guarantee

Top Colours

Carcass Finishes

Nexus Bookcases

312

classroom storage

The Nexus bookcases are available in three wood finish carcass options along with four colour options for tops and shelves. Suitable for all ages and ideal for libraries or classrooms. Supplied fully assembled.

Single Sided with Coloured Display Top

Single Sided with Coloured Display & Shelves

Single Sided with Flat-Top

Single Sided - Display & Shelves Single Sided - Flat TopCode Size (mm) £

FD322ST 704 x 305 x 900 408

FD325ST 704 x 305 x 1200 461

FD331ST 704 x 305 x 1800 616

Code Size (mm) £

FD322STC 704 x 305 x 900 408

FD325STC 704 x 305 x 1200 461

FD331STC 704 x 305 x 1800 616

Code Size (mm) £

FD302ST 704 x 305 x 900 372

FD305ST 704 x 305 x 1200 423

FD311ST 704 x 305 x 1800 533

Single Sided - Coloured Top

Red

Green

Beech Maple Oak

Yellow Blue

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 20 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

312-313 Nexus Bookcases Library Units (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 12:18

Page 315: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Nexus Library Units

313

classroom storage

Nexus offers a range of shelving and library units which have been designed to fit together. The system is designed to maximise storage and display potential whilst keeping costs to a minimum.These high quality units are constructed using 18mm MFC and shelves and sides are available in any of the colours shown.Shelving units are supplied as starter units which are complete, and add-on units which have a transport end panel which is discarded to allow the add-on to be connected to the starter unit for a seemless finish.Suitable for all ages and ideal for libraries, classrooms or corridors.

Combination 1 Combination 2

Combination 4

•2singlesidedreversibleshelfbookcases •1singlesidedflattopbookcase

•2singlesidedbookcaseswithcolourdisplayshelf •1benchseatwithback

•2benchseatswithbacks •1cornerbenchseatwithback •1singlesidedflattopbookcase •2singlesideddisplaytopbookcases •1singlesidedreversibleshelfbookcase

FD346ST

FD306AD

FD346AD

FD326ST

FD326ST

FD404FD404

FD405

FD345ST

FD305AD

FD325AD

FD325ST

FD404

Code Description W x D x H (mm) £

NC962 Combination 3105 x 305 x 1200 1791FD346ST Starter 1047 x 305 x 1200 683

FD306AD Add on 1029 x 305 x 1200 456

FD346AD Add on 1029 x 305 x 1200 652

Code Description W x D x H (mm) £

NC963 Combination 3141 x 305 x 1200 1676FD326ST Starter 1047 x 305 x 1200 540

FD404 Bench 1047 x 305 x 1200 596

FD326ST Starter 1047 x 305 x 1200 540

Code Description W x D x H (mm) £

NC965 Combination 5274 x 305 x 1200 3537FD345ST Starter 704 x 305 x 1200 591

FD404 Bench 1047 x 400 x 1200 596

FD405 Corner Bench 400 x 400 x 1200 458

FD404 Bench 1047 x 400 x 1200 596

FD325ST Starter 704 x 305 x 1200 461

FD305AD Add on 686 x 305 x 1200 397

FD325AD Add on 686 x 305 x 1200 438

Nexus Combination 2

Nexus Combination 4

Nexus Combination 1

5year

guarantee

Top Available Carcass Finishes

Red BeechYellow MapleGreenBlue Oak

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 20 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

312-313 Nexus Bookcases Library Units (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 12:18

Page 316: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

5year

guarantee

Nexus Curve

314

classroom storage

An additional design to compliment our best selling Nexus Library range. Manufactured from high quality 18mm MFC, and all units are manufactured as mobile with two locking castors. Single sided and double sided units are available.

Single Sided Concave BookcasesCode Description W x D x H (mm) £

WBLR3/9 Concave 1180 x 835 x 900 624

WBLR3/12 Concave 1180 x 835 x 1200 740

Single Sided Convex BookcasesCode Description W x D x H (mm) £

WBLR2/9 Convex 1180 x 835 x 900 624

WBLR2/12 Convex 1180 x 835 x 1200 740

Double Sided Concave Bookcases

Double Sided Convex Bookcases

Code Description W x D x H (mm) £

WBLR9/9 Concave 1575 x 1115 x 900 812

WBLR9/12 Concave 1575 x 1115 x 1200 1053

WBLR9/15 Concave 1575 x 1115 x 1500 1408

Code Description W x D x H (mm) £

WBLR8/9 Convex 1575 x 1115 x 900 812

WBLR8/12 Convex 1575 x 1115 x 1200 1053

WBLR8/15 Convex 1575 x 1115 x 1500 1408

Single Sided Straight Bookcases

Double Sided Straight Bookcases

Code W x D x H (mm) £

WBLR1/9 1000 x 320 x 900 416

WBLR1/12 1000 x 320 x 1200 494

WBLR1/6/9 600 x 320 x 900 372

WBLR1/6/12 600 x 320 x 1200 376

Code W x D x H (mm) £

WBLR7/9 1000 x 600 x 900 581

WBLR7/12 1000 x 600 x 1200 753

WBLR7/15 1000 x 600 x 1500 888

WBLR7/6/9 600 x 600 x 900 483

WBLR7/6/12 600 x 600 x 1200 665

WBLR7/6/15 600 x 600 x 1500 746

Single Sided Straight Bookcases

Single Sided Convex Bookcases

Single Sided Concave Bookcases

WBLR1/9

WBLR2/9

WBLR3/9

Curved back only available in cream

Carcass Finishes

Beech

Maple

Oak

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 20 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

314-315 Nexus Curve & Paper Storage (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 12:20

Page 317: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

MEQPSU4

Paper Storage

315

classroom storage

Code W x D x H £

MEQPC 1015 x 750 x 780mm 756

MEQPCCD 1015 x 750 x 780mm 756

Code W x D x H £

MEQPSU4 (without doors) 1015 x 750 x 780mm 663

MEQPSUD (with doors, not shown) 1015 x 770 x 780mm 733

6 Drawer Plan Chest (static)

4 Sliding Drawer Open Paper Storage

4 Sliding Drawer Open Paper Storage (mobile)

MEQPC

MEQPCCD

6 Drawer Plan Chest (static)

Literature Sorter

• Suitable for up to A1 paper size.

• Suitable for up to A1 paper size.

CT3048

CT3046

CT3047

CT3048 - Suitable for 12 A4 Lever Arch folders

CT3046 - Suitable for 20 A4 Ringbinders

CT3047 - 20 Shelf literature sorter

Code W x D x H £

CT3048 610 x 320 x 770mm 318

CT3046 610 x 320 x 770mm 318

CT3047 610 x 320 x 770mm 318

Literature Sorters

5year

guarantee

All products on this page are priced to be delivered within 15 working days to ground floor, nearest under cover point. Certain exceptions see page 2.

314-315 Nexus Curve & Paper Storage (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 12:20

Page 318: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

1year

guarantee

Low Height Lockers

316

classroom storage

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

1 Door School Locker

3 Door School Locker

Code Size H x W x D mm Single £ Nest of 2 £ Nest of 3 £

133030SL 1370 x 300 x 300 90 175 261

133045SL 1370 x 300 x 450 106 207 310

Code Size H x W x D mm Single £ Nest of 2 £ Nest of 3 £

1330303 1370 x 300 x 300 129 251 375

1330453 1370 x 300 x 450 138 272 407

2 Door School LockerCode Size H x W x D mm Single £ Nest of 2 £ Nest of 3 £

1330302 1370 x 300 x 300 115 224 335

1330452 1370 x 300 x 450 126 247 367

Available Door Colours

• EliteGuardAnti-bacterial powder coating.

• Speciallowheight.

• Suppliedinneststosave costs.

• Reinforceddoors.

•Hangingcompartmentwith double coat hook & shelf.

• Lockingoptions.

• EliteGuardAnti-bacterial powder coating.

• Speciallowheight.

• Suppliedinneststosave costs.

• Reinforceddoors.

• Lockingoptions.

• Perforateddooroption.

• EliteGuardAnti-bacterial powder coating.

• Speciallowheight.

• Suppliedinneststo save costs.

• Reinforceddoors.

•Hangingcompartment with double coat hook.

• Lockingoptions.

1 Door

3 Door

2 Door

AllCarcassesareGrey

Green

Yellow

Dark Blue

Maroon

RedPastel Blue

Grey

316-317 Low & Full Height Lockers (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 12:23

Page 319: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Full Height Lockers

317

classroom storage

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Lockers have officially gone green on our selected range of Storage Lockers that contain Abbeysteel™ sustainably sourced steel lockerscontainbetween11-44%steeloff-cutfromtheautomotiveindustryreducingtheirCO2footprint.Thestoragelockersalsocontainananti-bacterialpowdercoatingandareUKmanufactured.

4 Digit CombinationLockwithMasterKeyPOA

Numbered KeyFobandPlate£9 (each)

AdditionalKeys£9

MasterKey£30

ElectronicCombination LockPOA

HangingRail£11

£1CoinReturnorTokenReturnLock£39

Fitting for Padlock Specify at time of order FOC

SlopingTop(mm)300 x 300, Code: ST3030Price:£14300 x 450, Code: ST3045Price:£16450 x 450, Code:ST4545Price:£18

LockerExtras

Fitted with shelf & double coat hook

Fitted with double coat hook in each compartment

Supplied with no internal fittings

Supplied with no internal fittings

NestofThree

NestofTwo

Sing

le L

ocke

r

•Slopingtopmustbeorderedwithlockersandisonlyavailableonsingleandnestof2lockers.• Lockerstandsavailableonrequest,pleaseaskfordetails,onlyavailableonsingleandnestof2lockers.

Code Size H x W x D mm Single £ Nest of 2 £ Nest of 3 £

1830305 1800 x 300 x 300 169 332 494

1830455 1800 x 300 x 450 183 362 537

Code Size H x W x D mm Single £

1830306 1800 x 300 x 300 182

1830456 1800 x 300 x 450 195

Code Size H x W x D mm Single £

1830308 1800 x 300 x 300 232

1830458 1800 x 300 x 450 255

(Nestingoptionnotavailable)

Five Door Locker

Six Door Locker

Eight Door Locker

Single Door Locker

Two Door Locker

Four Door Locker

Three Door Locker

Code Size H x W x D mm Single £ Nest of 2 £ Nest of 3 £

183030S 1800 x 300 x 300 99 192 286

183045S 1800 x 300 x 450 119 231 345

184545S 1800 x 450 x 450 142 N/A N/A

Code Size H x W x D mm Single £ Nest of 2 £ Nest of 3 £

1830302 1800 x 300 x 300 124 244 398

1830452 1800 x 300 x 450 137 268 399

1845452 1800 x 450 x 450 159 N/A N/A

Code Size H x W x D mm Single £ Nest of 2 £ Nest of 3 £

1830304 1800 x 300 x 300 149 294 439

1830454 1800 x 300 x 450 166 326 487

1845454 1800 x 450 x 450 192 N/A N/A

Code Size H x W x D mm Single £ Nest of 2 £ Nest of 3 £

1830303 1800 x 300 x 300 136 265 397

1830453 1800 x 300 x 450 154 300 451

Supplied with no internal fittings

Supplied with no internal fittings

Supplied with no internal fittingsChoice of two sizes available. 550mm deep lockers available-pleaseaskfordetails. 1

year guarantee

AllCarcassesareGrey

Available Door Colours

Green YellowDark Blue MaroonRedPastel Blue Grey

316-317 Low & Full Height Lockers (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 12:23

Page 320: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Low Height Lockers

318

classroom storage

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

DisabilityCode Size H x W x D mm Single £

133030DL 1370 x 300 x 300 109

133045DL 1370 x 300 x 450 123

CubeCode Size H x W x D mm Single £

303030C 300 x 300 x 300 53

383838C 380 x 380 x 380 60

454545C 450 x 450 x 450 68

Supplied with no internal fittings

• Idealmodularstorage solution in difficult areas.

•Pre-drilledfornesting.

•EliteGuardAnti-bacterial powder coating.

• Lockingoptions.

•Reinforceddoors.

•Perforateddooroption•Secureremotestoragesolutions

• Idealforutilisingawkwardareas

•Boltedtoformstacksornests

•3sizes:300,380and450mm

•Lockingoptions

•Perforateddooroption

Quarto Locker

Disability Locker

Cube Locker

1year

guaranteeAvailableDoorColours

Green YellowDarkBlue MaroonRedPastel Blue

Grey

QuartoCode Size H x W x D mm Single £

513045QU 512 x 300 x 450 67

Supplied with no internal fittings

•Specialheightfordisabledusers

• Lowlevelshelf

•Reinforceddoors

•Doublecoathook

• Lockingoptions

318-319 Lockers & Cloakroom (15).indd 1 25/11/2014 12:27

Page 321: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Cloakroom Seating

319

classroom storage

Delivered to a room of choice within 20 working days fully assembled. Packaging removed and recycled. Certain exceptions see page 2.

Code No of Hooks Size H x W x D mm £

IS120DST 18 1800x1200x760 727

IS150DST 24 1800x1500x760 790

Code No of Compartments Size H x W x D mm £

IS120DSB 16 1800x1200x760 811

IS150DSB 20 1800x1500x760 896

Code No of Hooks Size H x W x D mm £

IS120S 9 1800x1200x400 310

IS150S 12 1800x1500x400 331

Code No of Compartments Size H x W x D mm £

IS120DSSB 8 1800x1200x400 458

IS150DSSB 10 1800x1500x400 507

Double Sided + Shoe Tray

Double Sided + Shoe Compartments

Single Sided

Single Sided + Shoe Compartments

Double Sided

Single Sided + Shoe Tray

Bench Seating

Code No of Hooks Size H x W x D mm £

IS120D 18 1800x1200x760 515

IS150D 24 1800x1500x760 545

Code No of Hooks Size H x W x D mm £

IS120SST 9 1800x1200x400 416

IS150SST 12 1800x1500x400 457

Code Length mm £

BS60 600 120

BS90 900 144

BS120 1200 167

BS150 1500 196

BS180 1800 261

1year

guarantee

BenchSeating

Practical seating at practical prices. •Welded38mmtubularsteel.•Suppliedwithdoublecoathooksandashwoodslats.•Shoecompartmentsortrayoptions.•Powdercoatedpaintfinish,red,grey,yellow,green.•Floorfixingbracket.•Suppliedflatpacked.

Practical seating at practical prices. •Ashwoodslats.•Welded38mmtubularsteel.•Freestanding.•Powdercoatedred,grey,yellow,green.

Double sided fitted with shoe compartments

Double sided fitted with shoe tray

Single sided fitted with shoe tray

Double sided

IslandSeating

Single sided fitted with shoe compartments

Single sided

318-319 Lockers & Cloakroom (15).indd 2 25/11/2014 12:27

Page 322: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Our standard fabric choice comes from two of the UK’s premier fabric manufacturers, Camira and Bradbury. Although the majority of chairs and screens featured in this catalogue can be upholstered in any fabric, you may wish to specify and establish a price difference, if any.

Both manufacturers offer a wide variety of colours and materials suitable for commercial and contract environments. To assist with your choice of upholstery, take advantage of Camira and Bradbury’s excellent swatch sample service, which can be found with full fabric listings on their respective websites.

Fabric Information

320

To o

rder

sam

ple

s, v

isit

ou

r o

n-l

ine

sam

ple

ser

vice

ww

w.c

amir

afab

rics

.co

m/s

amp

les

To o

rder

sam

ple

s, v

isit

ou

r o

n-l

ine

sam

ple

ser

vice

ww

w.b

rad

bu

ryfa

bri

cs.c

om

To o

rder

sam

ple

s, v

isit

ou

r o

n-l

ine

sam

ple

ser

vice

ww

w.c

amir

afab

rics

.co

m/s

amp

les

To o

rder

sam

ple

s, v

isit

ou

r o

n-l

ine

sam

ple

ser

vice

ww

w.b

rad

bu

ryfa

bri

cs.c

om

To o

rder

sam

ple

s, v

isit

ou

r o

n-l

ine

sam

ple

ser

vice

ww

w.c

amir

afab

rics

.co

m/s

amp

les

To o

rder

sam

ple

s, v

isit

ou

r o

n-l

ine

sam

ple

ser

vice

ww

w.b

rad

bu

ryfa

bri

cs.c

om

To o

rder

sam

ple

s, v

isit

ou

r o

n-l

ine

sam

ple

ser

vice

ww

w.c

amir

afab

rics

.co

m/s

amp

les

To o

rder

sam

ple

s, v

isit

ou

r o

n-l

ine

sam

ple

ser

vice

ww

w.b

rad

bu

ryfa

bri

cs.c

om

To o

rder

sam

ple

s, v

isit

ou

r o

n-l

ine

sam

ple

ser

vice

ww

w.c

amir

afab

rics

.co

m/s

amp

les

To o

rder

sam

ple

s, v

isit

ou

r o

n-l

ine

sam

ple

ser

vice

ww

w.b

rad

bu

ryfa

bri

cs.c

om

Pyra (Seating)Flammability: BS7176: 2007 Low HazardAbrasion Resistance: 60,000 Rub matrindale. 5 Year guarantee.

Flambend (Seating)Flammability: BS7176: 2007 Medium HazardAbrasion Resistance: 100,000 Rubs matrindale. Stain repellent treated. 5 Year guarantee.

Omega Plus (Seating)Flammability: BS7176: 2007 Medium HazardAbrasion Resistance: 100,000 Rubs matrindale.Popular crepe weave. 5 Year guarantee.

Screen 66 (Screens)Flammability: BS476: Part 7 Class 1 Vertical Surface Test.Abrasion Resistance: 40,000 Rubs matrindale. 5 Year guarantee.

Galaxy (Screens)Flammability: BS476: Part 7 Class 1 Vertical Surface Test.Abrasion Resistance: 50,000 Rubs matrindale. 5 Year guarantee.

Advantage (Seating)Flammability: BS7176: 2007 Low Hazard Abrasion Resistance: 90,000 Matrindale cycles. 5 Year guarantee.

Phoenix (Seating)Flammability: BS7176: 2007 Low HazardAbrasion Resistance: 100,000 Matrindale cycles.5 Year guarantee.

Urban Plus (Seating)Flammability: BS7176: 2007 Medium Hazard. Abrasion Resistance: 100,000 Matrindale cycles. Second nature recycled fabric. 5 Year guarantee.

Xtreme Plus (Seating)Flammability: BS7176: 2007 Medium HazardPopular crepe weave upholstery fabric10 Year guarantee.

Lucia (Screens)Flammability: BS7176: 2007 Medium HazardAbrasion Resistance: 100,000 Matrindale cycles. Second nature recycled fabric.5 Year guarantee.

To o

rder

sam

ple

s, v

isit

ou

r o

n-l

ine

sam

ple

ser

vice

ww

w.c

amir

afab

rics

.co

m/s

amp

les

To o

rder

sam

ple

s, v

isit

ou

r o

n-l

ine

sam

ple

ser

vice

ww

w.b

rad

bu

ryfa

bri

cs.c

om

To o

rder

sam

ple

s, v

isit

ou

r o

n-l

ine

sam

ple

ser

vice

ww

w.c

amir

afab

rics

.co

m/s

amp

les

To o

rder

sam

ple

s, v

isit

ou

r o

n-l

ine

sam

ple

ser

vice

ww

w.b

rad

bu

ryfa

bri

cs.c

om

To o

rder

sam

ple

s, v

isit

ou

r o

n-l

ine

sam

ple

ser

vice

ww

w.c

amir

afab

rics

.co

m/s

amp

les

To o

rder

sam

ple

s, v

isit

ou

r o

n-l

ine

sam

ple

ser

vice

ww

w.b

rad

bu

ryfa

bri

cs.c

om

To o

rder

sam

ple

s, v

isit

ou

r o

n-l

ine

sam

ple

ser

vice

ww

w.c

amir

afab

rics

.co

m/s

amp

les

To o

rder

sam

ple

s, v

isit

ou

r o

n-l

ine

sam

ple

ser

vice

ww

w.b

rad

bu

ryfa

bri

cs.c

om

To o

rder

sam

ple

s, v

isit

ou

r o

n-l

ine

sam

ple

ser

vice

ww

w.c

amir

afab

rics

.co

m/s

amp

les

To o

rder

sam

ple

s, v

isit

ou

r o

n-l

ine

sam

ple

ser

vice

ww

w.b

rad

bu

ryfa

bri

cs.c

om

Bradbury Camirawww.bradburyfabrics.com www.camirafabrics.com/samples

Fire RetardancyBritish Standard BS 7176: 2007 allows premises to be divided into different categories of fire hazard. Within each category, test methods indicate the resistance to ignition sources, and at which hazard level. This information should allow you to select the appropriate fabric for your premises.

Low HazardUpdated BS 7176 Test Methods: BS EN 1021 1,2 Resistance to ignition sources cigarette and match.Typical Examples: Offices, schools, colleges, universities, museums, exhibitions and day centres.

Medium HazardBS 7176 Test Methods: BS 5852: 2006Resistance to ignition sources 0, 1, 5 (cigarette and match crib 5). Typical Examples: Hotel bedrooms, hospitals, public buildings, café and restaurants, places of public entertainment, pubs and bars, bingo halls.

Found a fabric? Now contact our sales team for a quotation.

320 Fabrics Information (15).indd 1 02/12/2014 10:17

Page 323: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

Standards

ISO 9001 is a positive statement regarding the quality of Woodstock Leabank’s management systems.

It is the accreditation that certifies the importance we place on meeting our customers needs, and the approval for our working practices, procedures and processes.

ISO 14001 is the certification that demonstrates the commitment to our Environmental Management Systems and responsibilities applying to the environmental impact of the sale, distribution and installation of office furniture.

OHSAS 18001 is a UK standard enabling businesses to measure and demonstrate their commitment to Occupational Health and Safety. As a Woodstock Leabank customer, you can take confidence that we exercise due diligence in regard to health & safety and working practices.

Woodstock onlineTo find out more about us, and how we can support your business visit our website:

www.woodstockleabank.co.uk

2015 COVERS FOR FLICKY.indd 4 08/12/2014 12:21

Page 324: 2015 StudioLine Buyers Guide

EVALUATE - DES IGN - SPECIFY - SUPPLY - COMPLETE SOLUT IONS

AT STUDIOLINE

We know about space and design

- and being cost effective -

Our profess ional service provides a complete solution

for the creation of any environment.

Partit ion Wall and Storage Wall systems, elegant in design

and aesthetically pleasing provide flexibi l ity and maintain

your investment.

Furniture to match the wall system compliments

the interior.

Design and specification caters for bespoke

furniture and fittings.

StudioLine Ltd., Briarleas, Julianstown, Co. Meath, Ireland.

Tel: Freephone 1800 384 400 / +353 (0) 41 983 8440 Fax: +353 (0) 41 982 9165

Email: [email protected] Kevin Stanley Robert Tully

Website: www.studioline.ie Registered in Ireland 400044

Project Office: Ferris House, Constitution Hill, Drogheda, Co. Louth, Ireland.

A.Dip.Des.MA